A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...
A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...
A THEOLOGICAL JOURNAL XLIV 2002 Published by the Protestant ...
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
A <strong>THEOLOGICAL</strong> <strong>JOURNAL</strong><br />
Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden<br />
und Christen?<br />
The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism:<br />
From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Philosophy to <strong>the</strong><br />
Talmudsí Religion<br />
Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des<br />
Buchdruckers und Konvertiten Johannes<br />
Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />
The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech<br />
Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior to <strong>the</strong> Thirty<br />
Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness<br />
of Persecution<br />
Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />
1<br />
<strong>XLIV</strong> <strong>2002</strong><br />
<strong>Published</strong><br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty<br />
of Charles University Prague<br />
137
A <strong>THEOLOGICAL</strong> <strong>JOURNAL</strong><br />
Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden<br />
und Christen?<br />
The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism:<br />
From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Philosophy to <strong>the</strong><br />
Talmudsí Religion<br />
Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des<br />
Buchdruckers und Konvertiten Johannes<br />
Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />
The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech<br />
Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior to <strong>the</strong> Thirty<br />
Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness of<br />
Persecution<br />
Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />
1<br />
<strong>XLIV</strong> <strong>2002</strong><br />
<strong>Published</strong><br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty<br />
of Charles University Prague<br />
142
CONTENTS (<strong>XLIV</strong>, <strong>2002</strong>) Nr. 1<br />
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PETR SL¡MA<br />
Aufzeichnungen aus den bˆhmischen Dˆrfern<br />
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GERHARD SAUTER<br />
Eine gemeinsame Hoffnung von Juden und Christen?<br />
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JACOB NEUSNER<br />
The Formation of Rabbinic Judaism: From <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís<br />
Philosophy to <strong>the</strong> Talmudsí Religion<br />
44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />
Eine j¸disch-deutsche Handschrift des Buchdruckers und<br />
Konvertiten Johannes Helicz, Breslau 1537<br />
51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
The Crisis of <strong>the</strong> Union of Czech Brethren in <strong>the</strong> Years Prior<br />
to <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years War or On <strong>the</strong> Usefulness of Persecution<br />
69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
Access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls ñ V<br />
Book Review<br />
126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAVEL HOäEK<br />
The Trinity and <strong>the</strong> Interfaith<br />
S. Mark Heim, The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology<br />
of Religious Ends<br />
132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILIP »APEK<br />
The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture<br />
138
a <strong>the</strong>ological journal<br />
<strong>Published</strong> <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty of Charles University,<br />
»ern· 9, 115 55 Praha 1, Czech Republic.<br />
Associate editors: Ivana Noble, Tom·ö HanËil and Petr Sl·ma<br />
Typography: Petr Kadlec<br />
Printed <strong>by</strong> Arch, Brno<br />
Administration: Barbara Kolafov· (cv-adm@etf.cuni.cz)<br />
Annual subscription (for three issues) : 28 € or <strong>the</strong> equivalent<br />
in Europe, 25 USD for overseas. Single copy: 10 € or 9 USD.<br />
Please make <strong>the</strong> payment to our account to:<br />
»esk· spo¯itelna / VodiËkova 9 / 110 00 Praha 1 / Czech Republic<br />
account # 3062 457-018/ 0800.<br />
Orders, subscriptions and all business correspondence<br />
should be adressed to:<br />
Communio viatorum<br />
»ern· 9<br />
P. O. Box 529<br />
CZ-115 55 Praha 1<br />
Czech Republic<br />
Phone: + + 420 2 21988 205<br />
Fax: + + 420 2 21988 215<br />
E- mail: cv@etf.cuni.cz<br />
URL: http://www.etf.cuni.cz/cv.html<br />
(ISSN 0010-3713)<br />
I»O vydavatele (ETF UK, »ern· 9, 115 55 Praha 1) 00216208. EvidenËnÌ ËÌslo MK »R 6374.<br />
139
EDITORIAL<br />
Aufzeichnungen aus den bˆhmischen Dˆrfern<br />
Der blutige Fr¸hling <strong>2002</strong> im Heiligen Land†ñ kein nur frommes<br />
Wort, sondern die wahrscheinlich politisch korrekteste Bezeichnung<br />
des Territoriums, in dem sich die chronischen Auseinandersetzungen<br />
zwischen Israelis und Pal‰stinensern mit derzeit erneuter Heftigkeit<br />
abspielen, hat die Frage nach den Perspektiven des vor fast zehn<br />
Jahren begonnenen Friedensprozesses in Israel / Pal‰stina wieder laut<br />
werden lassen. Die Gewalt ist zu tragischen Dimensionen eskaliert.<br />
Will man die Ursachen dieses Konfliktes diskutieren, muss man sich<br />
jeweils mit der Perspektive beider Seiten auseinandersetzen. Das sich<br />
daraus entwickelnde Bild wird infolgedessen immer ein ambivalentes<br />
sein m¸ssen. Die Folgen der neuen Welle der Gewalt lassen sich heute<br />
noch kaum absch‰tzen. Gerade diese Komplexit‰t verbietet es aber,<br />
simple Konfliktlˆsungen zu finden. Als bestes Beispiel einer schlechten<br />
Lˆsung seien hier die ÑRezepteì des Ministerpr‰sidenten Miloö<br />
Zeman erw‰hnt, die er w‰hrend seines Besuches in Israel im Februar<br />
<strong>2002</strong> zum Besten gab, indem er Arafat mit Hitler verglich und die<br />
Aussiedlung der Pal‰stinenser bef¸rwortete.<br />
Wir kˆnnen die Augen vor dem israelisch-pal‰stinensischen Konflikt<br />
nicht verschlieflen. Zum einen, weil es um menschliches Leid<br />
geht, das uns angeht, genauso wie etwa das Leid der Nordkoreaner,<br />
der Tschetschenen oder Somalier, das uns zu konkreten Formen unserer<br />
Hilfe auffordert. Dar¸ber hinaus birgt die Situation in Israel/<br />
Pal‰stina f¸r europ‰ische Christen und Christinnen eine doppelte<br />
Relevanz: Die Entstehung des modernen Staates Israel steht, neben<br />
allen innerj¸dischen wie auch allgemein abendl‰ndischen Peripetien,<br />
in direktem Zusammenhang mit der Tragˆdie des Vˆlkermordes,<br />
an dem sich viele Europ‰er unter dem nationalsozialistischen<br />
Regime in Deutschland beteiligt haben. Aber mehr noch: Die Geschichte<br />
des auserw‰hlten Volkes und des verlobten Landes, wie sie<br />
im Alten Testament geschildert wird, bestimmt die Landschaft unseres<br />
Glaubens. Die Juden, die mit dem biblischen Volk in einem direkten<br />
Kontinuum stehen, die aber unsere Trennung der Konfessionalit‰t<br />
und Nationalit‰t nie vˆllig akzeptieren konnten und die<br />
selbst†ñ zitiert nach der Unabh‰ngigkeitserkl‰rung des ersten israe-<br />
1
EDITORIAL<br />
lischen Ministerpr‰sidenten David Ben Gurion†ñ den Aufbau eines<br />
israelischen Staates Ñim Lichte der Weissagungen der Prophetenì<br />
sehen, gehˆren in den Horizont unseres Glaubens. Umso vorsichtiger<br />
m¸ssen wir mit Formulierungen bez¸glich der heutigen Lage in<br />
Israel/Pal‰stina sein.<br />
Zur Relevanz des heutigen Judentums haben sich die in der<br />
Leuenberger Gemeinschaft verbundenen reformatorischen Kirchen,<br />
darunter auch die Ev. Kirche der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, bekannt, indem<br />
sie sich im Juni 2001 in Belfast das Lehrgespr‰chsergebnis der<br />
beauftragten Gruppe ÑKirche und Israelì zu eigen gemacht haben.<br />
In diesem Dokument heiflt es:<br />
ÑAus der Perspektive des christlichen Glaubens gilt, dass der<br />
bleibende Platz, der Israel zukommt, aus dem gˆttlichen Erw‰hlungshandeln<br />
resultiert. Israel selber definiert sich auch<br />
als Zusammenhang eines Volkslebens. Christen wissen, dass<br />
die Gemeinschaft des Volkes Israel durch ein Erw‰hlungshandeln<br />
Gottes begr¸ndet ist, welches sich auf einen Lebenszusammenhang<br />
bezieht, der sowohl sozial wie religiˆs bestimmt<br />
ist.ì (II 3.1.1.)<br />
Inwieweit sich daraus allerdings eine religiˆse Relevanz des Staates<br />
Israel ableiten l‰sst und was unter dieser Relevanz genau zu verstehen<br />
ist, bleibt unbeantwortet. Der israelische Historiker Mosche<br />
Zimmermann beobachtet die wachsende Rolle religiˆser Motive und<br />
Argumentationen in der heutigen israelischen Gesellschaft mit grofler<br />
Besorgnis, denn die Expansion der Religion sei, so Zimmermann,<br />
die Ursache der heutigen Unruhen. Zimmermann verbirgt nicht, dass<br />
seine Zuneigung dem Ñalten guten linkenì†ñ und aufgrund der Rereligionisation<br />
des Judentums schnell verschwundenen†ñ s‰kularen<br />
Zionismus gehˆrt. Jacob Neusner, der amerikanische j¸dische Theologe<br />
und Forscher im Bereich des rabbinischen†ñ oder wie er es nennt,<br />
des Ñformativenì Judentums, weist wiederum das nationale Element<br />
im Judentum zur¸ck, wenn er in einer in der Zeitschrift Commentary<br />
verˆffentlichten Diskussion einen Artikel mit dem charakteristischen<br />
Titel schreibt: ÑWhy Iím Not an Ethnic Jew†ñ Why Iím a†Religious<br />
Jewì. Hier jedoch, im Communio Viatorum, bringt Neusner seine<br />
2
EDITORIAL<br />
These vor, in der er die im 3. Jh. verfertigte Mischna als ein utopisch-philosophisches<br />
Dokument bezeichnet, das sich mit dem Fall<br />
des Jerusalemer Tempels auseinandersetzt†ñ im Unterschied zu dem<br />
im 5. Jh. entstandenen Jerusalemer Talmud, der auf Grund der Erfahrung<br />
mit dem Aufstieg des Christentums seine eigene Version des<br />
Heils, also eine Religion, vorlegt. Symbolisiert die Frage nach der<br />
Gestalt des Heils die Trennung zwischen Synagoge und Kirche, dann<br />
ist im Gegensatz dazu das Erwarten der Erlˆsung inmitten einer<br />
unerlˆsten Welt, nach dem in Prag gehaltenen Vortrag des Bonner<br />
systematischen Theologen Gerhard Sauter, zugleich das Element, das<br />
beide ÑVˆlkerì verbindet. Am Ende seiner Vorlesung bekennt Sauter:<br />
ÑAls Versˆhner steht Jesus zwischen Christen und Juden†ñ aber nicht,<br />
um sie voneinander zu trennen.ì<br />
Was ergibt sich daraus f¸r den christlichen Auftrag, der am Ende<br />
des Matth‰usevangeliums lautet: ÑDarum gehet hin und machet zu<br />
J¸ngern alle Vˆlker?ì Diese Frage ist vielerorts in Kirchengemeinden<br />
Tschechiens diskutiert worden. Im Synodalbeschluss der<br />
Ev. Kirche der Bˆhmischen Br¸der zur Beziehung zwischen Christen<br />
und Juden vom Mai <strong>2002</strong> heiflt es:<br />
Paulus bezeichnet den Weg Gottes mit Israel als ein Geheimnis,<br />
durch das die ÑF¸lle der Heiden zum Heilì gelingen kann.<br />
Eben dann, wenn die Juden in ihrer Beziehung zu Gott die<br />
christliche Auffassung Christi ablehnen, sehen wir in dieser<br />
Ablehnung einen Ausdruck dieses Geheimnisses, das f¸r uns<br />
schwierig und beunruhigend ist. Zugleich aber sehen wir in<br />
dieser Haltung eine Treue mit dem Bund, den Gott mit Israel<br />
geschlossen hat. Mission gehˆrt zum Wesen der Kirche. Die<br />
Kirche ist durch eine erweiterte Einladung zum Erwarten des<br />
Gottesreiches entstanden und als solche soll diese Einladung<br />
Ñallen Vˆlkernì vermittelt werden. Ganz deutlich ist diese Aufgabe<br />
in der s‰kularisierten tschechischen Gesellschaft zu erkennen†ñ<br />
und ebenso deutlich auch, wie wenig wir dieser Aufgabe<br />
gerecht werden. Als Christen bleiben wir jedoch immer<br />
diejenigen, die selbst in den ÷lbaum Israels eingepfropft worden<br />
sind. Darum meinen wir, dass die Kirche der Synagoge<br />
gegen¸ber in einer br¸derlichen Beziehung steht.<br />
3
EDITORIAL<br />
Sicherlich gab es zwischen Christentum und Judentum immer<br />
‹bertritte und zwar in beide Richtungen†ñ und nicht selten mit betr‰chtlichen<br />
Folgen. In seiner Studie erforscht Martin Rothkegel die<br />
Umst‰nde und Folgen der in den 30er Jahren des 16. Jh. vollzogenen<br />
Konversion der Krakauer j¸dischen Druckerfamilie Helicz. Im Zusammenhang<br />
mit der von der Br¸derunit‰t geleisteten tschechischen<br />
Kralitzer Bibel¸bersetzung wird ein Nachkomme dieser Familie<br />
Lucas Helicz, erw‰hnt. Jind¯ich Halama Jr. beobachtet die Wege der<br />
Br¸derunit‰t zu Beginn des 17. Jh. Er zeigt den Zusammenhang auf<br />
zwischen dem Verlust des Ñprophetischen Grundtonsì innerhalb der<br />
Unit‰t, der das hussitische Erbe charakterisierte, und dem allm‰hlichen<br />
Prozess eines Ñsich der Welt ÷ffnensì, das zur Anpassung an<br />
die politischen Gegebenheiten f¸hren muflte. ÑVon Qumran nach<br />
Kunvaldì, so deutete vor mehr als dreiflig Jahren Stanislav Segert<br />
eine gewisse Gedankenverwandtschaft an, die zwischen j¸dischen<br />
Essenern und der urspr¸nglichen bˆhmischen Br¸derunit‰t zweifelsohne<br />
besteht. In diesem Heft legt Segert einen weiteren Teil seiner<br />
umfangreichen rezensierenden Reihe der essenischen Biblio<strong>the</strong>k vor.<br />
Petr Sl·ma<br />
4
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN<br />
UND CHRISTEN?<br />
Gerhard Sauter, Bonn<br />
Was f¸r eine Frage!<br />
Sind Juden und Christen durch eine gemeinsame Hoffnung miteinander<br />
verbunden ñ vielleicht eher als durch einen gemeinsamen Glauben?<br />
Diese Frage wird heute oft spontan mit ÑJaì beantwortet. Das<br />
scheint auch nahezuliegen, wenn man traditionsgeschichtlich denkt:<br />
Die fr¸hen Schriften des Christentums berufen sich h‰ufig auf Erwartungen<br />
aus prophetischen und apokalyptischen Texten und halten<br />
viele dieser Erwartungen aufrecht, andere Erwartungen sehen sie hingegen<br />
als ¸berholt an, denn sie seien durch die Christusgeschichte<br />
Ñerf¸lltì: ein hˆchst interpretationsbed¸rftiges Wort! 1 Jesus Christus,<br />
der von Gott Gekommene, wird als Ñder Kommendeì 2 erwartet, als<br />
der Weltenrichter am J¸ngsten Tage ñ doch darin stimmen Juden und<br />
Christen gerade nicht ¸berein. Also doch keine gemeinsame Hoffnung<br />
von Juden und Christen? Oder vielleicht eine aufgespaltene<br />
Hoffnung, von der ein Teil, etwa die Erwartung des Weltendes, Juden<br />
und Christen gemeinsam w‰re, w‰hrend Christus trennend zwischen<br />
Juden und Christen st¸nde? Dies g‰lte zumindest bis zum Ende der<br />
Welt, und das w‰re dann lange genug! Christen hoffen darauf, dafl<br />
Jesus Christus wiederkommt und vollendet, wozu er einst gekommen<br />
ist ñ f¸r Juden dagegen stehen Erlˆser und Erlˆsung noch aus.<br />
Ungef‰hr so lautet die Gegen¸berstellung, wie sie die wechselseitige<br />
Wahrnehmung von Judentum und Christentum lange Zeit bestimmt<br />
hat. Es ist eine etwas subtilere Sicht, als wir sie aus manchen<br />
bildlichen Darstellungen vor allem aus dem Mittelalter und der fr¸-<br />
1 Berechtigte Einw‰nde nennt Gerhard Safl, Leben aus den Verheiflungen<br />
(FRLANT 164), Gˆttingen 1995, 261 f.<br />
2 Zu diesem Pr‰dikat s. Gerhard Sauter, Einf¸hrung in die Eschatologie, Darmstadt<br />
1995, 45ñ54.<br />
5
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
hen Neuzeit kennen. Hatten die Juden die Sorge vor einem falschen<br />
Messias 3 parat, um fremde Hoffnungsvorstellungen zu personalisieren,<br />
zu demaskieren und damit auszuschlieflen, so wurde auf christlicher<br />
Seite der Antichrist oft mit j¸dischen Z¸gen versehen 4 . Soweit<br />
ich sehe, sind es Christen h‰ufiger als Juden gewesen, die die andere<br />
Seite als einen Gegenpol betrachteten und den Kontrast schilderten,<br />
um dadurch die eigene Position abzugrenzen und auch sch‰rfer zu<br />
zeichnen. Diese polemische Darstellung konnte zus‰tzlich durch die<br />
Selbstwahrnehmung diktiert werden, durch eine Selbsteinsch‰tzung,<br />
die alles, was man f¸r sich selber als eigent¸mlich und wesentlich<br />
beanspruchte, herausstellte. Auf christlicher Seite wurden schon fr¸h<br />
das ÑGeistlich/Spirituelleì im Gegensatz zum ÑFleischlich/Materiellenì<br />
5 , sp‰ter das Jenseits als ‹berbietung des Diesseits und das Individuelle<br />
im Gegen¸ber zum Sozialen hervorgehoben.<br />
1 Das Kontrastschema ÑSchon jetzt/Noch nichtì<br />
Handelt es sich bei der Zeitvorstellung und dem Geschichtsbild, das<br />
ich eingangs skizzierte, auch um ein solches Wahrnehmungsmuster?<br />
In ihm stellt sich das Verh‰ltnis von Judentum und Christentum etwa<br />
3 Eine Schl¸sselrolle spielte Sabbatai Zwi (1626ñ1676); vgl. die Darstellung seiner<br />
messianischen Krˆnung (in diesem Falle eine positive Zeichnung): Judentum in<br />
Kunst und Literatur, hg. von Sharon R. Keller, Kˆln 1995, 137.<br />
4 Beispiele: Der Antichrist und Die f¸nfzehn Zeichen vor dem J¸ngsten Gericht.<br />
Faksimile der ersten typographischen Ausgabe [Straflburg 1480]. Inkunabel der<br />
Stadt- und Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k Frankfurt am Main Inc. fol. 116 I/n, mit Beitr‰gen<br />
von Karin Boveland, Christoph Peter Burger und Ruth Steffen, Hamburg/Amsterdam<br />
1989.<br />
5 Der Kirchenvater Hieronymus statuiert: ÑEin weiser christlicher Leser sollte bei<br />
den prophetischen Verheiflungen dieser Regel folgen: Wir lehren, dafl das, was die<br />
Juden und die j¸disch denken bei den Unsrigen ñ vielmehr bei denen, die nicht zu<br />
uns gehˆren ñ, in fleischlicher Weise als zuk¸nftig beanspruchen, in geistlicher<br />
Weise schon eingetroffen ist, damit wir nicht angesichts derartiger Erz‰hlungen oder<br />
schier unbeantwortbarer apostolischer Fragestellungen gezwungen sind, j¸disch zu<br />
denken.ì ñ ÑPrudens et christianus lector hanc habeat repromissionum prophetalium<br />
regulam, ut quaea ludaei et nostri, immo non nostri ludaizantes, carnaliter futura<br />
contendunt, nos spiritaliter iam transacta doceamus, ne per occasionem istiusmodi<br />
fabularum et inextricabilium iuxta apostolorum quaestionum iudaizare cogamur.ì<br />
Commentarius in Esaiam IV [407/408], zu Jes ll,15ff.: CChr.SL 73, Turnhout 1963,<br />
157, 43ñ48.<br />
6
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
so dar: Juden sind aufs intensivste der Hoffnung verschworen, w‰hrend<br />
f¸r Christen die Hoffnung ein Ausblick ihres Glaubens ist, nicht<br />
weniger, aber auch nicht mehr. Ihr Blick ist haupts‰chlich auf die<br />
Geschichte Jesu Christi gerichtet und damit in erster Linie auf etwas,<br />
das ein f¸r allemal geschehen ist: ÑEs ist vollbracht!ì, ruft Jesus am<br />
Kreuz aus (Joh 19,30). 6<br />
Dieses Kontrastschema wurde popul‰r, und es geistert durch<br />
Selbst- und Fremdbilder in Judentum und Christentum, durch Bilder<br />
von sich selber und vom Anderen, auch durch Bilder, die differenzierter<br />
ausfallen. Mit diesem Schema mˆchte ich mich in einem ersten<br />
Durchgang auseinandersetzen.<br />
1.1 Zuteil gewordene Erlˆsung ñ ein Trennungszeichen?<br />
Drei repr‰sentative Zitaten mˆgen das Schema erl‰utern. Die ersten<br />
beiden stammen aus dem denkw¸rdigen Zwiegespr‰ch Martin Bubers<br />
mit dem Bonner Neutestamentler Karl Ludwig Schmidt im J¸dischen<br />
Lehrhaus in Stuttgart am 14. Januar 1933. Buber zeichnet sein Bild<br />
von der christlichen Kirche so:<br />
ÑDie Kirche steht auf dem Glauben an das Gekommensein Christi,<br />
als an die der Menschheit durch Gott zuteil gewordene Erlˆsung. Wir<br />
Israel vermˆgen das nicht zu glauben. [Ö] Wir sp¸ren die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it<br />
der Welt. Eben dieses unser Sp¸ren kann oder mufl die Kirche als<br />
das Bewufltsein unserer Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it verstehen. Aber wir wissen es<br />
anders.<br />
Erlˆsung der Welt ist unverbr¸chlich eins mit der Vollendung der<br />
Schˆpfung, mit der Aufrichtung einer durch nichts mehr behinderten,<br />
keinen Widerspruch mehr erleidenden, in all der Vielf‰ltigkeit der<br />
Welt verwirklichten Einheit, eins mit dem erf¸llten Kˆnigtum Gottes.<br />
Eine Vorwegnahme der vollzogenen Welterlˆsung zu irgend einem<br />
6 Karl Barth versteht das Eschaton und damit ÑErlˆsungì und ÑHoffnungì von<br />
Joh 19,30 her, so in einem Brief an Helmut Gollwitzer vom 7. November 1967:<br />
Karl Barth, Briefe 1961ñ1968, hg. von J¸rgen Fangmeier und Hinrich Stoevesandt,<br />
Z¸rich 1975, 445. In seiner ÑKirchlichen Dogmatikì hebt Barth hervor, dafl die<br />
Versˆhnung Gottes Ñein f¸r allemalì (Rom 6,10; Hebr 7,27; 9,12) f¸r alle Menschen<br />
aller Zeiten geschehen sei. Vgl. Gotthard Oblau, Gotteszeit und Menschenzeit.<br />
Eschatologie in der Kirchlichen Dogmatik von Karl Barth (NBST 6), Neukirchen-<br />
Vluyn 1988, bes. 178ñ195, Zitat: 178.<br />
7
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
Teil, etwa ein Schonerlˆstsein der Seele, vermˆgen wir nicht zu fassen,<br />
wiewohl sich auch uns, in unsern sterblichen Stunden Erlˆsen<br />
und Erlˆstwerden kundtut. Eine Z‰sur nehmen wir in der Geschichte<br />
nicht wahr. Wir kennen [in] ihr keine Mitte, sondern nur ein Ziel, das<br />
Ziel des Weges Gottes, der nicht inneh‰lt auf seinem Weg.ì 7<br />
Buber r¸ckt diese Unterscheidung in den Mittelpunkt, obwohl dies<br />
mit den Kennworten Thema des Dialogs ÑKirche, Staat, Volk, Judentumì<br />
so nicht vorgesehen war.<br />
Schmidt antwortete: Auch wir Christen sehen Ñwie die Juden auf<br />
das Ende. Aber wir wagen das nur auf Grund der Tatsache, dafl Gott<br />
in Jesus Christus das Ende schon heraufgefuhrt hat. Von der Ankunft<br />
Jesu Christi am Ende der Tage sprechen wir nur als von einer zweiten<br />
Ankunft, seiner Wiederkunft.ì 8<br />
Leider beschr‰nkt Schmidt sich hier auf ein Geschichtsbild: Jesus<br />
Christus als Ende oder Wende der Geschichte; dies ist eine Redeweise,<br />
die in neuzeitlicher christlicher Theologie gel‰ufig geworden ist. 9<br />
Hier tritt die Erwartung Jesu Christi als des ÑKommendenì merkw¸rdig<br />
zur¸ck. Ist diese Hoffnung in Kirche und Theologie ¸berhaupt<br />
noch lebendig?<br />
Unvergefllich bleibt mir ein Gespr‰ch mit dem Philosophen Ernst<br />
Bloch, der mich 1963 fragte, warum j¸ngere Theologen (er erw‰hnte<br />
J¸rgen Moltmann und Wolfhart Pannenberg) sich so sehr mit der<br />
Auferstehung Jesu besch‰ftigten und sich darum k¸mmerten, wie das<br />
7 Kirche, Staat, Volk, Judentum: Karl Ludwig Schmidt, Neues Testament ñ Judentum-Kirche.<br />
Kleine Schriften, hg. von Gerhard Sauter (TB 69), M¸nchen 1981,<br />
149ñ165, Zitate: 158f.<br />
8 A.a.O. 164.<br />
9 Zum Beispiel: Rudolf Bultmann, Geschichte und Eschatologie, T¸bingen 1958,<br />
49: ÑÖdie Geschichte hat ihr Ende erreicht, weil Christus das Ende des Gesetzes ist<br />
(Rom 10,4).ì ñ Friedrich Gogarten, Jesus Christus Wende der Welt. Grundfragen zur<br />
Christologie, T¸bingen 1966.<br />
Die Auffassung, Jesus Christus sei das Ende der Geschichte, bezieht sich dagegen<br />
in der Heilsgeschichtlichen Theologie des 19. Jahrhunderts (J. C. K. von Hofmann,<br />
C.E. Luthardt, J.T. Beck, C. A. Auberlen u. a.) grunds‰tzlich auf die erwartete Parusie<br />
Christi; faktisch herrscht allerdings auch dort die Anschauung vor, die gesamte<br />
Zeitspanne seit dem Kommen Christi in die Welt und vor seiner Wiederkunft sei als<br />
ÑZeit der Kircheì die Endzeit. Mit diesem Zeit- und Geschichtsverst‰ndnis wenden<br />
sich eine Generation sp‰ter namhafte Dogmatiker verschiedener <strong>the</strong>ologischer Richtungen<br />
(z. B. I. A. Dorner, J. Kaftan) ausdr¸cklich gegen das (alttestamentliche)<br />
Judentum.<br />
8
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
Ostergeschehen wirkungsgeschichtlich nachgewiesen werden kˆnne.<br />
Zu seiner Studienzeit h‰tten die f¸hrenden Theologen (Bloch dachte<br />
vor allem an Adolf von Harnack und Ernst Troeltsch) viel eher die<br />
Frage nach dem historischen Jesus im Visier gehabt. Beides aber, so<br />
fuhr Bloch fort, ¸berzeuge ihn ¸berhaupt nicht. Viel entscheidender<br />
sei doch, ob Jesus von Nazareth als der Kommende erwartet w¸rde<br />
und wie sich diese Hoffnung zeige.<br />
Seit zwei, drei Jahrzehnten hat sich in dieser Hinsicht manches<br />
ver‰ndert, allerdings nicht f¸r die Erwartung Jesu Christi, aber in<br />
einer Ann‰herung von Christologie und Messianismus, der Hoffnung<br />
auf eine k¸nftige Erlˆsung. 10 Dem Kreuzesruf Jesu entgegen heiflt es<br />
auf dem Kreuzweg von Menschen: ÑEs ist noch nicht vollbracht.ì 11<br />
Darauf m¸ssen wir zur¸ckkommen.<br />
Lassen wir uns von Martin Buber daran erinnern, dafl sich an dem<br />
Kennwort ÑErlˆsungì Juden und Christen scheiden, und zwar nicht<br />
nur in ihrer Sicht der Geschichte, sondern in ihrer Hoffnung auf die<br />
Vollendung der Schˆpfung. 12<br />
1.2 Eine Rekonstruktion der Ñmessianischen Idee im Judentumì<br />
Ein Vierteljahrhundert sp‰ter r¸ckt der j¸dische Religionssoziologe<br />
Gershom Scholem das Verst‰ndnis von ÑErlˆsungì als Trennungselement<br />
in den Vordergrund:<br />
ÑDas Judentum hat, in allen seinen Formen und Gestaltungen, stets<br />
an einem Begriff von Erlˆsung festgehalten, der sie als einen Vorgang<br />
auffaflte, welcher sich in der ÷ffentlichkeit vollzieht, auf dem Schauplatz<br />
der Geschichte und im Medium der Gemeinschaft, kurz, der<br />
sich entscheidend in der Welt des Sichtbaren vollzieht und ohne solche<br />
Erscheinung im Sichtbaren nicht gedacht werden kann. Demgegen¸ber<br />
steht im Christentum eine Auffassung, welche die Erlˆsung<br />
10 Bei J¸rgen Moltmann, Der Weg Jesu Christi. Christologie in messianischen<br />
Dimensionen, M¸nchen 1989, fehlt jeder Hinweis auf Joh 19,30. ñ Moltmann mˆchte<br />
von der ÑWiedergeburt des messianischen Denkens im Judentumì ausgehen:<br />
Ders., Das Kommen Gottes. Christliche Eschatologie, G¸tersloh 1995,47ñ64.<br />
11 Zum Beispiel: Es ist noch nicht vollbracht. Werkbuch zum Jugendkreuzweg, hg.<br />
von Peter Bleeser, Uwe Seidel und Hans-Georg Ziebertz, D¸sseldorf 1987.<br />
12 Kirche, Staat, Volk, Judentum: a.a.O. 158.<br />
9
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
als einen Vorgang im geistigen 13 Bereich und im Unsichtbaren ergreift,<br />
der sich in der Seele, in der Welt jedes einzelnen, abspielt, und<br />
der eine geheime Verwandlung bewirkt, der nichts ƒufleres in der<br />
Welt entsprechen mufl.ì 14<br />
Dies d¸rfte ein typisches Beispiel f¸r Selbstbild und Bild des Fremden<br />
sein, das eine als Gegenbild des Anderen. Auf welche Ph‰nomene<br />
bezieht sich dieses Bild des Anderen? Inwiefern wird aus der<br />
Selbstwahrnehmung das, was in ihr verneint und aus ihr ausgegrenzt<br />
werden soll, auf den Anderen projiziert? Oder umgekehrt: Was am<br />
Anderen gesehen wird, kann derart anziehend erscheinen, dafl es zu<br />
einer neuen Selbstbestimmung herangezogen wird. So wird heute die<br />
messianische Auffassung der ÑErlˆsung auf dem Schauplatz der Geschichte<br />
und im Medium der Gemeinschaftì von vielen Theologen<br />
und Theologinnen im christlich-j¸dischen Gespr‰ch der eigenen<br />
Eschatologie einverleibt, um sich auf eine gemeinsame Basis zu st¸tzen.<br />
Zugleich soll dies von dem Vorwurf befreien, gegen die Hoffnung<br />
auf Welterlˆsung geglaubt und dadurch der Unterdr¸ckung und<br />
sogar der Vernichtung von Juden Vorschub geleistet zu haben.<br />
Scholem sieht den wesenhaften Unterschied zwischen Juden und<br />
Christen im Verh‰ltnis von Individuum und Gemeinschaft. Der Christ<br />
brauche sich letztlich um nichts mehr zu k¸mmern, was in der sozialen<br />
Welt vor sich geht, jedenfalls betreffe dies nichts, was seine Erlˆsung<br />
angeht ñ die j¸dische Erwartung kenne dagegen keine individuelle<br />
Rettung bei Fortbestand einer verkehrten Welt, und das bedeutet:<br />
solange das j¸dische Volk noch leiden mufl, noch kein endg¸ltiges<br />
Heimatrecht gefunden hat, noch immer nicht sein soziales Leben<br />
ungestˆrt, allein von Gott her ordnen kann. Das Schema lautet jetzt:<br />
÷ffentlich-Volk-Sichtbar versus Geistig(geistlich)-Individuum (Seele)-Unsichtbar.<br />
Zwischen den ersten beiden ƒuflerungen aus dem Zwiegespr‰ch<br />
zwischen Martin Buber und Karl Ludwig Schmidt und dem Diktum<br />
13 In einem Wiederabdruck des in Anm. 14 zitierten Aufsatzes (Ders., ‹ber einige<br />
Grundbegriffe des Judentums [edition suhrkamp 414], Frankfurt a. M. 1970, 121)<br />
‰ndert Scholem Ñgeistigì in Ñgeistlichì, versteht dies allerdings als Phrase.<br />
14 Zum Verst‰ndnis der messianischen Idee im Judentum: Ders., Judaica I, Frankfurt<br />
a.M. 1963, 7ñ74, Zitat: 7f.<br />
10
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
Gershom Scholems sind nur 26 Jahre vergangen, doch der Tonfall hat<br />
sich entscheidend ver‰ndert. 15<br />
Sch¸lern blickt auf die Gr¸ndung des Staates Israel zur¸ck, die<br />
von vielen Juden und J¸dinnen als Erlˆsung erlebt und auch so zur<br />
Sprache gebracht wurde: Die Zeit der Zerstreuung des j¸dischen Volkes,<br />
der Diaspora, ist zu Ende. Arnold Schˆnberg hat in seiner Vertonung<br />
von PS 130 (De Profundis, op. 50b) den Schluflvers: ÑJa, er wird<br />
Israel erlˆsen von allen seinen S¸ndenì (V. 8) nicht mehr als Verheiflung<br />
verstanden (eine Verheiflung, die auch in der Ank¸ndigung der<br />
Geburt Jesu bei Mt 1,21 aufgenommen wird). Bei Schˆnberg lautet<br />
der Vers: ÑEr erlˆst Israelì, denn die Verheiflung erscheint in der<br />
Gr¸ndung des Staates Israel als erf¸llt. Erlˆsung ist geschehen und<br />
kann nun geradezu triumphal erklingen. Damit wird evident, wie ÑErlˆsungì<br />
aufgefaflt werden soll: gehˆrt mit einem Jubelton dar¸ber,<br />
dafl ein jahrhundertelanges Leben in der Hoffnung zum Ziel gekommen<br />
und damit ein neuer Anfang geschafft worden ist. Scholem deu-<br />
15 Auf weitere Differenzen zwischen Buber und Scholem kann hier nur anmerkungsweise<br />
hingewiesen werden. Vgl. dazu Klaus Samuel Davidowicz, Gershom<br />
Scholem und Martin Buber. Die Geschichte eines MiflVerst‰ndnisses (NTDH 5),<br />
Neukirchen-Vluyn 1993. Gemeinsam ist Buber und Scholem ein zionistischer Hintergrund<br />
(22ñ69) sowie ihr ausgepr‰gtes Interesse an mystischen Strˆmungen im<br />
Judentum (Kabbala) (70ñ103), mehr noch der ÑKampf gegen das Dogma eines klar<br />
definierten ÇWesensë des Judentumsì (1), also die Bem¸hung, das Judentum aus<br />
schematischen Wahrnehmungen gerade zu befreien, auch wenn sich Spuren dieser<br />
Schemata gerade noch bei Buber und Scholem selbst finden. Das illustriert nicht<br />
zuletzt, wie tief solche Schemata festsitzen und wie schwierig ihre ‹berwindung<br />
ist. Differenzen zwischen Buber und Scholem bestehen in verschiedener Hinsicht.<br />
(1.) Methodisch: W‰hrend Buber sein eigenes Denken oft mit den Stoffen der Bearbeitung<br />
verwob, schuf Scholem durch die Anwendung philologischer Methoden<br />
eine Distanz zu den Gegenst‰nden, die er untersuchte. ÑAn die Stelle des traditionellen<br />
Kommentators tritt nun der Historiker.ì (148) (2.) Zeitgeschichtlich: Scholem<br />
analysiert die gegen¸ber der Vorkriegszeit ver‰nderte zeitgeschichtliche Situation,<br />
indem er 1961 anl‰fllich des Abschlusses der Buberschen ÑBibel-Verdeutschungì<br />
dieser eine geringe Wirkung im Judentum vorhersagt: ÑDie Juden, f¸r die Sie ¸bersetzt<br />
haben, gibt es nicht mehr. Die Kinder derer, die diesem Grauen entronnen sind,<br />
werden nicht mehr Deutsch lesen.ì (Scholem, An einem denkw¸rdigen Tage, 215;<br />
zitiert nach Davidowicz, 151) Und nach dem Tod Bubers erkl‰rt Scholem 1966 die<br />
tats‰chlich fast ausgebliebene Wirkung auf das Judentum so: ÑDenn der Apostel<br />
Israels sprach eine Sprache, die allen verst‰ndlicher war als den Juden selber.ì<br />
(Scholem, Martin Bubers Auffassung, 136; zititiert nach Davidowicz, 150) (3.)<br />
Theologisch: Scholem kritisierte Bubers von Chassidismus und Existentialismus<br />
gepr‰gte Auffassung von Schˆpfung und Erlˆsung, die er mit dessen Abneigung<br />
gegen die Apokalyptik in Verbindung bringt (156f.).<br />
11
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
tet allerdings auch an, Ñdafl die aus Grauen und Untergang geborene<br />
Bereitschaft, die die j¸dische Geschichte erst in unserer Generation<br />
gefunden hatì 16 , ein gef‰hrliches Risiko auf sich nehmen muflte: Nun<br />
gilt es, nicht mehr nur in der Hoffnung zu leben, sondern den Anspruch<br />
auf das eigene Land, den eigenen Staat als realisierte Erwartung<br />
einzulˆsen.<br />
Was wird dies fortan f¸r den Charakter j¸discher Hoffnung bedeuten:<br />
mehr und anderes als das Beharren auf einem staatspolitischen<br />
Status quol Dies ist ein Problem, welches die christlichen Kirchen im<br />
Verh‰ltnis zur politischen Verfassung ihrer Umwelt immer wieder<br />
bedr‰ngt hat. Ich erinnere nur an die Idee des christlichen Staates im<br />
19. Jahrhundert 17 und an Hegels Staats- und Religionsphilosophie.<br />
Es d¸rfte kein Zufall sein, wie Hegel hier das Judentum verzeichnete:<br />
ÑDas j¸dische Volk ist es, das sich Gott als den alten Schmerz der<br />
Welt aufbewahrt hatì 18 , Hegel hielt dem Judentum vor, in einem<br />
unversˆhnten Status der Welt verblieben zu sein, indem es annahm,<br />
dafl Gott in Distanz zur Welt verharre. Dagegen verstehe sich das<br />
Christentum aus der Versˆhnung Gottes mit der Welt in Jesus Christus.<br />
Den Ñalten Schmerz der Weltì habe die Versˆhnung ein f¸r allemal<br />
¸berwunden, und dieser ¸berwundene Schmerz konnte in der<br />
christlich gepr‰gten Geistesgeschichte zum Zuge kommen. Diese<br />
Geschichte sei ein Kampf um die Erhaltung der Versˆhnung in allen<br />
Lebensbereichen. 19 Hegel leitet daraus in seiner Religions-, Rechtsund<br />
Staatsphilosophie die Aufgaben ab, die geistig, ethisch und politisch<br />
zu erf¸llen seien. In seinen Fr¸hschriften hatte Hegel als Gegenbild<br />
die j¸dische Religion als Typus eines falschen, weil unversˆhnten<br />
Bewufltseins geschildert, das auf die verkehrte Welt starrt. 20 Dies ist<br />
16 A. a. O. 74.<br />
17 Vertreten vor allem von Friedrich Julius Stahl, Philosophie des Rechts, 3 Bde.,<br />
Heidelberg 1830 ñ1837, 3 1878 = Darmstadt 1963.<br />
18 Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, Vorlesungen ¸ber die Philosophie der Religion<br />
II: Ders., Werke, hg. von Eva Moldenhauer und Karl Markus Michel, Bd. 17, Frankfurt<br />
am Main 1969, 184.<br />
19 Weiteres dazu bei Peter Cornehl, Die Zukunft der Versˆhnung. Eschatologie und<br />
Emanzipation in der Aufkl‰rung, bei Hegel und in der Hegeischen Schule, Gˆttingen<br />
1971. ñ J¸rgen Gebhardt, Politik und Eschatologie, 1963.<br />
20 Vgl. H. J. Zeller, Religionsphilosophische Studien zur Kontinuit‰t des Problems<br />
der Negativit‰t als geschichtliche Erfahrung, philosophische Dissertation Kˆln<br />
1975.<br />
12
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
ein weiteres Wahrnehmungsmuster, das wir kritisch durchleuchten<br />
m¸ssen. Es hat dazu beigetragen, das Judentum zur Vorstufe zum<br />
Christentum herabzusetzen.<br />
Was ist sei<strong>the</strong>r geschehen! Das christliche Selbstbewufltsein, wie<br />
es sich bei Hegel und Gleichgesinnten aussprach, ist weithin einer<br />
Resignation oder zumindest der Skepsis gewichen. Was im letzten<br />
Jahrhundert Juden angetan wurde, himmelschreiend in Auschwitz<br />
und an anderen Orten, erscheint als un¸berhˆrbarer Widerspruch gegen<br />
eine bereits geschehene Versˆhnung, und Christen haben diesen<br />
Widerspruch zumindest nicht verhindert, wenn sie ihn nicht gar befˆrderten.<br />
Die Fronten erscheinen nun vertauscht: Das Judentum blickt auf<br />
eine Wende zur¸ck, auf das Ende einer unheilvollen Epoche seiner<br />
Volksgeschichte. Nunmehr kann ÑIsraelì zum eschato-logischen<br />
Licht f¸r die Vˆlker werden, weil sein Staatswesen die Erfahrungen<br />
vieler, vieler leidgepr¸fter Generationen in Solidarit‰t, Toleranz und<br />
kulturelle Vielfalt umzupr‰gen vermag. Der Christenheit wird vorgehalten,<br />
ein politisches mangelhaftes oder zumindest wirkungsloses<br />
Erlˆsungsverst‰ndnis zu pflegen, sich womˆglich in eine Innerlichkeit<br />
zu verkriechen, die sich mit Hafl auf alles Andersartige verb¸nden<br />
kann oder die Ausgrenzung Anderer in mitschuldigem Verschweigen<br />
hinnimmt. Der Anspruch, bereits erlˆst zu sein, habe sich mit<br />
dem geschichtlichen Versagen des Christentums von selber erledigt.<br />
Darauf haben viele Christinnen und Christen mit wachsender<br />
Empfindlichkeit f¸r die Schw‰chen einer verinnerlichten Erlˆsung<br />
reagiert. Die Einsicht in eigene Mitschuld an menschheitsgeschichtlichen<br />
Katastrophen lˆste ein Umdenken aus, das weiteres Fehlverhalten<br />
vermeiden sollte. Beispielsweise trat Helmut Gollwitzer unerm¸dlich<br />
daf¸r ein, die vielberufene und vielgescholtene Ñchristliche<br />
Innerlichkeitì zugunsten der t‰tigen Hoffnung auf Welterlˆsung abzusch¸tteln.<br />
Und weil er diese Umorientierung auf dem Vormarsch in<br />
evangelischer Kirche und Theologie sah, nannte er Scholems Zeichnung<br />
christlicher Theologie ein Zerrbild, das jedenfalls heute nicht<br />
mehr zutreffe. Scholem erwidert ihm, das Schon-Erlˆstsein der Seele<br />
sei jahrhundertelang den Juden von Christen als Trennungszeichen<br />
vorgehalten worden. Diese Auffassung habe nachweislich christliches<br />
Denken gepr‰gt, zumal das anmaflende Verhalten gegen¸ber Ju-<br />
13
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
den, wie es gerade auch in der Theologie verbreitet gewesen sei.<br />
Wenn christliche Theologen dies nun nicht mehr so sehen wollten<br />
und sogar die j¸dische Auffassung von Erlˆsung ¸bern‰hmen, sei<br />
dies ñ so fahrt Scholem fort ñ zwar schˆn und gut. Seien sich christliche<br />
Theologen aber ¸ber die Konsequenzen wirklich im klaren? Die<br />
ÑFormeln und Sentenzen, mit denen man den Juden so lange auf den<br />
Leib ger¸ckt istì, w¸rden Ñan ihrer eigenen Dialektik zerplatzenì 21 . ñ<br />
Wie dies zu verstehen ist, f¸hrt Scholem nicht weiter aus. Aus seiner<br />
Bewertung l‰flt sich schlieflen, dafl die Selbstbehauptung einer Ñwesentlich<br />
innerlichen Çgeistlichenë Natur der Erlˆsungì 22 an der historischen<br />
Realit‰t scheitert. Auch eine dialektische Theologie, die jeden<br />
Stolz auf menschliches Erlˆstsein radikal ablehnt, werde unter<br />
ihren eigenen Widerspr¸chen zusammenbrechen, weil sie der Erlˆsungsbed¸rftigkeit<br />
der Welt nicht Rechnung trage. 23 Denn sie verzichte<br />
darauf, sich auf Gedeih und Verderb f¸r die Erlˆsung einzusetzen,<br />
die nur gemeinschaftlich und geschichtlich erreicht werden<br />
kˆnne.<br />
21 G. Scholem, Nachbemerkung. Aus einem Brief an einen protestantischen Theologen:<br />
‹ber einige Grundbegriffe des Judentums, 169ñ170, Zitat: 170. H. Gollwitzer<br />
wird zwar nicht genannt, meine Vermutung, dafl er gemeint gewesen sei, ist<br />
mir aber von Gollwitzer best‰tigt worden. ñ Vgl. dazu auch Friedrich-Wilhelm<br />
Marquardt, Hermeneutik des christlichj¸dischen Verst‰ndnisses. ‹ber Helmut Gollwitzers<br />
Arbeit an der ÑJudenfrageì: Richte unsere F¸fle auf den Weg des Friedens<br />
(FS Helmut Gollwitzer), hg. von Andreas Baudis, Dieter Clausert, Volkhard Schliski<br />
und Bernhard Wegener unter Mitarbeit von Klaus Geyer und Friedrich-Wilhelm<br />
Marquardt, M¸nchen 1979, 138ñ154, Zitat: 143 mit Anm. 15.<br />
22 A. a. O. 169.<br />
23 Als ein Beleg kˆnnte genannt werden: Rudolf Bultmann, Geschichte und<br />
Eschatologie, 180f.: ÑEs ist die Paradoxie der christlichen Verk¸ndigung bzw. des<br />
christlichen Glaubens, dafl das eschatologische Geschehen nicht echt in seinem<br />
eigentlichen Sinne verstanden ist [Ö], wenn es als ein Geschehen aufgefaflt wird,<br />
das der sichtbaren Welt ihr Ende setzt in einer kosmischen Katastrophe, sondern dafl<br />
es ein Geschehen innerhalb der Geschichte ist, anhebend mit dem Auftreten Jesu<br />
von Nazareth, sich weiter vollziehend im Laufe der Geschichte,†ñ aber nicht als eine<br />
historisch festzustellende Entwicklung, sondern jeweils Ereignis werdend in Verk¸ndigung<br />
und Glaube.ì Bultmanns doppelbˆdiger Geschichtsbegriff d¸rfte ein<br />
Musterbeispiel f¸r eine Selbstwahrnehmung sein, die durch das Fremdbild der Auffassung<br />
eines Eschaton, das historisch festzustellen w‰re, mitgepr‰gt ist.<br />
14
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
2 Wandlungen in der Auffassung von ÇErlˆsungë<br />
In einem zweiten Durchgang mˆchte ich zeigen, wie tiefgreifend<br />
die Auffassung von ÑErlˆsungì sich auf christlicher Seite zu wandeln<br />
beginnt. Die Hoffnung auf Erlˆsung soll uns bewegen, sich nicht<br />
mehr mit der unerlˆsten Welt abzufinden, sondern sie umzugestalten,<br />
indem Frieden und Gerechtigkeit verwirklicht und die Schˆpfung<br />
bewahrt wird.<br />
2.1 Hoffnung auf Weltvollendung<br />
In diesem Sinne erweitert die Landessynode der Evangelischen Kirche<br />
im Rheinland am 10. Januar 1996 ihre Kirchenordnung um die<br />
S‰tze:<br />
ÑSie [die Evangelische Kirche im Rheinland] bezeugt die Treue<br />
Gottes, der an der Erw‰hlung seines Volkes Israel festh‰lt. Mit Israel<br />
hofft sie auf einen neuen Himmel und eine neue Erde.ì 24<br />
ÑMit Israel hoffenì bedeutet: zusammen gehen im Blick auf die<br />
Weltvollendung. Sie bildet das Ziel gemeinsamer Hoffnung.<br />
2.2 Die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt<br />
Beherrschend geworden hat sich der Eindruck der Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der<br />
Welt. Dazu haben sich k¸rzlich vier prominente j¸dische Historiker<br />
und Theologen aus den USA und Kanada ge‰uflert. In ihrem ÑStatement<br />
on Christians and Christianityì Dabru Emet (Redet Wahrheit),<br />
verˆffentlicht im August 2000, lautet der letzte Gesichtspunkt 25 :<br />
24 Verhandlungen der 45. ordentlichen rheinischen Landessynode, Tagung vom<br />
7. bis 11. Januar 1996 in Bad Neuenahr, statt Handschrift gedruckt, o. O. o. J. [B¸ro<br />
der Landessynode, 1996], 88ñ94. ñ Wieder abgedruckt: Katja Kriener/Johann Michael<br />
Schmidt (Hg.), Gottes Treue ñ Hoffnung von Christen und Juden. Die Auseinandersetzung<br />
um die Erg‰nzung des Grundartikels der Kirchenordnung der Evangelischen<br />
Kirche im Rheinland, Neukirchen-Vluyn 1998, 81.<br />
25 ÑJews and Christians must work toge<strong>the</strong>r for justice andpeace. Jews and<br />
Christians, each in <strong>the</strong>ir own way, recognize <strong>the</strong> unredeemed state of <strong>the</strong> world ‰s<br />
reflected in <strong>the</strong> persistence of persecution, poverty, and human degradation and<br />
misery. Although justice and peace are fmally Godís, our joint efforts, toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />
with those of o<strong>the</strong>r faith communities, will help bring <strong>the</strong> kingdom of God for<br />
which we hope and long. Separately and toge<strong>the</strong>r, we must work to bring justice<br />
15
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
ÑJuden und Christen m¸ssen f¸r Gerechtigkeit und Frieden zusammenarbeiten.<br />
Juden und Christen erkennen, jede auf ihre Weise,<br />
die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt, wie sie sich in fortdauernder Verfolgung,<br />
Armut, Erniedrigung und Verelendung von Menschen zeigt. Obwohl<br />
Gerechtigkeit und Frieden letzten Endes Gottes Sache sind, werden<br />
unsere gemeinsamen Anstrengungen, zusammen mit denen anderer<br />
Glaubensgemeinschaften, dazu verhelfen, das Reich Gottes herbeizuf¸hren,<br />
das wir erhoffen und ersehnen. Jeder f¸r sich und gemeinsam<br />
m¸ssen wir daran arbeiten, Gerechtigkeit und Frieden in unsere<br />
Welt zu bringen. In dieser Aufgabe werden wir durch die Vision der<br />
israelischen Propheten geleitet:<br />
ÇEs wird geschehen in den letzten Tagen, da wird der Berg mit<br />
dem Hause des Herrn festgegr¸ndet stehen an der Spitze der Berge<br />
und die H¸gel ¸berragen; und alle Vˆlker werden zu ihm hinstrˆmen,<br />
und viele Nationen werden sich aufmachen und sprechen: Kommt,<br />
laflt uns hinaufziehen zum Berge des Herrn, zu dem Hause des Gottes<br />
Jakobs, dafl er uns seine Wege lehre und wir wandeln auf seinen<br />
Pfaden.ë (Jes 2,2ñ3).ì 26<br />
Die Zionsverheiflung begr¸ndet also die gemeinsame Hoffnung<br />
and peace to our world. In this enterprise, we are guided <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> vision of <strong>the</strong><br />
prophets of Israel:<br />
It shall come to pass in <strong>the</strong> end of days that <strong>the</strong> mountain of <strong>the</strong> Lordís house shall<br />
be established at <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> mountains and be exalted above <strong>the</strong> h¸ls, and <strong>the</strong><br />
nations shall flow unto itÖ and many peoples shall go and say, ëCome ye and let us<br />
go up to <strong>the</strong> mountain of <strong>the</strong> Lord to <strong>the</strong> house of <strong>the</strong> God of Jacob and He will teach<br />
us of His ways and we will walk in his paths.í (Isaiah 2:2ñ3)î<br />
26 Die Zeitschrift Zeitzeichen hat im Heft 7/2001 unter der Rubrik ÇDokumentationë<br />
eine die Erkl‰rung Dabru Emet deutlich k¸rzende ‹bersetzung von Christoph M¸nz<br />
abgedruckt. Der letzte Vergleichspunkt liest sich dort so:<br />
ÑJuden und Christen m¸ssen sich gemeinsam f¸r Gerechtigkeit und Frieden einsetzen.<br />
Getrennt und vereint m¸ssen wir daran arbeiten, unserer Welt Gerechtigkeit<br />
und Frieden zu bringen. In dieser Bem¸hung leitet uns die Vision der Propheten<br />
Israelsì [folgt Jes 2,2f.].ì (Eine j¸dische Stellungnahme zu Christen und Christentum:<br />
Zeitzeichen 2 [7/2001] 43)<br />
Obwohl andere Auslassungen in der ‹bersetzung an sechs Stellen gekennzeichnet<br />
sind, wird die Auslassung des zweiten und dritten Satzes des letzten Punktes der<br />
Erkl‰rung nicht gekennzeichnet.<br />
Selbst wenn man editorische Zw‰nge veranschlagt (der Text sollte offensichtlich die<br />
L‰nge einer Druckseite nicht ¸berschreiten), ist diese unausgewiesene K¸rzung doch<br />
Anlafl, nicht nur ein Versehen zu vermuten, das allerdings signifikant genug w‰re,<br />
sondern auch eine inhaltliche R¸ckfrage zu stellen: Ist die Notwendigkeit zur<br />
ethischen Zusammenarbeit so evident, dafl der Hinweis auf die je eigene Wahrnehmung<br />
der Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt bzw. auf die cooperatio Gottes und der Menschen<br />
16
EINE GEMEINSAME HOFFNUNG VON JUDEN UND CHRISTEN?<br />
von Juden und Christen, bezogen darauf, dafl beide Religionsgemeinschaften,<br />
Ñjede auf ihre Weiseì, die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt erkennen<br />
und sich ihr stellen.<br />
Die Unerlˆs<strong>the</strong>it der Welt in Unterdr¸ckung von Menschlichkeit,<br />
in Ausgrenzung von Anderen, in Miflachtung elementarer Lebensbed¸rfnisse<br />
und in mannigfachen Formen von Unversˆhnlichkeit: dies<br />
ist heutzutage eine weitverbreitete Sicht, nicht nur f¸r Juden und Christen.<br />
Dafl diese Verfehlungen mit allen Kr‰ften ¸berwunden werden<br />
m¸ssen, sollte keine Frage mehr sein. Und diese moralische Verpflichtung<br />
sollte auch hinreichen, um gemeinsam f¸r dieses Ziel zu wirken.<br />
Wieviel wiegen dann noch die Motivationen, die auf j¸discher und<br />
christlicher Seite verschieden lauten und notfalls auch unterschiedlich<br />
gepr‰gt sind, wenn die Handlungen auf ein und dasselbe Hoffnungsziel<br />
hinauslaufen?<br />
Dies sind jedoch nicht die Fragen, die ñ wenn ich recht sehe ñ zum<br />
Gespr‰ch von Juden und Christen anstehen: Was heiflt ÑErlˆsungì?<br />
Was bedeutet, ihrer gew‰rtig zu sein? Vor allem: Wer kann erlˆsen?<br />
Ich kann hier nur versuchen, einige Gesichtspunkte zu nennen, die<br />
f¸r christliche Theologie maflgebend sind und maflgebend bleiben<br />
sollten.<br />
Von ÑErlˆsungì kann sie nicht sprechen, ohne auf Jesus Christus<br />
als den Erlˆser zu blicken: In seiner Gestalt werden wir ÑErlˆsungì<br />
gewahr: sie zeigt sein Gesicht. Wir kennen keine ÑGestaltenì, keine<br />
Konfigurationen, der Erlˆsung abgesehen von seiner Gestalt: anders<br />
als im Gedenken an das, was er vollbracht hat, und in der Erwartung<br />
dessen, was er zu vollbringen verheiflen hat. Insofern d¸rfen wir ñ<br />
jedenfalls als Christen ñ nicht ÑErlˆsungì vom ÑErlˆserì trennen.<br />
Denn dies w¸rde bedeuten, das Handeln Jesu Christi von ihm als<br />
Person abzulˆsen.<br />
Wenn Jesus ausruft: ÑEs ist vollbrachtì, dann ist dies sein letzter<br />
Ruf auf dem Weg seines Gehorsams. Damit zieht er nicht die Summe<br />
seines Lebenswerkes. Was hat Jesus Ñgeschafftì? Er hat ÑGehorsam<br />
vollbrachtì. Der Weg des Gehorsam war es, Gottes Willen geschehen<br />
zu lassen, ihm Raum zu lassen, und zwar entgegen menschlichem<br />
¸berfl¸ssig erscheint, ja vielleicht sogar stˆren kˆnnte? Welche Funktion erh‰lt der<br />
biblische Text in diesem neu geschaffenen Zusammenhang, in dem von Erlˆsung,<br />
von Gott und Gottes Handeln ¸berhaupt nicht mehr gesprochen wird?<br />
17
GERHARD SAUTER<br />
Eigensinn, und sei dieser noch so fromm und seiner religiˆsen Ziele<br />
gewifl. Solch menschlicher Eigenwille, der zu wissen meint, was Gott<br />
im Sinn hat und was demzufolge auszuf¸hren ist, hat Jesus von Nazareth<br />
ans Kreuz gebracht. Jesus Christus hat die Unterscheidung (nicht<br />
die Trennung!) von Gottes Willen und menschlichem Wollen vollbracht.<br />
Sein Gehorsam hat keinen gˆttlich gegebenen Handlungsplan<br />
ausgef¸hrt. Erlˆsung am Kreuz auf Golgatha heiflt: sich Gottes Handeln<br />
gefallen lassen.<br />
Die Geschichte der Kirche ist ein unaufhˆrliches ñ und oft gescheitertes<br />
ñ Bem¸hen darum, sich an Jesus Christus als Erlˆser in<br />
allen Lebenssituationen zu halten, sich von der Erlˆsung, die er vollbracht<br />
hat, umfangen zu lassen und ihm auf dem Weg seines Gehorsams<br />
zu folgen. Das Leben in der Kraft des Erlˆsers und mit ihm<br />
bleibt aber Hoffnung auf die ÑErlˆsung des Leibesì, wie Paulus sagt<br />
(Rom 8,23): nicht die Erlˆsung vom Leibe, von den kˆrperlichen<br />
Daseinsbedingungen, sondern die Verwandlung der Leiblichkeit in<br />
Gottes Doxa, die Strahlkraft seines himmlischen Glanzes. F¸r dieses<br />
Leben Ñzwischen den Zeitenì (oder, wie Paulus formuliert: Ñim Geistì<br />
Gottes, dem Unterpfand der erhofften Erlˆsung) hat sich in der<br />
christlichen Theologie die Bezeichnung ÑVersˆhnungì eingeb¸rgert.<br />
Auch ÑVersˆhnungì ist kein innerer oder ‰uflerer Zustand, sondern<br />
Gottes Werk in Jesus Christus (2. Kor 5,19). Mit ihm hat Gott ein<br />
durch Menschen heillos zerstˆrtes Verh‰ltnis wieder aufgerichtet: und<br />
zwar so, dafl Menschen im Namen Christi gebeten werden, sich mit<br />
Gott versˆhnen zu lassen (2. Kor 5,20) und daraufhin auch miteinander<br />
versˆhnt werden. Versˆhnung ist auf die eschatolo-gische Erlˆsung<br />
ausgerichtet. Als Versˆhner steht Jesus Christus zwischen Christen<br />
und Juden ñ aber nicht, um sie voneinander zu trennen.<br />
Wie werden Juden der Erlˆsung gewahr, wie sie sich ñ so deutete<br />
Martin Buber an ñ sich ihnen kundtut? Aus seiner Skizze ist zu ersehen,<br />
dafl das Kˆnigtum Gottes, sein Reich, sich bereits Bahn bricht,<br />
zwar nicht, um eine Entwicklung zu einer besseren Willen anzubahnen,<br />
sondern indem Menschen einwilligen in Gottes Gerechtigkeit<br />
und den Frieden, der Gottes Sache ist und bleibt. In Gottes Willen<br />
einzuwilligen: dies ist es doch, was Juden und Christen zusammenfuhren<br />
kˆnnte. Denn ihre gemeinsame Hoffnung h‰ngt an Gottes<br />
Barmherzigkeit und an seiner Treue zu seinen Verheiflungen.<br />
18
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM:<br />
FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY<br />
TO THE TALMUDSí RELIGION<br />
Jacob Neusner, New York<br />
I. Rabbinic Judaism<br />
From late antiquity, literary evidence, in <strong>the</strong> form of well-crafted,<br />
systematic and coherent documents, presents us with a Judaism called<br />
ìRabbinic,î <strong>by</strong> reason of <strong>the</strong> title of honor accorded many of its<br />
principal authorities, or ìclassicalî or ìnormative,î <strong>by</strong> reason of its<br />
later standing, or ìTalmudic,î because of its final and definitive statement,<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia. Its governing myth, <strong>the</strong> story of<br />
how at Sinai God revealed <strong>the</strong> Torah to Moses in two media, written<br />
and oral, with <strong>the</strong> oral part finally given written articulation in <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnah (ca. 200 C. E.) through <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia<br />
(ca. 600 C. E.) and associated writings of rabbis <strong>the</strong>mselves, contributes<br />
<strong>the</strong> title, ìJudaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah.î<br />
The history of that particular Judaism as it took over and defined<br />
<strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> Jews in <strong>the</strong> first six centuries of <strong>the</strong> Common Era<br />
cannot be recovered. We have no evidence about <strong>the</strong> state of affairs<br />
for <strong>the</strong> Jews in general, such as would tell us how that Judaic system<br />
came to dictate <strong>the</strong> character of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí social world and culture.<br />
One may argue that <strong>the</strong> evidence driving from synagogues, not that<br />
reaching us from <strong>the</strong> limited circles of learned sages, tells us about<br />
<strong>the</strong> common practices of <strong>the</strong> time. But what sort of religious system<br />
emerges out of <strong>the</strong> material evidence remains to be determined.<br />
How <strong>the</strong> Judaic system set forth in <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic writings related to<br />
<strong>the</strong> religious life of Jews beyond <strong>the</strong> circles of sages, <strong>the</strong> ways in<br />
which <strong>the</strong> particular way of life and world view set forth <strong>by</strong> that<br />
system came to define <strong>the</strong> actual character of <strong>the</strong> ìIsraelî to which<br />
that Judaism spoke ñ <strong>the</strong>se are historical questions we cannot answer.<br />
19
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
The books tell us what <strong>the</strong>ir writers and compilers thought, but not<br />
about <strong>the</strong> world beyond <strong>the</strong>ir circle and its view of matters. And what<br />
we learn about ìJudaismî from o<strong>the</strong>r than Judaic sources, for instance,<br />
pagan and Christian and Zoroastrian writers about Judaism,<br />
tells us no more than we know about Judaism from <strong>the</strong> written Torah.<br />
Christian writers about Judaism, for example, utilize <strong>the</strong> Hebrew<br />
Scriptures for <strong>the</strong>ir picture of <strong>the</strong> Judaism that <strong>the</strong>y criticize.<br />
II. From Philosophy to Religion<br />
But a different sort of history of Judaism in late antiquity emerges<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic documents. It is <strong>the</strong> documentary history of <strong>the</strong><br />
ideas that inform <strong>the</strong> religious system of Rabbinic Judaism. For if we<br />
follow <strong>the</strong> unfolding of <strong>the</strong> documents of that Judaism, Stated in<br />
documentary terms, <strong>the</strong> formative history of Judaism tells a story in<br />
<strong>the</strong>se sentences.<br />
[1] It shows, first, how <strong>the</strong> Judaic system emerged in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah,<br />
ca. 200 C. E., and its associated Midrash-compilations, ca. 200ñ300<br />
C. E., as [1] a philosophical structure comprising a politics, philosophy,<br />
economics. These categories were defined as philosophers in<br />
general understood <strong>the</strong>m: a <strong>the</strong>ory of legitimate violence, an account<br />
of knowledge gained through <strong>the</strong> methods of natural history, and<br />
a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> rational disposition (and increase) of scarce resources.<br />
[2] This philosophical system <strong>the</strong>n was turned <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and related Midrash-compilations, ca. 400ñ500<br />
C. E., into [2] a religious system. The system was effected through<br />
<strong>the</strong> formation of counterpart categories: an anti-politics of weakness,<br />
an anti-economics of <strong>the</strong> rational utilization of an infinitely renewable<br />
resource, a philosophy of truth revealed ra<strong>the</strong>r than rules discovered.<br />
The first stage in <strong>the</strong> documentary history takes up <strong>the</strong> urgent questions<br />
precipitated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> political calamities of <strong>the</strong> first and second<br />
centuries, <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> paganization of Jerusalem,<br />
and <strong>the</strong> chaos following <strong>the</strong> Bar Kokhba disaster. The second<br />
stage responds to <strong>the</strong> issues made urgent <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> political triumph of<br />
Christianity and <strong>the</strong> consequent challenge to <strong>the</strong> situation of Israel as<br />
20
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
Jews read Scriptureís account of <strong>the</strong>ir particular Israel. To <strong>the</strong> extent<br />
that <strong>the</strong> documentary history corresponds to <strong>the</strong> major turnings in<br />
political history, we may reconstruct not only <strong>the</strong> unfolding of ideas,<br />
but <strong>the</strong> relationship between ideas and <strong>the</strong> social world of <strong>the</strong> people<br />
that held those ideas, that <strong>the</strong> history of a religion proposes to narrate.<br />
III. The Crisis of 70 and <strong>the</strong> Mishnaic Stage in <strong>the</strong> Formation of<br />
Rabbinic Judaism<br />
The temple in Jerusalem, where sacrifices were offered to God, constituted<br />
<strong>the</strong> focus of Pentateuchal Judaism. Indeed, <strong>the</strong> cycle of holy<br />
time was marked <strong>by</strong> sacrifice. Thus <strong>the</strong> lives of <strong>the</strong> patriarchs repeatedly<br />
drew <strong>the</strong>m into relationship with <strong>the</strong> sacrificial cult in various<br />
holy places, but especially in Jerusalem, and <strong>the</strong> laws of <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />
dealt in detail with <strong>the</strong> sacrifices, <strong>the</strong> priests, <strong>the</strong> maintenance of <strong>the</strong><br />
priestly caste, and o<strong>the</strong>r cultic matters. So <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />
composed in this time lay in its focus on <strong>the</strong> Temple. This central<br />
Temple cult, with its total exclusion of <strong>the</strong> non-Israelite raised high<br />
those walls of separation we have talked about between Jew and<br />
ìo<strong>the</strong>r.î They underlined such distinctiveness as already existed. What<br />
made Israel Israel was <strong>the</strong> center, <strong>the</strong> altar; <strong>the</strong> life of Israel flowed<br />
from <strong>the</strong> altar. But in 70 C. E., in <strong>the</strong> course of a war fought <strong>by</strong> Jews<br />
against Roman rule in <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel, Jerusalem fell and <strong>the</strong> Temple,<br />
except for <strong>the</strong> Western wall of <strong>the</strong> platform on which it stood,<br />
was destroyed.<br />
How <strong>the</strong>n, are we to define <strong>the</strong> urgent question and self-evident<br />
Answer of <strong>the</strong> Judaic System of <strong>the</strong> Dual Torah, Oral and Written that<br />
emerged in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah? The principal question formulated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
sages who produced writings beyond 70 ñ writings that ultimately<br />
were portrayed as <strong>the</strong> oral part of <strong>the</strong> one whole Torah of Moses, ìour<br />
lordî our rabbenu ñ centered upon <strong>the</strong> sanctification of Israel now<br />
that <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> locus of holiness, lay in ruins and <strong>the</strong> cult was no<br />
more. The Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah set forth a twin-ideal: [1] sanctification<br />
of <strong>the</strong> everyday life in <strong>the</strong> here and now, which when fully<br />
realized would lead to [2] salvation of all Israel in <strong>the</strong> age to come.<br />
But what remained to be sanctified, as <strong>the</strong> Temple had been sanctified<br />
21
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
through its cult, now that <strong>the</strong> Temple was gone? One locus of sanctification<br />
endured beyond 70: <strong>the</strong> holy people itself. That peopleís life<br />
would be made holy ñ in <strong>the</strong> holy land at first, but later, as this<br />
Judaism spread across <strong>the</strong> world through exile in <strong>the</strong> Diaspora, everywhere<br />
<strong>the</strong> people lived. Holy of course meant separate and distinct<br />
from <strong>the</strong> ordinary, and <strong>the</strong> chronic question of who is a Jew and what<br />
is Israel would find its self-evident response in <strong>the</strong> same categories as<br />
<strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal system had defined for itself.<br />
The stress of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah, of <strong>the</strong> post-Temple<br />
sages or rabbis who constructed it, on <strong>the</strong> sanctification of <strong>the</strong> home<br />
and <strong>the</strong> paradigmatic power of <strong>the</strong> Temple for <strong>the</strong> home points to<br />
a more extreme position within <strong>the</strong> priestly paradigm than that of <strong>the</strong><br />
priests who wrote parts of Exodus, Leviticus and Numbers. What <strong>the</strong><br />
priests wanted for <strong>the</strong> Temple, <strong>the</strong> dual Torahís sages wanted for <strong>the</strong><br />
community, Israel, at large. The premise of <strong>the</strong> written Torah, we<br />
recall, rested on a simple allegation: if Israel observes <strong>the</strong> terms of <strong>the</strong><br />
covenant, leading a sanctified life, Israel will enjoy prosperity in<br />
a serene land, a national life outside of history. The traumatic event of<br />
annihilation and rebirth, of death and resurrection of <strong>the</strong> nation (as<br />
manifested in <strong>the</strong> reworking of ancient Israelite writings into <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch)<br />
brought about yearning for one thing above all: no more.<br />
The picture of what had happened presented solace ñ that is why<br />
people wanted to accept <strong>the</strong> portrait of <strong>the</strong>ir world. The restoration<br />
gave Israel a second chance at life, but Israel also could rely on its<br />
knowledge of <strong>the</strong> rules that governed its national life, those of <strong>the</strong><br />
Torah and its repeated allegations of an agreement, or covenant, between<br />
Israel and God, to make certain <strong>the</strong>re would be no more experiences<br />
of exile and alienation (whe<strong>the</strong>r or not followed <strong>by</strong> reconciliation<br />
and restoration). This same paradigm governed in <strong>the</strong> framing<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah. What shifted was <strong>the</strong> redefinition of<br />
salvation from <strong>the</strong> here and now to <strong>the</strong> end of time. And that change,<br />
of course, was not only plausible, it also was necessary in light of <strong>the</strong><br />
destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple in 70.<br />
The reason for <strong>the</strong> transfer of <strong>the</strong> hope for salvation from now to<br />
<strong>the</strong> end of time derives from a political event in some ways bearing<br />
greater weight than <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple in 70. This event is<br />
<strong>the</strong> failure to recover <strong>the</strong> city and rebuild <strong>the</strong> Temple through war<br />
22
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
three generations later. Had <strong>the</strong> war been successful, it could have<br />
replicated <strong>the</strong> events that began in 586 and ended in 450. That is, it<br />
could have restored <strong>the</strong> people to <strong>the</strong> land and <strong>the</strong> government and<br />
temple to Jerusalem. Indeed, when <strong>the</strong> war broke out in 132, <strong>the</strong> Jews<br />
evidently expected that after three generations, God would call an<br />
end to <strong>the</strong> punishment as God had done <strong>by</strong> restoring <strong>the</strong> Temple some<br />
ìseventy yearsî after its first destruction (586). But that did not happen.<br />
Israel again suffered defeat ñ a defeat worse than before. The<br />
Temple now lay in permanent ruins; Jerusalem became a forbidden<br />
city for Jews. So Israel, <strong>the</strong> Jewish people, necessarily set out to<br />
assimilate enduring defeat.<br />
IV. The Mishnahís Judaism of Sanctification without <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />
The Mishnah manifests <strong>the</strong> Judaism that took shape in <strong>the</strong> aftermath<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí defeat in this Second War against Rome, fought from<br />
132 through 135. Although later considered <strong>the</strong> written manifestation<br />
of <strong>the</strong> oral tradition that formed part of <strong>the</strong> Torah received <strong>by</strong><br />
Moses at Sinai, and accorded proportionate status, <strong>the</strong> Mishnah was<br />
in fact a philosophical system in <strong>the</strong> form of a law code that responded<br />
to problems arising from <strong>the</strong> destruction of <strong>the</strong> Temple and<br />
Bar Kokhbaís subsequent defeat. When in <strong>the</strong> aftermath of <strong>the</strong> destruction<br />
in C. E. 70 and <strong>the</strong> still more disheartening defeat of 135 <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnahís sages worked out a Judaism without a Temple and a cult,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y produced in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah a system of sanctification focused on<br />
<strong>the</strong> holiness of <strong>the</strong> priesthood, <strong>the</strong> cultic festivals, <strong>the</strong> Temple and its<br />
sacrifices, and on <strong>the</strong> rules for protecting that holiness from Levitical<br />
uncleanness. Four of <strong>the</strong> six divisions of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah expound on<br />
this single <strong>the</strong>me.<br />
In an act of supererogatory imagination, defying <strong>the</strong> facts of <strong>the</strong><br />
circumstance of a defeated nation, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system-builders<br />
composed a world at rest, perfect and complete, made holy because it<br />
is complete and perfect. In mythic terms, <strong>the</strong> Mishnah reaches back<br />
to creation to interpret <strong>the</strong> world of destruction round about. The<br />
system of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah confronts <strong>the</strong> fall from Eden with Eden, <strong>the</strong><br />
world in time beyond <strong>the</strong> closure of Jerusalem to Israel with <strong>the</strong><br />
23
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
timeless world on <strong>the</strong> eve of <strong>the</strong> Sabbath of Creation: ìThus <strong>the</strong> heavens<br />
and <strong>the</strong> earth were finished and all <strong>the</strong> host of <strong>the</strong>m. And on <strong>the</strong><br />
seventh day God finished his work which he had done, and he rested<br />
on <strong>the</strong> seventh day from all his work which he had done. So God<br />
blessed <strong>the</strong> seventh day and hallowed it, because on it God rested<br />
from all his work which he had done in creationî (Gen. 2:1ñ3).<br />
The Mishnahís framers posited an economy embedded in a social<br />
system awaiting <strong>the</strong> seventh day, and that dayís divine act of sanctification<br />
which, as at <strong>the</strong> creation of <strong>the</strong> world, would set <strong>the</strong> seal of<br />
holy rest upon an again-complete creation. That would be a creation<br />
that was well ordered, with all things called <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir rightful names,<br />
in <strong>the</strong>ir proper classification, from <strong>the</strong> least to <strong>the</strong> greatest, and from<br />
<strong>the</strong> many to <strong>the</strong> One. There is no place for action and actors when<br />
what is besought is no action whatsoever, but only unchanging perfection.<br />
There is room only for a description of how things are, for<br />
<strong>the</strong> present tense, for a sequence of completed statements and static<br />
problems. All <strong>the</strong> action lies within, in how <strong>the</strong>se statements are made.<br />
Once <strong>the</strong>y stand fully expressed, when nothing remains to be said,<br />
nothing remains to be done. There is no need for actors, whe<strong>the</strong>r<br />
political entities such as king, scribes, priests, or economic entities,<br />
householders.<br />
That is why <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís framers invented a utopia, one that<br />
exists nowhere in particular, a fantasy related to whom it may concern.<br />
The politics of Judaism began in <strong>the</strong> imagination of a generation<br />
of intellectuals who, in <strong>the</strong> aftermath of <strong>the</strong> Jerusalem governmentís<br />
and Templeís destruction (70) and <strong>the</strong> military defeat Jews<br />
suffered three generations later (132ñ135), had witnessed <strong>the</strong> end of<br />
<strong>the</strong> political system and structure that <strong>the</strong> Jews had known for <strong>the</strong><br />
preceding millennium. The political <strong>the</strong>ory of Judaism laid out political<br />
institutions and described how <strong>the</strong>y should work. In that way<br />
<strong>the</strong>se intellectuals, who enjoyed no documented access to power of<br />
any kind and who certainly were unable to coerce many people to do<br />
very much, sorted out issues of power. They took account, in mind at<br />
least, of <strong>the</strong> issues of legitimate coercion within Israel, <strong>the</strong> holy people,<br />
which <strong>the</strong>y considered more than a voluntary association, more<br />
than a community formed around a cult.<br />
The Mishnahís principal message, which makes <strong>the</strong> Judaism of<br />
24
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
this document and of its social components distinctive and cogent, is<br />
that man is at <strong>the</strong> center of creation, <strong>the</strong> head of all creatures upon<br />
earth, corresponding to God in heaven, in whose image man is made.<br />
The way in which <strong>the</strong> Mishnah makes this simple and fundamental<br />
statement is to impute power to man to inaugurate and initiate those<br />
corresponding processes, sanctification and uncleanness, which play<br />
so critical a role in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís account of reality. The will of man,<br />
expressed through <strong>the</strong> deed of man, is <strong>the</strong> active power in <strong>the</strong> world.<br />
Will and deed constitute those actors of creation which work upon<br />
neutral realms, subject to ei<strong>the</strong>r sanctification or uncleanness: <strong>the</strong><br />
Temple and table, <strong>the</strong> field and family, <strong>the</strong> altar and hearth, woman,<br />
time, space, transactions in <strong>the</strong> material world and in <strong>the</strong> world above<br />
as well. An object, a substance, a transaction, even a phrase or a<br />
sentence is inert but may be made holy, when <strong>the</strong> interplay of <strong>the</strong> will<br />
and deed of man arouses or generates its potential to be sanctified.<br />
Each may be treated as ordinary or (where relevant) made unclean <strong>by</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> neglect of <strong>the</strong> will and inattentive act of man. Just as <strong>the</strong> entire<br />
system of uncleanness and holiness awaits <strong>the</strong> intervention of man,<br />
which imparts <strong>the</strong> capacity to become unclean upon what was formerly<br />
inert, or which removes <strong>the</strong> capacity to impart cleanness from<br />
what was formerly in its natural and puissant condition, so in <strong>the</strong><br />
o<strong>the</strong>r ranges of reality, man is at <strong>the</strong> center on earth, just as is God in<br />
heaven. Man is counterpart and partner and creation, in that, like God<br />
he has power over <strong>the</strong> status and condition of creation, through his<br />
intentionality putting everything in its proper place, through <strong>the</strong> exercise<br />
of his will calling everything <strong>by</strong> its rightful name. The goal <strong>the</strong>n<br />
was <strong>the</strong> restoration of creation to its original perfection. Then it was<br />
that God ceased from labor, blessed creation, and sanctified it.<br />
V. The Talmudsí Judaism of Sanctification and Salvation<br />
The Mishnah enjoyed two centuries of study and amplification. Indeed,<br />
a massive system deriving from and connecting with <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnahís but essentially distinct from it emerged in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Land of Israel (closed ca. 400). The urgent question that predominates<br />
in that enormous document, and that takes <strong>the</strong> form of an ex-<br />
25
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
tended elaboration of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, is salvation: when and why will it<br />
come, and, above all, how long must it be postponed? The urgency of<br />
<strong>the</strong> issue derived from two events that we have already touched upon.<br />
First of all, in 312 Constantine legalized Christianity, and in <strong>the</strong> course<br />
of <strong>the</strong> next three generations, <strong>the</strong> state became officially Christian. In<br />
<strong>the</strong> course of suppressing paganism, <strong>the</strong> Christian state adopted rules<br />
that for <strong>the</strong> first time since <strong>the</strong> Maccabees, in <strong>the</strong> second century<br />
B. C., denied <strong>the</strong> licit practice of Judaism. That trauma was intensified<br />
<strong>by</strong> a brief moment of relief, when one of <strong>the</strong> heirs of Constantine,<br />
Julian, left Christianity, reaffirmed paganism and, in 361 proposed to<br />
discredit Christianity <strong>by</strong> permitting <strong>the</strong> Jews to rebuild <strong>the</strong> Temple in<br />
Jerusalem. Unfortunately, he died soon afterward and nothing came<br />
of <strong>the</strong> project.<br />
The urgency with which <strong>the</strong> Jews pursued <strong>the</strong> question of salvation<br />
is hardly a surprising. Consider that from <strong>the</strong>ir own political<br />
triumph and <strong>the</strong> Jewsí deep disappointment <strong>by</strong> Julianís failed scheme,<br />
<strong>the</strong> Christians claimed that <strong>the</strong> political shifts in <strong>the</strong> standing of Christianity<br />
and Judaism confirmed <strong>the</strong> truth of Christianity and underlined<br />
<strong>the</strong> falsity of Judaism. In particular, Christianity stressed <strong>the</strong><br />
falsity of <strong>the</strong> Jewsí hope for a coming messiah. It argued that <strong>the</strong> Jews<br />
had been saved in <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> return to Zion (450 B. C. E.). That<br />
return, Christians claimed, fulfilled <strong>the</strong> Old Testament prophecies of<br />
Israelís salvation. But from that moment, <strong>by</strong> rejecting <strong>the</strong> messiahship<br />
of Jesus, Jews had lost all fur<strong>the</strong>r standing in <strong>the</strong> divine scheme for<br />
saving humanity. So <strong>the</strong> question of salvation turned from a chronic<br />
concern to an acute crisis for <strong>the</strong> Jews ñ in positive and negative<br />
ways. And predictably, it was addressed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> sages who revised <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnah <strong>by</strong> setting forth <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel.<br />
Two hundred years after that Talmud took shape, (ca. 400), a second<br />
one, <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia, recast matters in a permanent<br />
and authoritative form (ca. 600). From <strong>the</strong>n to <strong>the</strong> present, ì<strong>the</strong> Talmud,î<br />
meaning <strong>the</strong> Talmud of Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia, toge<strong>the</strong>r with its commentaries,<br />
codes of laws deriving from it, and institutions of autonomous<br />
administration resting on it, has defined <strong>the</strong> life of most Jews and <strong>the</strong><br />
Judaic system that prevailed as normative. Its successful definition of<br />
<strong>the</strong> essentials of Judaism for Jews living in Christian and <strong>the</strong> Muslim<br />
worlds depends on <strong>the</strong> compelling power of its account of who is<br />
26
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
a Jew, what it means to be Israel, and how <strong>the</strong> holy people must work<br />
out its life in <strong>the</strong> here and now so as to attain salvation at <strong>the</strong> end of<br />
time. This was, <strong>the</strong>n, a Judaism intersecting with <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís but<br />
essentially asymmetrical with. It was a system for salvation focused<br />
on <strong>the</strong> salvific power of <strong>the</strong> sanctification of <strong>the</strong> holy people.<br />
What <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah as portrayed in <strong>the</strong> two Talmuds<br />
did was shift <strong>the</strong> focus from <strong>the</strong> Temple and its supernatural<br />
history to <strong>the</strong> people Israel and its natural, this-worldly history. Once<br />
Israel, holy Israel, had come to form <strong>the</strong> counterpart to <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />
and its supernatural life, that o<strong>the</strong>r history ñ Israelís ñ would stand at<br />
<strong>the</strong> center of things. Accordingly, a new sort of memorable event<br />
came to <strong>the</strong> fore in <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel. It was <strong>the</strong> story<br />
of Israelís suffering ñ remembrance of that suffering on <strong>the</strong> one side,<br />
and an effort to explain events of such tragedy on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r. And that<br />
story enjoyed <strong>the</strong> standing of self-evident, indeed self-validating truth<br />
because Jews found that it corresponded to and satisfactorily explained<br />
<strong>the</strong> powerless political situation <strong>the</strong>y found <strong>the</strong>mselves in.<br />
VI. Characterizing Documents [1]: The Mishnah: Judaism as<br />
a Philosophy in <strong>the</strong> First and Second Centuries<br />
From this brief account of <strong>the</strong> unfolding, in response to historical<br />
crises, of <strong>the</strong> Judaism of <strong>the</strong> dual Torah, let us turn to <strong>the</strong> intellectual<br />
characterization of each of its stages, with stress on <strong>the</strong> shift from<br />
philosophy to religion. The Mishnah presents a philosophical <strong>the</strong>ory<br />
of <strong>the</strong> social order, a system of thought that, in <strong>the</strong> context of <strong>the</strong><br />
same time and place, people generally deemed philosophers will have<br />
recognized as philosophical. The Mishnahís method of hierarchical<br />
classification in important ways is like that of <strong>the</strong> natural history of<br />
Aristotle, and <strong>the</strong> central component of its message proves congruent<br />
to that of neo-Platonism.<br />
Specifically, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís Judaic system sets forth in stupefying<br />
detail a version of one critical proposition of neo-Platonism, demonstrated<br />
through a standard Aristotelian method. The repeated proof<br />
through <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian method of hierarchical classification demonstrates<br />
in detail that many things really form a single thing, many<br />
27
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
species, a single genus, many genera, an encompassing and well-<br />
-crafted, cogent whole. Every time we speciate, ñ and <strong>the</strong> Mishnah is<br />
a mass of speciated lists ñ we affirm that position; each successful<br />
labor of forming relationships among species, e.g., making <strong>the</strong>m into<br />
a genus, or identifying <strong>the</strong> hierarchy of <strong>the</strong> species, proves it again.<br />
Not only so, but when we can show that many things are really one,<br />
or that one thing yields many (<strong>the</strong> reverse and confirmation of <strong>the</strong><br />
former), we say in a fresh way a single immutable truth, <strong>the</strong> one of<br />
this philosophy concerning <strong>the</strong> unity of all being in an orderly composition<br />
of all things within a single taxon. Accordingly, this Judaismís<br />
initial system, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís, finds its natural place within<br />
philosophy because it appeals to <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian methods and medium<br />
of natural philosophy ñ classification, comparison and contrast,<br />
expressed in <strong>the</strong> forms of Listenwissenschaft ñ to register its position,<br />
which is an important one in Middle Platonism and later (close to<br />
a century after <strong>the</strong> closure of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah) would come to profound<br />
expression in Plotinus.<br />
The philosophical Judaism moreover utilized economics ñ <strong>the</strong> rational<br />
disposition of scarce resources ñ in order to set forth a systemic<br />
statement of fundamental importance. Entirely congruent with <strong>the</strong><br />
philosophical economics of Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics answered<br />
<strong>the</strong> same questions concerning <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth, property,<br />
production and <strong>the</strong> means of production, ownership and control<br />
of <strong>the</strong> means of production, <strong>the</strong> determination of price and value and<br />
<strong>the</strong> like. And that fact signifies that <strong>the</strong> Judaic system to which <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnah attests is philosophical not only in method and message but<br />
in its very systemic composition. The principal components of its<br />
<strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social order, its account of <strong>the</strong> way of life of its Israel<br />
and its picture of <strong>the</strong> conduct of <strong>the</strong> public policy of its social entity, ñ<br />
all of <strong>the</strong>se in detail correspond in <strong>the</strong>ir basic definitions and indicative<br />
traits with <strong>the</strong> economics and <strong>the</strong> politics of Greco-Roman philosophy<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian tradition. Specifically, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics,<br />
in general in <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> rational disposition of scarce<br />
resources and of <strong>the</strong> management and increase <strong>the</strong>reof, and specifically<br />
in its definitions of wealth and ownership, production and consumption,<br />
point <strong>by</strong> point, corresponds to that of Aristotle.<br />
The power of economics as framed <strong>by</strong> Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> only eco-<br />
28
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
nomic <strong>the</strong>orist of antiquity worthy of <strong>the</strong> name, was to develop <strong>the</strong><br />
relationship between <strong>the</strong> economy to society as a whole. And <strong>the</strong><br />
framers of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah did <strong>the</strong> same when <strong>the</strong>y incorporated issues<br />
of economics at a profound <strong>the</strong>oretical level into <strong>the</strong> system of society<br />
as a whole that <strong>the</strong>y proposed to construct. That is why <strong>the</strong> authorship<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah will be seen as attacking <strong>the</strong> problem of<br />
manís livelihood within a system of sanctification of a holy people<br />
with a radicalism of which no later religious thinkers about utopias<br />
were capable. None has ever penetrated deeper into <strong>the</strong> material organization<br />
of manís life under <strong>the</strong> aspect of Godís rule. In effect, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
posed, in all its breadth, <strong>the</strong> question of <strong>the</strong> critical, indeed definitive<br />
place occupied <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> economy in society under Godís rule. The<br />
points in common between Aristotleís and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics<br />
in detail prove no less indicative. Both Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> Mishnah<br />
presented an anachronistic system of economics. The <strong>the</strong>ory of both<br />
falls into <strong>the</strong> same classification of economic <strong>the</strong>ory, that of distributive<br />
economics, familiar in <strong>the</strong> Near and Middle East from Sumerian<br />
times down to, but not including, <strong>the</strong> age of Aristotle (let alone that of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mishnah five centuries later). But market-economics had been<br />
well-established prior to Aristotleís time. Aristotleís economics is<br />
distributive for systemic reasons, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís replicates <strong>the</strong> received<br />
principles of <strong>the</strong> economics planned <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Temple priests and<br />
set forth in <strong>the</strong> Priestly Code of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch, Leviticus in particular.<br />
The result ñ fabricated or replicated principles ñ was <strong>the</strong> same.<br />
Both systems ñ <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís and Aristotleís ñ in vast detail expressed<br />
<strong>the</strong> ancient distributive economics, in <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>the</strong>ories of fixed<br />
value and conception of <strong>the</strong> distribution of scarce resources <strong>by</strong> appeal<br />
to o<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> rationality of <strong>the</strong> market. The <strong>the</strong>ory of money characteristic<br />
of Aristotle (but not of Plato) and of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah for instance<br />
conforms to that required <strong>by</strong> distributive economics; exchange<br />
takes place through barter, not through <strong>the</strong> abstract price-setting mechanism<br />
represented <strong>by</strong> money. Consequently, <strong>the</strong> representation of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mishnah as a philosophical Judaism derives from not only general<br />
characteristics but very specific and indicative traits held in common<br />
with <strong>the</strong> principal figure of <strong>the</strong> Greco-Roman philosophical tradition<br />
in economics.<br />
There was a common social foundation for <strong>the</strong> economic <strong>the</strong>ory of<br />
29
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
both systems. Both Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís framers deemed <strong>the</strong><br />
fundamental unit of production to be <strong>the</strong> household, and <strong>the</strong> larger<br />
social unit, <strong>the</strong> village, composed of households, marked <strong>the</strong> limits of<br />
<strong>the</strong> social entity. The Mishnahís economic tractates, such as <strong>the</strong> tractates<br />
on civil law, invariably refer to <strong>the</strong> householder, making him <strong>the</strong><br />
subject of most predicates; where issues o<strong>the</strong>r than economics are in<br />
play, e.g., in <strong>the</strong> political tractates such as Sanhedrin, <strong>the</strong> householder<br />
scarcely appears as a social actor. Not only so, but both Aristotle and<br />
<strong>the</strong> authorship of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah formed <strong>the</strong> conception of ìtrue value,î<br />
which maintained that something ñ an object, a piece of land ñ possessed<br />
a value extrinsic to <strong>the</strong> market and intrinsic to itself, such that,<br />
if a transaction varied from that imputed true value <strong>by</strong> (in <strong>the</strong> case of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mishnah) 18%, <strong>the</strong> exchange was null. Not only so, but <strong>the</strong> sole<br />
definition of wealth for both Aristotleís and <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís economics<br />
was real estate, only land however small. Since land does not<br />
contract or expand, of course, <strong>the</strong> conception of an increase in value<br />
through o<strong>the</strong>r than a steady-state exchange of real value, ìtrue value,î<br />
between parties to a transaction lay outside of <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory of economics.<br />
Therefore all profit, classified as usury, was illegitimate and must<br />
be prevented.<br />
The Mishnahís politics ñ its <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> legitimate use of violence<br />
and <strong>the</strong> disposition of power in society, ñ describes matters in<br />
a manner that is fundamentally philosophical in <strong>the</strong> Aristotelian context.<br />
Israel forms a political entity, fully empowered in an entirely<br />
secular sense, just as Scripture had described matters. To political<br />
institutions of <strong>the</strong> social order, king, priest, and court or civil administration,<br />
each in its jurisdiction, is assigned <strong>the</strong> right legitimately to<br />
exercise violence here on earth, corresponding to, and shared with,<br />
<strong>the</strong> same empowerment accorded to institutions of Heaven. These<br />
institutions moreover are conceived permanently to ration and rationalize<br />
<strong>the</strong> uses of that power. The picture, of course, is this-worldly,<br />
but, not distinguishing crime from sin, it is not secular, since <strong>the</strong> same<br />
system that legitimates king, high priest, and court posits in Heaven<br />
a corresponding politics, with God and <strong>the</strong> court on high exercising<br />
jurisdiction for some crimes or sins, <strong>the</strong> king, priesthood, or court<br />
down below for o<strong>the</strong>rs. Three specific traits, direct our attention toward<br />
<strong>the</strong> philosophical classification for <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics in<br />
30
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
framing a systemic composition, even though, to be sure, <strong>the</strong> parallels<br />
prove structural and general, ra<strong>the</strong>r than detailed and doctrinal as<br />
was <strong>the</strong> case with economics.<br />
First, like <strong>the</strong> politics of Plato and Aristotle, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />
describes only a utopian politics, a structure and system of a fictive<br />
and a fabricated kind: intellectualsí conception of a politics. Serving<br />
<strong>the</strong> larger purpose of system-construction, politics of necessity emerges<br />
as invention, e.g., <strong>by</strong> Heaven or in <strong>the</strong> model of Heaven, not as<br />
a secular revision and reform of an existing system. While in <strong>the</strong><br />
middle second-century Rome incorporated <strong>the</strong>ir country, which <strong>the</strong>y<br />
called <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and <strong>the</strong> Romans called Palestine, into its<br />
imperial system, denying Jews access to <strong>the</strong>ir capital, Jerusalem, permanently<br />
closing <strong>the</strong>ir cult-center, its Temple, <strong>the</strong> authorship of <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnah described a government of a king and a high priest and an<br />
administration fully empowered to carry out <strong>the</strong> law through legitimate<br />
violence. So <strong>the</strong> two politics ñ <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís, <strong>the</strong> Greco-Roman<br />
tradition represented <strong>by</strong> Platoís and Aristotleís ñ share in common<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir origins in intellectualsí <strong>the</strong>oretical and imaginative life and form<br />
an instance, within that life, of <strong>the</strong> concrete realization of a larger<br />
<strong>the</strong>ory of matters. In strange and odd forms, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />
falls into <strong>the</strong> class of <strong>the</strong> Staatsroman, <strong>the</strong> classification that encompasses,<br />
also, Platoís Republic and Aristotleís Politics. But, admittedly,<br />
<strong>the</strong> same may be said for <strong>the</strong> strange politics of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch.<br />
Second and more to <strong>the</strong> point, <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís sages stand well<br />
within <strong>the</strong> philosophical mode of political thought that begins with<br />
Aristotle, who sees politics as a fundamental component of his system<br />
when he says, ìpolitical scienceÖlegislates as to what we are to<br />
do and what we are to abstain from;î and, as to <strong>the</strong> institutionalization<br />
of power, one cannot imagine a more ample definition of <strong>the</strong><br />
Mishnahís systemís utilization of politics than that. While that statement,<br />
also, applies to <strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal politics, <strong>the</strong> systemic message<br />
borne <strong>by</strong> politics within <strong>the</strong> Pentateuchal system and that carried <strong>by</strong><br />
politics in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system do not correspond in any important<br />
ways. Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> philosophers of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah utilize politics to<br />
make systemic statements that correspond to one ano<strong>the</strong>r, in that both<br />
comparison and contrast prove apt and pointed. Both spoke of an<br />
empowered social entity; both took for granted that on-going institu-<br />
31
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
tions legitimately exercise governance in accord with a rationality<br />
discerned <strong>by</strong> distinguishing among those empowered to inflict sanctions.<br />
Both see politics as a medium for accomplishing systemic<br />
goals, and <strong>the</strong> goals derive from <strong>the</strong> larger purpose of <strong>the</strong> social order,<br />
to which politics is subordinated and merely instrumental.<br />
But, third, <strong>the</strong> comparison also yields a contrast of importance.<br />
Specifically, since political analysis comes only after economic analysis<br />
and depends upon <strong>the</strong> results of that prior inquiry into a social<br />
systemís disposition of scarce resources and <strong>the</strong>ory of control of<br />
means of production, we have no choice but to follow up <strong>the</strong> results<br />
of <strong>the</strong> preceding chapter and compare <strong>the</strong> politics of Aristotle and <strong>the</strong><br />
politics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, just as we did <strong>the</strong> economics of each system.<br />
For when we know who commands <strong>the</strong> means of production, we turn<br />
to inquire about who tells whom what to do and why: who legitimately<br />
coerces o<strong>the</strong>rs even through violence. And here <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís<br />
system decisively parts company with that of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch and also<br />
with that of Aristotle. As to <strong>the</strong> former, <strong>the</strong> distributive economics of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Pentateuch, in <strong>the</strong> Priestly stratum at <strong>the</strong> foundations, assigns<br />
both economic and political privilege to <strong>the</strong> same class of persons,<br />
<strong>the</strong> priesthood, effecting distributive economics and distributive politics.<br />
But that is not <strong>the</strong> way things are in <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics,<br />
which distinguishes <strong>the</strong> one in control of <strong>the</strong> means of production<br />
from <strong>the</strong> one control of <strong>the</strong> right legitimately to commit violence. The<br />
former, <strong>the</strong> householder, is not a political entity at all, and, dominant<br />
as <strong>the</strong> subject of most sentences in <strong>the</strong> economic tractates, he never<br />
appears in <strong>the</strong> political ones at all.<br />
The point of difference from Aristotle is to be seen only within <strong>the</strong><br />
context of <strong>the</strong> similarity that permits comparison and contrast. While<br />
<strong>the</strong> economics of Aristotle and <strong>the</strong> economics of Judaism commence<br />
with <strong>the</strong> consideration of <strong>the</strong> place and power of <strong>the</strong> person (ìclass,î<br />
ìcaste,î economic interest) in control of <strong>the</strong> means of production, <strong>the</strong><br />
social metaphors that animate <strong>the</strong> politics of <strong>the</strong> two systems part<br />
company. Aristotle in his Politics is consistent in starting with that<br />
very same person (ìclassî) when he considers issues of power, producing<br />
a distributive politics to match his distributive economics. But<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mishnahís philosophers build <strong>the</strong>ir politics on with an altoge<strong>the</strong>r<br />
different set of building blocks. The simple fact is that <strong>the</strong> house-<br />
32
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
holder, fundamental to <strong>the</strong>ir economics, does not form a subject of<br />
political discourse at all and in no way constitutes a political class or<br />
caste. When <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís writers speak of economics, <strong>the</strong> subject of<br />
most active verbs is <strong>the</strong> householder; when <strong>the</strong>y speak of politics, <strong>the</strong><br />
householder never takes an active role or even appears as a differentiated<br />
political class. In this sense, <strong>the</strong> economics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah<br />
is disembedded from its politics, and <strong>the</strong> politics from its economics.<br />
By contrast <strong>the</strong> economics and politics of Aristotleís system are deeply<br />
embedded within a larger and nurturing, wholly cogent <strong>the</strong>ory of<br />
political economy.<br />
VII. Characterizing Documents [2]: The Yerushalmiís<br />
Transformation of Philosophy into Religion<br />
The successor-system, represented <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel<br />
and related writings, ca. 400ñ450, presented a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social<br />
order lacking any <strong>the</strong>ory politics, philosophy, and economics of<br />
a conventional order. Now that we have seen <strong>the</strong> philosophical character<br />
of <strong>the</strong> initial systemís world-view, way of life, and <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong><br />
social entity, that is, its philosophy, economics, and politics, we ask<br />
how <strong>the</strong>se same categories fared in <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís documentary<br />
evidence. As a matter of simple fact, while sharing <strong>the</strong> goal of<br />
presenting a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> social order, as to <strong>the</strong>ir categorical formations<br />
and structures, <strong>the</strong> initial, philosophical Judaic system and <strong>the</strong><br />
successor system differ in a fundamental way. Stated very simply,<br />
what happened is that <strong>the</strong> successor-system held up a mirror to <strong>the</strong><br />
received categories and so redefined matters that everything was reversed.<br />
Left became right, down, up, and, as we shall see, in a very<br />
explicit transvaluation of values, power is turned into weakness,<br />
things of real value is transformed into intangibles. This transvaluation,<br />
yielding <strong>the</strong> transformation of <strong>the</strong> prior system altoge<strong>the</strong>r, is<br />
articulated and not left implicit; it is a specific judgment made concrete<br />
through mythic and symbolic revision <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> later authorships<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves. A free-standing document, received with reverence, served<br />
to precipitate <strong>the</strong> transvaluation of all of <strong>the</strong> values of that documentís<br />
initial statement.<br />
33
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
What <strong>the</strong> philosophical Judaism kept apart, <strong>the</strong> religious Judaism<br />
portrayed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and related writings<br />
now joined toge<strong>the</strong>r, and it is just <strong>the</strong>re, at that critical joining, that<br />
we identify <strong>the</strong> key to <strong>the</strong> system: its reversal of a received point of<br />
differentiation, its introduction of new points of differentiation altoge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
The source of generative problems for <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís politics<br />
is simply not <strong>the</strong> same as <strong>the</strong> source that served <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís<br />
politics, and, systemic analysis being what it is, it is <strong>the</strong><br />
union of what was formerly asunder that identifies for us in quite<br />
objective terms <strong>the</strong> critical point of tension, <strong>the</strong> sources of problems,<br />
<strong>the</strong> centerpiece of systemic concern throughout. Let me show how<br />
this process of reintegration was worked out in <strong>the</strong> categorical reformation<br />
underway in <strong>the</strong> Yerushalmi and related writings.<br />
We begin with <strong>the</strong> shift from philosophy to Torah-study, that is<br />
from abstract reflection to concrete text-exegesis and digression out<br />
of sacred scripture; philosophy yields accurate and rational understanding<br />
of things; knowledge of <strong>the</strong> Torah, <strong>by</strong> contrast, yields power<br />
over this world and <strong>the</strong> next, capacity to coerce to <strong>the</strong> sageís will <strong>the</strong><br />
natural and supernatural worlds alike, on that account. The Torah is<br />
thus transformed from a philosophical enterprise of <strong>the</strong> sifting and<br />
classification of <strong>the</strong> facts of this world into a Gnostic process of<br />
changing persons through knowledge. It is on that basis that in <strong>the</strong><br />
Yerushalmi and related writings we find in <strong>the</strong> Torah <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category<br />
to philosophy in <strong>the</strong> Mishnah. Now we deal with a new<br />
intellectual category: Torah, meaning, religious learning in place of<br />
philosophical learning. What is <strong>the</strong> difference between <strong>the</strong> one and<br />
<strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r? First comes appeal to revealed truth as against perceived<br />
facts of nature and <strong>the</strong>ir regularities, second, <strong>the</strong> conception of an<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r-worldly source of explanation and <strong>the</strong> development of a propositional<br />
program focused upon not nature but Scripture, not <strong>the</strong><br />
nations in general but Israel in particular, and third, <strong>the</strong> Gnosticization<br />
of knowledge in <strong>the</strong> conception that knowing works salvation.<br />
What was to change, <strong>the</strong>refore, was not <strong>the</strong> mode of thought. What<br />
was new, ra<strong>the</strong>r, was <strong>the</strong> propositions to be demonstrated philosophically,<br />
and what made <strong>the</strong>se propositions new was <strong>the</strong> focus of interest,<br />
on <strong>the</strong> one side, and data assembled <strong>by</strong> way of demonstrating<br />
<strong>the</strong>m, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r. From a philosophical proposition within <strong>the</strong><br />
34
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
framework of free-standing philosophy of religion and metaphysics<br />
that <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís system aimed to establish, we move to religious<br />
and even <strong>the</strong>ological propositions within <strong>the</strong> setting of contingent<br />
exegesis of Scripture. Then how do we know that what was changing<br />
was not merely topical and propositional but categorical in character?<br />
The answer lies in <strong>the</strong> symbolic vocabulary that would be commonly<br />
used in <strong>the</strong> late fourth and fifth century writings but not at all,<br />
or not in <strong>the</strong> same way, in <strong>the</strong> late second century ones. When people<br />
select data not formerly taken into account and represent <strong>the</strong> data <strong>by</strong><br />
appeal to symbols not formerly found evocative or expressive, or not<br />
utilized in <strong>the</strong> way in which <strong>the</strong>y later on were used, <strong>the</strong>n we are<br />
justified in raising questions about category-formation and <strong>the</strong> development<br />
of new categories alongside, or instead, of <strong>the</strong> received ones.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> case at hand, <strong>the</strong> character of <strong>the</strong> transformation we witness is<br />
shown <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> formation of a symbol serving to represent a category.<br />
To signal what is to come, we shall find <strong>the</strong> quite bald statement<br />
that, in <strong>the</strong> weighing of <strong>the</strong> comparative value of capital, which in<br />
this time and place meant land or real property, and Torah, Torah was<br />
worthwhile, and land was not ñ a symbolic syllogism that is explicit,<br />
concrete, repeated, and utterly fresh for <strong>the</strong> documents we consider.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> basis of that quite explicit symbolic comparison we speak of<br />
transformation ñ symbolic and <strong>the</strong>refore categorical transformation,<br />
not merely <strong>the</strong>matic shifts in emphasis or even propositional change.<br />
Here we witness in <strong>the</strong> successor-writings <strong>the</strong> formation of a system<br />
connected with, but asymmetrical to, <strong>the</strong> initial, philosophical one.<br />
Then for <strong>the</strong> world-view of <strong>the</strong> transformed Judaism, <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category<br />
to philosophy is formulated <strong>by</strong> appeal to <strong>the</strong> symbolic<br />
medium for <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological message, and it is <strong>the</strong> category, <strong>the</strong> Torah,<br />
expressed, as a matter of fact, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> symbol of Torah.<br />
Philosophy sought <strong>the</strong> generalizations that cases might yield. So<br />
too did religion (and, in due course, <strong>the</strong>ology would too). But <strong>the</strong><br />
range of generalization vastly differed. Philosophy spoke of <strong>the</strong> nature<br />
of things, while <strong>the</strong>ology represented <strong>the</strong> special nature of Israel<br />
in particular. Philosophy <strong>the</strong>n appealed to <strong>the</strong> traits of things, while<br />
<strong>the</strong>ology to <strong>the</strong> special indicative qualities of Israel. What of <strong>the</strong><br />
propositional program that <strong>the</strong> document sets forth? The philosophical<br />
proposition of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah demonstrated from <strong>the</strong> facts and traits<br />
35
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
of things <strong>the</strong> hierarchical order of all being, with <strong>the</strong> obvious if merely<br />
implicit proposition that God stands at <strong>the</strong> head of <strong>the</strong> social order.<br />
The religious propositions of <strong>the</strong> successor-documents speak in o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
words of o<strong>the</strong>r things, having simply nothing in common with <strong>the</strong><br />
propositional program of <strong>the</strong> Mishnahís philosophy.<br />
The shift in economics is no less striking. Consideration of <strong>the</strong><br />
transvaluation of value brings us to <strong>the</strong> successor-systemís counterpart<br />
category, that is, <strong>the</strong> one that in context forms <strong>the</strong> counterpart to<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mishnahís concrete, this-worldly, material and tangible definition<br />
of value in conformity with <strong>the</strong> familiar, philosophical economics.<br />
We have now to ask, what, in place of <strong>the</strong> received definition of value<br />
and <strong>the</strong> economics <strong>the</strong>reof, did <strong>the</strong> new system set forth? The transformation<br />
of economics involved <strong>the</strong> redefinition of scarce and valued<br />
resources in so radical a manner that <strong>the</strong> concept of value, while<br />
remaining material in consequence and character, none<strong>the</strong>less took<br />
on a quite different sense altoge<strong>the</strong>r. The counterpart category of <strong>the</strong><br />
successor-system concerned <strong>the</strong>mselves with <strong>the</strong> same questions as<br />
did <strong>the</strong> conventional economics, presenting an economics in function<br />
and structure, but one that concerned things of value o<strong>the</strong>r than those<br />
identified <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> initial system. So indeed we deal with an economics,<br />
an economics of something o<strong>the</strong>r than real estate.<br />
But it was an economics just as profoundly embedded in <strong>the</strong> social<br />
order, just as deeply a political economics, just as pervasively a systemic<br />
economics, as <strong>the</strong> economics of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah and of Aristotle.<br />
Why so? Because issues such as <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth, <strong>the</strong> means<br />
of production and <strong>the</strong> meaning of control <strong>the</strong>reof, <strong>the</strong> disposition of<br />
wealth through distributive or o<strong>the</strong>r media, <strong>the</strong>ory of money, reward<br />
for labor, and <strong>the</strong> like ñ all <strong>the</strong>se issues found <strong>the</strong>ir answers in <strong>the</strong><br />
counterpart-category of economics, as much as in <strong>the</strong> received and<br />
conventional philosophical economics. The new ìscarce resourceî<br />
accomplished what <strong>the</strong> old did, but it was a different resource, a new<br />
currency. At stake in <strong>the</strong> category meant to address <strong>the</strong> issues of <strong>the</strong><br />
way of life of <strong>the</strong> social entity, <strong>the</strong>refore, were precisely <strong>the</strong> same<br />
considerations as confront economics in its (to us) conventional and<br />
commonplace, philosophical sense. But since <strong>the</strong> definition of wealth<br />
changes, as we have already seen, from land to Torah, much else<br />
would be transformed on that account.<br />
36
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
Land produced a living; so did Torah. Land formed <strong>the</strong> foundation<br />
of <strong>the</strong> social entity, so did Torah. The transvaluation of value was<br />
such that an economics concerning <strong>the</strong> rational management and increase<br />
of scarce resources worked itself out in such a way as to answer,<br />
for quite different things of value from real property or from<br />
capital such as we know as value, precisely <strong>the</strong> same questions that<br />
<strong>the</strong> received economics addressed in connection with wealth of a real<br />
character: land and its produce. Systemic transformation comes to<br />
<strong>the</strong> surface in articulated symbolic change. The utter transvaluation<br />
of value finds expression in a jarring juxtaposition, an utter shift of<br />
rationality, specifically, <strong>the</strong> substitution of Torah for real estate. We<br />
recall how in a successor-document (but in none prior to <strong>the</strong> fifth<br />
century compilations) Tarfon thought wealth took <strong>the</strong> form of land,<br />
while Aqiba explained to him that wealth takes <strong>the</strong> form of<br />
Torah-learning. That <strong>the</strong> sense is material and concrete is explicit:<br />
land for Torah, Torah for land. Thus, to repeat <strong>the</strong> matter of how<br />
Torah serves as an explicit symbol to convey <strong>the</strong> systemic worldview,<br />
let us note <strong>the</strong> main point of this passage:<br />
Leviticus Rabbah XXXIV:XVI<br />
1. B. R. Tarfon gave to R. Aqiba six silver centenarii, saying<br />
to him, ìGo, buy us a piece of land, so we can get a living<br />
from it and labor in <strong>the</strong> study of Torah toge<strong>the</strong>r.î<br />
C. He took <strong>the</strong> money and handed it over to scribes,<br />
Mishnah-teachers, and those who study Torah.<br />
D. After some time R. Tarfon met him and said to him, ìDid<br />
you buy <strong>the</strong> land that I mentioned to you?î<br />
E. He said to him, ìYes.î<br />
F. He said to him, ìIs it any good?î<br />
G. He said to him, ìYes.î<br />
H. He said to him, ìAnd do you not want to show it to me?î<br />
I. He took him and showed him <strong>the</strong> scribes, Mishnah teachers,<br />
and people who were studying Torah, and <strong>the</strong> Torah<br />
that <strong>the</strong>y had acquired.<br />
J. He said to him, ìIs <strong>the</strong>re anyone who works for nothing?<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> deed covering <strong>the</strong> field?î<br />
K. He said to him, ìIt is with King David, concerning whom<br />
37
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
it is written, ëHe has scattered, he has given to <strong>the</strong> poor,<br />
his righteousness endures foreverí (Ps. 112:9).î<br />
The successor-system has its own definitions not only for learning,<br />
symbolized <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> word Torah but also for wealth, expressed in<br />
<strong>the</strong> same symbol. Accordingly, <strong>the</strong> category-formation for<br />
worldview, Torah in place of philosophy, dictates, as a matter of fact,<br />
a still more striking category-reformation, in which <strong>the</strong> entire matter<br />
of scarce resources is reconsidered, and a counterpart-category set<br />
forth.<br />
Philosophical politics tells who may legitimately do what to whom.<br />
When a politics wants to know who ought not to be doing what to<br />
whom, we find in hand <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category to <strong>the</strong> received politics<br />
ñ anti-politics, a <strong>the</strong>ory of <strong>the</strong> illegitimacy of power, <strong>the</strong> legitimacy<br />
of being victim. The received category set forth politics as <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>ory of legitimate violence, <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category, politics as <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>ory of illegitimate violence. The received politics had been one of<br />
isolation and interiority, portraying Israel as sui generis and autocephalic<br />
in all ways. The portrait in <strong>the</strong> successor-documents is<br />
a politics of integration among <strong>the</strong> nations; a perspective of exteriority<br />
replaces <strong>the</strong> inner-facing one of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah, which recognized no<br />
government of Israel but Godís ñ and <strong>the</strong>n essentially ab initio. The<br />
issues of power had found definition in questions concerning who<br />
legitimately inflicts sanctions upon whom within Israel. They now<br />
shift to give an account of who illegitimately inflicts sanctions upon<br />
(ìpersecutesî) Israel. So <strong>the</strong> points of systemic differentiation are<br />
radically revised, and <strong>the</strong> politics of <strong>the</strong> successor-system becomes<br />
not a revision of <strong>the</strong> received category but a formation that in many<br />
ways mirrors <strong>the</strong> received one: once more a counterpart-category.<br />
Just as, in <strong>the</strong> definition of scarce resources, Torah-study has replaced<br />
land, so now weakness forms <strong>the</strong> focus in place of strength, illegitimacy<br />
in place of legitimacy. Once more <strong>the</strong> mirror-image of <strong>the</strong> received<br />
category presents <strong>the</strong> perspective of <strong>the</strong> counterpart-category.<br />
Now we find <strong>the</strong> answers to <strong>the</strong>se questions: to whom is violence<br />
illegitimately done, and also, who may not legitimately inflict violence?<br />
With <strong>the</strong> move from <strong>the</strong> politics of legitimate to that of illegitimate<br />
power, <strong>the</strong> systemic interest now lies in defining not <strong>the</strong> who<br />
38
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
legitimately does what, but ra<strong>the</strong>r, <strong>the</strong> to whom, against whom, is<br />
power illegitimately exercised. And this movement represents not <strong>the</strong><br />
revision of <strong>the</strong> received category, but its inversion. For thought on<br />
legitimate violence is turned on its head. A new category of empowerment<br />
is worked out alongside <strong>the</strong> old. The entity that is victim of<br />
power is at <strong>the</strong> center, ra<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> entity that legitimately exercises<br />
power. That entity is now Israel en masse, ra<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> institutions<br />
and agencies of Israel on earth, Heaven above ñ a very considerable<br />
shift in thought on <strong>the</strong> systemic social entity. Israel as disempowered,<br />
ra<strong>the</strong>r than king, high priest, and sage as Israelís media of empowerment,<br />
defines <strong>the</strong> new systemís politics. The upshot is that <strong>the</strong> successor-system<br />
has reconsidered not merely <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> received<br />
structure, but <strong>the</strong> composition of <strong>the</strong> structure itself. In place of its<br />
philosophy, we have now a new medium for <strong>the</strong> formulation of<br />
a world-view; in place of a way of life formulated as an economics,<br />
a new valuation of value, in place of an account of <strong>the</strong> social entity<br />
framed as a politics, a new conception of legitimate violence. So<br />
much for <strong>the</strong> formation of counterpart categories.<br />
VIII. From Philosophy to Religion. Systemic Integration<br />
What holds <strong>the</strong> system toge<strong>the</strong>r identifies <strong>the</strong> critical question that<br />
<strong>the</strong> system as a whole means to answer, its aspect of self-evidence.<br />
Seeing <strong>the</strong> whole all at once, we may <strong>the</strong>n undertake that work of<br />
comparison and contrast that produces connections from system to<br />
system. How <strong>the</strong>n may we characterize <strong>the</strong> shift from a philosophical<br />
to a religious system? The answer derives from our choice of <strong>the</strong><br />
systemic center, e.g., a symbol that captures <strong>the</strong> whole, that holds <strong>the</strong><br />
whole toge<strong>the</strong>r. Certainly, <strong>the</strong> integration of <strong>the</strong> philosophical system<br />
is readily stated in a phrase: <strong>the</strong> philosophical Judaism set forth<br />
a system of hierarchical classification. Having emphasized <strong>the</strong> succession<br />
ñ philosophy out, Torah in ñ one may ask whe<strong>the</strong>r for <strong>the</strong><br />
religious system of Judaism, <strong>the</strong> systemic center is captured <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
symbol of <strong>the</strong> Torah ñ focused on <strong>the</strong> holy man sanctified through<br />
mastery of revelation. The answer is negative, because, as a matter of<br />
fact, knowledge of <strong>the</strong> Torah forms a way-station on a path to a more<br />
39
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
distant, more central goal, it is a dependent variable, contingent and<br />
stipulative. Then wherein lies <strong>the</strong> systemic center? It is <strong>the</strong> quest for<br />
zekhut, properly translated as ì<strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue and its consequent<br />
entitlements.î It is <strong>the</strong> simple fact that Torah-study is one means<br />
of attaining access to that heritage, of gaining zekhut ñ and <strong>the</strong>re are<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r equally suitable means. The zekhut gained <strong>by</strong> Torah-study is no<br />
different from <strong>the</strong> merit gained <strong>by</strong> acts of supererogatory grace. So<br />
we must take seriously <strong>the</strong> contingent status, <strong>the</strong> standing of a dependent<br />
variable, accorded to Torah-study in such stories as <strong>the</strong> following:<br />
Y. Taanit 3:11. IV<br />
C. There was a house that was about to collapse over <strong>the</strong>re<br />
[in Ba<strong>by</strong>lonia], and Rab set one of his disciples in <strong>the</strong><br />
house, until <strong>the</strong>y had cleared out everything from <strong>the</strong><br />
house. When <strong>the</strong> disciple left <strong>the</strong> house, <strong>the</strong> house collapsed.<br />
D. And <strong>the</strong>re are those who say that it was R. Adda bar<br />
Ahwah.<br />
E. Sages sent and said to him, ìWhat sort of good deeds are<br />
to your credit [that you have that much merit]?î<br />
F. He said to <strong>the</strong>m, ìIn my whole life no man ever got to<br />
<strong>the</strong> synagogue in <strong>the</strong> morning before I did. I never left<br />
anybody <strong>the</strong>re when I went out. I never walked four cubits<br />
without speaking words of Torah. Nor did I ever<br />
mention teachings of Torah in an inappropriate setting.<br />
I never laid out a bed and slept for a regular period of<br />
time. I never took great strides among <strong>the</strong> associates.<br />
I never called my fellow <strong>by</strong> a nickname. I never rejoiced<br />
in <strong>the</strong> embarrassment of my fellow. I never cursed my<br />
fellow when I was lying <strong>by</strong> myself in bed. I never walked<br />
over in <strong>the</strong> marketplace to someone who owed me<br />
money.<br />
G. ìIn my entire life I never lost my temper in my household.î<br />
H. This was meant to carry out that which is stated as follows:<br />
ìI will give heed to <strong>the</strong> way that is blameless. Oh<br />
40
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
when wilt thou come to me? I will walk with integrity of<br />
heart within my houseî (Ps. 101:2).<br />
What is striking in this story is that mastery of <strong>the</strong> Torah is only<br />
one means of attaining <strong>the</strong> zekhut that had enabled <strong>the</strong> sage to keep<br />
<strong>the</strong> house from collapsing. And Torah-study is not <strong>the</strong> primary means<br />
of attaining zekhut. The question at E provides <strong>the</strong> key, toge<strong>the</strong>r with<br />
its answer at F. For what <strong>the</strong> sage did to gain such remarkable zekhut<br />
is not to master such-and-so many tractates of <strong>the</strong> Mishnah. It was<br />
ra<strong>the</strong>r acts of courtesy, consideration, gentility, restraint. These produced<br />
zekhut, all of <strong>the</strong>m acts of self-abnegation or <strong>the</strong> avoidance of<br />
power over o<strong>the</strong>rs and <strong>the</strong> submission to <strong>the</strong> will and <strong>the</strong> requirement<br />
of self-esteem of o<strong>the</strong>rs. Torah-study is simply an item on a list of<br />
actions or attitudes that generate zekhut.<br />
Here, in a moral setting, we find <strong>the</strong> politics replicated: <strong>the</strong> form of<br />
power that <strong>the</strong> system promises derives from <strong>the</strong> rejection of power<br />
that <strong>the</strong> world recognizes ñ legitimate violence replaced <strong>by</strong> legitimation<br />
of <strong>the</strong> absence of <strong>the</strong> power to commit violence or of <strong>the</strong> failure<br />
to commit violence. And, when we ask, whence that sort of power?<br />
<strong>the</strong> answer lies in <strong>the</strong> gaining of zekhut in a variety of ways, not in <strong>the</strong><br />
acquisition of zekhut through <strong>the</strong> study of <strong>the</strong> Torah solely or even<br />
primarily. But, we note, <strong>the</strong> story at hand speaks of a sage in particular.<br />
He has gained zekhut <strong>by</strong> not acting <strong>the</strong> way sages are commonly<br />
assumed to behave but in a humble way.<br />
Ordinary folk, not disciples of sages, have access to zekhut entirely<br />
outside of study of <strong>the</strong> Torah. In stories not told about rabbis,<br />
a single remarkable deed, exemplary for its deep humanity, sufficed<br />
to win for an ordinary person <strong>the</strong> zekhut ñ ì<strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue and<br />
its consequent entitlementsî ñ that elicits <strong>the</strong> same marks of supernatural<br />
favor enjoyed <strong>by</strong> some rabbis on account of <strong>the</strong>ir Torah-study.<br />
Accordingly, <strong>the</strong> systemic centrality of zekhut in <strong>the</strong> structure, <strong>the</strong><br />
critical importance of <strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue toge<strong>the</strong>r with its supernatural<br />
entitlements ñ <strong>the</strong>se emerge in a striking claim. It is framed in<br />
extreme form ñ ano<strong>the</strong>r mark of <strong>the</strong> unique place of zekhut within <strong>the</strong><br />
system. Even though a man was degraded, one action sufficed to win<br />
for him that heavenly glory to which rabbis in lives of Torah-study<br />
aspired.<br />
41
JACOB NEUSNER<br />
The mark of <strong>the</strong> systemís integration around zekhut lies in its insistence<br />
that all Israelites, not only sages, could gain zekhut for <strong>the</strong>mselves<br />
(and <strong>the</strong>ir descendants). A single remarkable deed, exemplary<br />
for its deep humanity, sufficed to win for an ordinary person <strong>the</strong><br />
zekhut that elicits supernatural favor enjoyed <strong>by</strong> some rabbis on account<br />
of <strong>the</strong>ir Torah-study. The centrality of zekhut in <strong>the</strong> systemic<br />
structure, <strong>the</strong> critical importance of <strong>the</strong> heritage of virtue toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />
with its supernatural entitlements <strong>the</strong>refore emerge in a striking claim.<br />
Even though a man was degraded, one action sufficed to win for him<br />
that heavenly glory to which rabbis in general aspired. The rabbinical<br />
storyteller whose writing we shall consider assuredly identifies with<br />
this lesson, since it is <strong>the</strong> point of his story and its climax.<br />
Zekhut serves, in particular, that counterpart category that speaks<br />
of not legitimate but illegitimate violence, not power but weakness.<br />
In context, time and again, we observe that zekhut is <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong><br />
weak. People who through <strong>the</strong>ir own merit and capacity can accomplish<br />
nothing, can accomplish miracles through what o<strong>the</strong>rs do for<br />
<strong>the</strong>m in leaving a heritage of zekhut.. And, not to miss <strong>the</strong> stunning<br />
message of <strong>the</strong> triplet of stories cited above, zekhut also is what <strong>the</strong><br />
weak and excluded and despised can do that outweighs in power<br />
what <strong>the</strong> great masters of <strong>the</strong> Torah have accomplished. In <strong>the</strong> context<br />
of a system that represents Torah as supernatural, that claim of priority<br />
for zekhut represents a considerable transvaluation of power, as<br />
much as of value. And, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> way, zekhut also forms <strong>the</strong> inheritance<br />
of <strong>the</strong> disinherited: what you receive as a heritage when you have<br />
nothing in <strong>the</strong> present and have gotten nothing in <strong>the</strong> past, that scarce<br />
resource that is free and unearned but much valued. So let us dwell<br />
upon <strong>the</strong> definitive character of <strong>the</strong> transferability of zekhut in its<br />
formulation, zekhut abot, <strong>the</strong> zekhut handed on <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> ancestors, <strong>the</strong><br />
transitive character of <strong>the</strong> concept and its standing as a heritage of<br />
entitlements.<br />
So zekhut forms <strong>the</strong> political economy of <strong>the</strong> religious system of<br />
<strong>the</strong> social order put forward <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Talmud of <strong>the</strong> Land of Israel and<br />
related writings. Here we find <strong>the</strong> power that brought about <strong>the</strong> transvaluation<br />
of value, <strong>the</strong> reversal of <strong>the</strong> meaning of power and its legitimacy.<br />
Zekhut expresses and accounts for <strong>the</strong> economic valuation of<br />
<strong>the</strong> scarce resource of what we should call moral authority. Zekhut<br />
42
THE FORMATION OF RABBINIC JUDAISM: FROM THE MISHNAHíS PHILOSOPHY Ö<br />
stands for <strong>the</strong> political valorization of weakness, that which endows<br />
<strong>the</strong> weak with a power that is not only <strong>the</strong>ir own but <strong>the</strong>ir ancestorsí.<br />
It enables <strong>the</strong> weak to accomplish goals through not <strong>the</strong>ir own power,<br />
but <strong>the</strong>ir very incapacity to accomplish acts of violence ñ a transvaluation<br />
as radical as that effected in economics. And zekhut holds<br />
toge<strong>the</strong>r both <strong>the</strong> economics and <strong>the</strong> politics of this Judaism: it makes<br />
<strong>the</strong> same statement twice. Zekhut as <strong>the</strong> power of <strong>the</strong> powerless, <strong>the</strong><br />
riches of <strong>the</strong> disinherited, <strong>the</strong> valuation and valorization of <strong>the</strong> will of<br />
those who have no right to will. In that conception <strong>the</strong> politics, social<br />
order, and <strong>the</strong>ology of Rabbinic Judaism came toge<strong>the</strong>r. For <strong>the</strong> millennium<br />
and a half that would follow, this is <strong>the</strong> Judaism that governed.<br />
43
EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSCHE HANDSCHRIFT<br />
DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN<br />
JOHANNES HELICZ, BRESLAU 1537<br />
Martin Rothkegel, Praha<br />
Der (vom Namen der ostgalizischen Stadt Halicz abgeleitete) Familienname<br />
Helicz ist indirekt mit der Kralitzer Bibel, der ber¸hmten<br />
Bibel¸bersetzung der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, verbunden. Die Kralitzer<br />
Bibel entstand in den Jahren 1579ñ1594 als kollektive Arbeit einer<br />
Kommission von br¸derischen Gelehrten an der Br¸derschule Eibenschitz<br />
(IvanËice) in M‰hren. Zu den ‹bersetzern gehˆrte zeitweilig<br />
Lukas Helicz, ein Hebraist j¸discher Herkunft, der 1564 der polnischen<br />
Unit‰t beigetreten war, 1575 in Posen (PoznaÒ) br¸derischer<br />
Diakon wurde und 1581 in Eibenschitz zum Br¸derpriester geweiht<br />
wurde. Er war 1589 Rektor der deutschen Br¸derschule und deutscher<br />
Prediger in Fulnek, bis er sich, offenbar im Unfrieden mit der<br />
m‰hrischen Unit‰t, wieder nach Polen wandte. 1<br />
Lukas Helicz stammte aus der ersten j¸dischen Druckerfamilie<br />
Polens. Die drei Br¸der Samuel, Asser und Eljakim ben Chajim<br />
Helicz hatten um 1534 in Krakau die erste hebr‰ische Buchdruckerei<br />
des Kˆnigreiches begr¸ndet. Ihre Erzeugnisse, die heute zu den typographischen<br />
Seltenheiten gehˆren, waren durchweg gelehrten und<br />
religiˆsen Inhalts. Einer der drei Br¸der, Samuel Helicz, druckte<br />
aufler in Krakau auch im schlesischen Oels (nachweisbar ist ein Siddur<br />
von 1536), jedoch wurde die Oelser Werkstadt 1536 von einem<br />
1 Vgl. J. Th. M¸ller, Geschichte der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, Bd. 3: Die polnische<br />
Unit‰t 1548ñ1793. Die bˆhmisch-m‰hrische Unit‰t 1575ñ1781, S. 291f.; J. Fiedler<br />
(Hg.), Todtenbuch der Geistlichkeit der Bˆhmischen Br¸der, Wien 1863 (Fontes<br />
rerum Austriacarum I/5, S. 213ñ310), S. 281; Fr. Hrejsa, SborovÈ Jednoty bratrskÈ,<br />
VIII.: Zpr·vy o sborech bratrsk˝ch a o brat¯Ìch v PrusÌch, Polsku, na Slovensku<br />
a†v†cizinÏ, in: RefomaËnÌ sbornÌk 7 (1939), S. 10ñ114, dort S. 50; J. VolfÇ N·boûenskÈ<br />
h·d·nÌ Luk·öe Helice ve Fulneku r. 1589, in: »asopis vlasteneckÈho spolku<br />
musejnÌho v Olomouci 36 (1925), S. 75ñ82.<br />
44
EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />
Unwetter zerstˆrt. 2 Im Februar und M‰rz 1537 traten Samuel, Eljakim,<br />
Asser und noch ein vierter Bruder zusammen mit ihrer Groflmutter,<br />
ihrem Vater Chajim Helicz und ihrer Schwester zum Christentum<br />
¸ber. Die Gr¸nde f¸r die Konversion sind nicht bekannt. Es<br />
f‰llt aber auf, dafl es gerade unter hebr‰ischen Druckern, Setzern und<br />
Korrektoren des 16. Jhs. in mehreren F‰llen zu ‹bertritten zum Christentum<br />
kam.<br />
Samuel nannte sich nach der Taufe Andreas (1), ein weiterer Bruder<br />
ebenso, d. h. Andreas (2), die beiden andern Johannes und Paulus.<br />
Samuel-Andreas (1) und wohl auch Johannes empfingen die Taufe<br />
in Breslau. Die Krakauer Druckerei fuhr zun‰chst mit der<br />
Produktion j¸discher B¸cher in hebr‰ischer Sprache fort (noch 1539<br />
druckte Johannes Helicz religiˆse j¸dische Texte), jedoch verloren<br />
die Gebr¸der Helicz ihre gesamte j¸dische Kundschaft, f¸r die die<br />
Erzeugnisse der von der j¸dischen Religion abtr¸nnigen Buchdrukker<br />
aus religionsgesetzlichen Gr¸nden untauglich geworden war.<br />
Trotz der Anstrengungen des polnischen Kˆnigs, die polnischen<br />
Judengemeinden durch Dekrete vom 28. M‰rz und 16. Juni 1537 zum<br />
Kauf der von der Offizin Helicz gedruckten hebr‰ischen B¸cher zu<br />
zwingen, muflten die Br¸der die Produktion von j¸dischen religiˆsen<br />
Texten in der Folgezeit aufgeben und ihre gemeinsame Firma auflˆsen.<br />
Die durch ein kˆnigliches Dekret vom 31. Dezember 1539 eingesetzten<br />
Konkursverwalter stellten einen unverk‰uflichen Bestand<br />
von 3350 B‰nden fest, den sie auf 1600 fl. sch‰tzten. Die polnische<br />
Judenschaft wurde verpflichtet, diese Summe in mehreren Raten zu<br />
erlegen und das gesamte B¸cherlager zu ¸bernehmen. In den folgenden<br />
drei Jahrzehnten ruhte in Krakau der hebr‰ische Buchdruck. 3<br />
Die Wege der Br¸der trennten sich bereits vor der Liquidierung<br />
der Firma. Andreas (1) blieb nach seiner Taufe am 11. M‰rz 1537 im<br />
evangelischen Breslau, liefl sich dort als Buchbinder nieder und erhielt<br />
am 29. Januar 1538 das B¸rgerrecht. Um 1551 floh er jedoch in<br />
das Osmanische Reich, um wieder zum Judentum zur¸ckzukehren.<br />
2 Zur Offizin Helicz vgl. M. Balaban, Zur Geschichte der hebr‰ischen Druckereien<br />
in Polen, in: Soncino-Bl‰tter 3 (1929/30), S. 1ñ50, dort 1ñ9. Siehe auch Art. Halicz,<br />
in: Encyclopaedia Judaica, Bd. 7, Berlin 1931, Sp. 871f.; Art. Halicz, in:<br />
Encyclopaedia Judaica, Bd. 7, Jerusalem 1971, Sp. 1189ñ1191.<br />
3 Vgl. Balaban, Geschichte, S. 2ñ5 und 36, 41ñ 44, Dok. Nr. IñIII.<br />
45
MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />
Der Breslauer Chronist Nikolaus Pol berichtet ¸ber ihn: Ñ1537, am<br />
Sontag Laetare, [Ö] zu St. Elisabeth [Ö] zur vesper ward ein Jude<br />
Andreas getaufft. Hielt sich eine zeitlang ehrlich und from, da ihm<br />
aber die leute viel getrauet und er einen statlichen handel f¸hrete und<br />
man am wenigsten auff ihn gedancken hatte, ist er auffgestanden, hat<br />
die leute betrogen, weib und kinder sitzen lassen.ì 4 Hans Dernschwamm,<br />
Mitglied einer kaiserlichen Gesandtschaft an die Pforte,<br />
traf den aus Breslau geflohenen Andreas 1553 in Konstantinopel an,<br />
wo dieser unter seinem Geburtsnamen Samuel b. Chajim Helic eine<br />
hebr‰ische Druckerei betrieb. Andreas (2) wurde dagegen B¸rger und<br />
Kaufmann in Krakau und starb zwischen 1557 und 1565. 5<br />
Paulus hielt sich nach seiner Taufe vor¸bergehend in Posen auf,<br />
wo der Posener Wojwode Lukasz GÛrka bei der Taufe seines Sohnes,<br />
des sp‰teren Br¸derpriesters Lukas, Pate stand (bei dieser Taufe, die<br />
der katholische Bischof von Posen vollzog, wurden insgesamt 14 j¸dische<br />
Personen getauft). Beseelt von Missionseifer druckte Paulus<br />
Helicz 1540/41 in Krakau das Neue Testament in der deutschen ‹bersetzung<br />
Martin Lu<strong>the</strong>rs mit hebr‰ischen Lettern. Das Werk ist in einer<br />
1541 datierten Dedikationsepistel dem Bischof von Krakau und<br />
Erzbischof-Primas von Gnesen, Petrus Gamrat, einem heftigen Gegner<br />
der Reformation, gewidmet. Helicz berichtet in dieser Widmungsvorrede,<br />
dafl die Rabbiner in ihren H‰user zwar sehr wohl das Neue<br />
Testament besitzen und lesen, es aber vor dem Volk verbergen, daher<br />
m¸sse es den Juden zum Zweck ihrer Bekehrung in ihrer Alltagssprache<br />
zug‰nglich gemacht werden. (Dafl Lu<strong>the</strong>rs Bibel¸bersetzung in<br />
dieser Gestalt im katholischen Krakau unter bischˆflichem Schutz im<br />
Druck erschien, darf als Kuriosum gelten.) 6 Auch Paulus Helicz liefl<br />
4<br />
Nikolaus Pol, Hemerologion Silesiacum Vratislaviense [Ö] Leiptzig [Ö] Anno<br />
M. DC. XII., S. 97. Eine handschriftliche Breslauer Chronik in der Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k<br />
Breslau, Sign. IV F 121, f¸gt hinzu, dafl Andreas Ñmit dreyen seinen<br />
kindernì die Taufe empfing.<br />
5 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 5, 32, 50.<br />
6 Ebd. S. 7ñ9. Das Titelblatt des seltenen Druckes ist bei Balaban, Geschichte,<br />
S. 38, nach einem Exemplar der Jagiellonischen Biblio<strong>the</strong>k in Krakau (non vidi)<br />
reproduziert und lautet:<br />
èøòÔ àã ñàã ´ èðòîéèñòè Öåð ñàã<br />
óÕà èùéà ñàã ´ ïåàéìòéðÏáò èðòðéâ<br />
êÖìâ ´ èÏôùèàá éÏëéìàøå ïÖà ùèÖåã<br />
äáåè äøåùÒá ïùòÖøéáò íéà éÔ<br />
Gedrukt zu krokau durch Paul helic im Iar M. D. XXXX.<br />
46
EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />
sich im evangelischen Breslau nieder. 1543 druckte er im Breslauer<br />
Vorort Hundsfeld ein praktisches Lehrbuch der j¸disch-deutschen<br />
Sprache und Schrift f¸r christliche Leser, insbesondere Kaufleute,<br />
die gesch‰ftlich mit Juden zu tun hatten. 7 In Breslau besafl er bis<br />
1548 auch ein Haus, mit dessen Verkauf sich seine Spur verliert. 8<br />
Der vierte Bruder, Johannes, kehrte nach dreij‰hrigem Aufenthalt<br />
in Breslau nach Krakau zur¸ck und druckte dort 1540 sieben lateinische<br />
christliche Schriften. Auch an einem Krakauer lateinischen<br />
Druck von 1561 war er anscheinend noch beteiligt. 9<br />
Eine interessante Erg‰nzung zu den sp‰rlichen Nachrichten ¸ber<br />
die spektakul‰re Konversion der Familie Helicz ist eine Handschrift<br />
des Johannes Helicz von 1537, die aus der Biblio<strong>the</strong>k des Franziskanerklosters<br />
in Skalitz an der March (Skalica na Slovensku)<br />
stammt 10 und sich heute in der Slowakischen Nationalbiblio<strong>the</strong>k in<br />
Martin befindet. 11 Der wohlerhaltene Band umfaflt 196 Papierbl‰tter<br />
im Format 210 x 150 mm. Der gesamte enthaltene Text ist von derselben,<br />
gleichm‰fligen und sorgf‰ltigen Hand in schwarzer und roter<br />
Tinte in einer aschkenasischen Halbkursive (Raschi-Schrift) geschrieben.<br />
Daneben ist f¸r ‹berschriften und Initialen, gelegentlich auch<br />
f¸r hervorzuhebende Worte im Text, Quadratschrift verwendet. Die<br />
Handschrift hat einen schˆnen Renaissance-Ledereinband, wohl ein<br />
Werk der Breslauer Buchbinderwerkstatt des Samuel-Andreas Helicz,<br />
mit reicher Blindpr‰gung. Auf der Vorderseite ist mit groflen lateinischen<br />
und hebr‰ischen Drucklettern folgende Aufschrift mit einem<br />
7 Der Titel lautet: Elemental / oder leseb¸chlen / Doraus meniglich / mit gutem<br />
grund vnderwisen wirt : wie man de˘tsche b¸chlen / Missiuen oder Sendbriue /<br />
Schuldbriue / so mit ebreischen / ader J¸dischen buchstaben geschriben werden :<br />
Auch die Zal / Jar / Monad / vnd anders zu gehˆrig: lesen vnd versten sol. Jtzt<br />
ne˘lich an tag geben. Gedruckt zum hundesfeld. d˘rch paul helicz. M. D. XXXX iij.<br />
Exemplar: Universit‰tsbiblio<strong>the</strong>k Breslau, Sign. 4 E 263. Von diesem Druck erschien<br />
ein Faksimile mit einem Vorwort von Max Silberberg, Breslau 1929 (non<br />
vidi). Vgl. M. Brann, Geschichte der Juden in Schlesien, Breslau 1910, S. 167ñ173;<br />
N. Shtif, Paul Helitz: ÑElemental oder Leseb¸chlein:ì (Hundsfeld 1543), in: Studies<br />
in Philology 3 (1929), Sp. 515ñ524; J. Benzing, Die Buchdrucker des 16. und<br />
17. Jahrhunderts im deutschen Sprachgebiet, 2. Aufl., Wiesbaden 1982 (Beitr‰ge<br />
zum Buch- und Biblio<strong>the</strong>kswesen, 12), S. 199f.<br />
8 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 9.<br />
9 Balaban, Geschichte, S. 5ñ7.<br />
10 Zur Biblio<strong>the</strong>k der Skalitzer Franziskaner und ihrer Liquidierung im Jahr 1950<br />
vgl. º. KoöÌk, Z duchovnÈho dediËstva Skalice, Skalica 1996, S. 29ff.<br />
11 Martin, Slovensk· n·rodn· kniûnica, ArchÌv literat˙ry a umenia, Sign. J 2870.<br />
47
MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />
hebr‰ischen Motto aus Ps. 19,8 eingepreflt: ÑDAS NEVE TESTA-<br />
MENT / ùôð úáéùî äîéîú ´ä úøåú / MDXXXVII.ì Auf dem Buchr¸cken<br />
ist die Aufschrift çéùîä úøåú (Gesetz Christi) zu lesen, ein naheliegendes<br />
hebr‰isches ƒquivalent f¸r ÑEvangeliumì, das sich auch bei<br />
dem zeitgenˆssischen christlichen Hebraisten Sebastian M¸nster findet,<br />
der seiner hebr‰ischen Ausgabe des Matth‰us-Evangeliums (Basel<br />
1537) den Titel çéùîä úøåú gab. 12<br />
Die Handschrift enth‰lt auf Bl. 3 a bis 158 a die vier Evangelien in<br />
der deutschen ‹bersetzung Martin Lu<strong>the</strong>rs in hebr‰ischer Schrift.<br />
Der zugrundeliegende Lu<strong>the</strong>rtext ist, wie Stichproben ergeben, derjenige<br />
der 1534 in Wittenberg erschienenen Gesamtausgabe der Lu<strong>the</strong>rbibel.<br />
Die Marginalien der Lu<strong>the</strong>rbibel sind in roter Schrift als Erl‰uterungen<br />
neben die entsprechenden Textabschnitte gestellt. Um den<br />
Lu<strong>the</strong>rtext der j¸disch-deutschen Mundart n‰herzubringen, sind gewisse<br />
lexikalische ƒnderungen vorgenommen worden. Die vier Evangelien<br />
werden abgeschlossen mit einem auf Jes. 40,29 anspielenden<br />
Lobspruch auf Bl. 158 a : äáøé äîöò íéðåà ïéàìå çë óòéì ïúðä êåøá.<br />
Es folgt, nach mehreren leeren Seiten, auf Bl. 161 a bis 194 b der<br />
bekannte mittelalterliche Missionstraktat ÑSendbrief des Rabbi Samuel<br />
von Marokkoì, transkribiert nach einem Druck der ‹bersetztung<br />
des Lu<strong>the</strong>raners Wenzeslaus Linck (gedruckt in Zwickau<br />
1524). Dafl Helicz diesen Text in seine persˆnliche Evangelienhandschrift<br />
einf¸gte, ist eine rezeptionsgeschichtlich interessante Tatsache,<br />
zeigt sie doch, dafl dieser in der modernen Forschung wenig<br />
gesch‰tzte Traktat (offenbar eine Mystifikation eines dominikanischen<br />
Verfassers des 14. Jhs.) 13 auch bei Lesern, die, wie die Gebr¸der<br />
Helicz, zur j¸dischen intellektuellen Elite des 16. Jahrhunderts zu<br />
z‰hlen sind, eine positive Aufnahme finden konnte.<br />
Am Ende des Bandes findet sich auf Bl. 194 b ein Kolophon mit<br />
12 çéùîä úøåú Evangelium secundum Matthaeum in lingua Hebraica cum versione<br />
Latina atque succinctis annotationibus Sebastiani Munsteri [Ö] Opus antiquum,<br />
sed iam recens ex officina Henrici Petri typis evulgatum. Basileae Anno restitutae<br />
salutis MDXXXVII Mense Martio. (Exemplar: Wolfenb¸ttel, Herzog August Biblio<strong>the</strong>k,<br />
Sign. G 209 Helmst. 2∞ [2]).<br />
13 Vgl. O. Limor, The Epistle of Rabbi Samuel of Marocco: A Best-Seller in <strong>the</strong><br />
World of Polemics, in: Contra Iudaeos: Ancient and Medieval Polemics between<br />
Christians and Jews, ed. <strong>by</strong> O. Limor and G. Stroumsa, T¸bingen 1996 (Texts and<br />
Studies in Medieval and Early Modern Judaism, 10), S. 177ñ194.<br />
48
EINE J‹DISCH-DEUTSGHE HANDSCHRIFT DES BUCHDRUCKERS UND KONVERTITEN Ö<br />
den Angaben von Ort und Datum der Fertigstellung (Breslau, 25. Juli<br />
1537) in J¸disch-Deutsch und Latein. Der j¸disch-deutsche Wortlaut<br />
sei hier als eine Probe der von Helicz verwandten Sprachform und<br />
Orthographie wiedergegeben:<br />
:èðàðéâ êéà ïéá õéìòä ñéðäé:èðä øéðÖî èÏôéøù àéã èñéà ñàã<br />
:âè ñáå÷àé è÷ðàñ ïéâéìÖä íòã ïà èòãðòìåÏô :àìñòøá èàèù øòã ïéà ïòáéøùéâ àéä<br />
:øàé âéñÖøã ´ðåà ïòáéæ ´ðåà èøãðåä óðéÏô èðòæéåè:ñåèñéøä÷ èøåáéâ øòã êàð èìéö ïî àæ<br />
:ïòÏôåàÔ ÷éöðòÔö ´ðåà àÖÔö èøåá øòãéÔ øéðÖî êàð ´ðåà<br />
:èåä èòðéÏôåàéâ õøòä ´ðåà ïéâéåà ïÖî øéî øòã èåâ øòã ´ðåà<br />
:ïòìòãðÔ åö êàð èøàÔ ïéëéìèåâ íéðÖæ<br />
:óìéä ´ðåà ãàðéâ ïòäÖìøÏô øòèÖÔ ìéÔ èåâ áåà øéî ìåæ øòã<br />
:èñéøä÷ åæòé øòèñåøè ïòøòæðåà ïà ïòáéåìéâ ïòèñòÏô ïÖà ´ðåà<br />
14 :ïîà éäé ïë:ïàî ïéâéáéåìéâ èñéø÷ íòçéìèéà íéðÖà ´ðåà øéî<br />
Es folgt in zierlicher und ge¸bter lateinischer Handschrift ein lateinisches<br />
Kolophon: ÑHic liber scriptus a Iohanne Helicz anno recuperatae<br />
salutis 1537 die divi Iacobi, quo cum ei, tum aviae meae et<br />
sorori eius ac parenti meo, fratribus eius etc., stella et lux verbi Dei<br />
in tenebris (scilicet in Iudaismo) apparuit, qua duce ad Dominum<br />
Christum, regem et salvatorem eius, mera gratia adducti perque baptismum<br />
regenerati, cui cum Patre et Spiritu Sancto gloria in saecula<br />
saeculorum, Amen. 2. Pet. 1d. Johann. 6. Hese. 11.36.ì Gewifl war<br />
der Schreiber dieser Zeilen (trotz gewisser Schwierigkeiten beim Gebrauch<br />
der lateinischen Pronomina) bereits l‰ngst vor seiner? bei der<br />
Niederschrift nur wenige Monate zur¸ckliegenden? Taufe mit der<br />
lateinischen Sprache vertraut, was auch f¸r die Bildungsgeschichte<br />
der Krakauer Juden dieser Zeit von Interesse ist. Leider erfahren wir<br />
nichts ¸ber die n‰heren Umst‰nde, unter denen dem Konvertiten, wie<br />
er sich ausdr¸ckte, Ñder Stern und das Licht des Wortes Gottes in der<br />
Dunkelheit erschienenì und die ihn veranlaflten, mit seinen Verwand-<br />
14 ÑDas ist die schrift meiner hand, Johannes Helicz bin ich genannt. Hie geschrieben<br />
in der stadt Breslau, vollendet an dem heiligen Sankt Jakobs tag, so man z‰hlt<br />
nach der geburt Christus tausendf¸nfhundert und siebenunddreiflig jahr, und nach<br />
meiner wiederburt zweiundzwanzig wochen. Und der Gott, der mir mein augen und<br />
herz geˆffnet hat, seinem gˆttlichen wort nachzuwandelen, der soll mir (ob Gott<br />
will) weiter verleihen genad und hilf und ein festen gelauben an unseren trˆster Jesu<br />
Christ, mir und einem jedlichem christgel‰ubigen mann. Ken j e hi [= so gesche es],<br />
Amen.ì<br />
49
MARTIN ROTHKEGEL<br />
ten die Taufe zu empfangen, in deren Folge die ganze Familie ihre<br />
wirtschaftliche Existenzgrundlage verlieren sollte. Johannes Helicz<br />
besafl die Handschrift mindestens bis zum Jahr 1543. Damals trug er<br />
auf Bl. 1 a folgenden Besitzvermerk mit einem Zitat aus 1. Kor. 1,23<br />
in deutscher Kursivschrift ein: ÑInn dem namen der ungeteylten heyligen<br />
Dreyfeldigkeyth, Amen. 1.5.4.3. Der liebe Paulus schreybth in<br />
seiner epistel: Cristus predigenn ist denn heyden eyn schpˆtth, den<br />
Judenn eyn lachenn, unnd uns eynn ebige seligkeyth. Ü Amen Ü Hanns<br />
Helicz. H Ü H.ì<br />
Von sp‰teren Besitzern des 16. und fr¸hen 17. Jhs. stammen einige<br />
Notizen und Federproben in polnischer und j¸disch-deutscher<br />
Sprache auf den urspr¸nglich leeren Seiten 195 b ñ196 b und auf der<br />
Innenseite des hinteren Buchdeckels. Von Interesse ist die Eintragung<br />
auf Bl. 194 b : ÑEx libris Ladislai de Rewa, anno 1643.ì Die ungewˆhnliche<br />
Handschrift ist demnach durch den magyarischen Baron<br />
RÈvay L·szlÛ (*1600, Ü 1667), 15 der, protestantisch erzogen, 1627<br />
zum Katholizismus ¸bertrat, in das Gebiet der heutigen Slowakei und<br />
sp‰ter in die Skalitzer Franziskanerbiblio<strong>the</strong>k gelangt.<br />
15 Vgl. Art. ÑRÈvai, Ladislavì, in: Slovensk˝ biografick˝ slovnÌk, Bd. 5, Martin<br />
1992, S. 75f.<br />
50
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH<br />
BRETHREN IN THE YEARS PRIOR TO THE<br />
THIRTY YEARS WAR<br />
OR ON THE USEFULNESS OF PERSECUTION<br />
Jind¯ich Halama, Praha<br />
1. In <strong>the</strong> World but not of <strong>the</strong> World. The Alternative Nature of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Union.<br />
The Union of Brethren (Unitas fratrum) came into being at a time<br />
when <strong>the</strong> echoes of <strong>the</strong> turbulent period of <strong>the</strong> Hussite wars were<br />
slowly fading and in a situation in which social structures in <strong>the</strong> land<br />
had been considerably damaged. The views of <strong>the</strong> first generation of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Brethren were clearly influenced <strong>by</strong> this fact. The way Brethren<br />
saw <strong>the</strong> social existence of human beings was something <strong>the</strong>y inherited<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Taborite wing of <strong>the</strong> Hussites. The Brethren drew upon<br />
Hussite <strong>the</strong>ology from <strong>the</strong> very beginning, at first in a sharply polemic<br />
way, refusing violence in any form, rejecting <strong>the</strong> world and<br />
holding moralist positions to a large extent. Their <strong>the</strong>ology was shaped<br />
under <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> last echo of <strong>the</strong> imminent eschatological<br />
expectations of <strong>the</strong> Hussite revolution. The expectation of<br />
<strong>the</strong> end of times leads to questioning and even refusing <strong>the</strong> prevailing<br />
social values and structures. The result was a negative attitude towards<br />
<strong>the</strong> world. Mainly due to <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> thought of Peter<br />
ChelËick˝ <strong>the</strong> world was regarded as a profoundly sinful place, ruled<br />
<strong>by</strong> evil and falling into perdition. There was no sense in trying to find<br />
orientation and to distinguish some better or worse possibilities in<br />
this sinful world. 1 To be Christian is to be separate from <strong>the</strong> world<br />
and follow not human rules but <strong>the</strong> law of God.<br />
1 A strong eschatological emphasis regularly appears in church history in connection<br />
with social and political crises. The unbridgeable gap between <strong>the</strong> biblical<br />
ìcommunity of <strong>the</strong> saintsî and <strong>the</strong> particular human community becomes very<br />
51
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
The Brethren found this law of God in <strong>the</strong> biblical witness and <strong>the</strong><br />
way <strong>the</strong>y interpreted it led <strong>the</strong>m to a firm conviction that <strong>the</strong> social<br />
aspect forms an inevitable part of <strong>the</strong> Christian message. The Gospel,<br />
being an inner power transforming human life, is not and cannot be<br />
a private matter. Christians are not situated in <strong>the</strong> world as isolated<br />
individuals but as a community of new relationships determined <strong>by</strong><br />
love and selfless service. The world, governed <strong>by</strong> evil, cannot accept<br />
such a community. That is why <strong>the</strong> Brethren strove to form a society<br />
of <strong>the</strong>ir own, an alternative society governed exclusively <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> word<br />
of God without making concessions to or compromising with <strong>the</strong><br />
sinful earthly dominion.<br />
But it soon became apparent that this way, which was supposed to<br />
lead to Christian perfection, did not bring <strong>the</strong> desired fruit. The separatism<br />
of it led <strong>the</strong> Brethren communities into isolation, <strong>the</strong> dogmatism<br />
in interpreting <strong>the</strong> law made unrealisable demands on people<br />
and it was unable to solve <strong>the</strong> emerging discrepancies. That was why<br />
a different perspective, more critical towards ChelËick˝ and reclaiming<br />
more of <strong>the</strong> Taborite <strong>the</strong>ology, came to <strong>the</strong> fore in <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ology of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Brethren. It seems to have been present in a latent form perhaps<br />
from <strong>the</strong> very beginnings of <strong>the</strong> Union but we can hear of it only after<br />
<strong>the</strong> death of Bro<strong>the</strong>r Gregory (1478), especially in <strong>the</strong> work of Bro<strong>the</strong>r<br />
Thomas. 2 At <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> 15 th century, after a few yearsí struggle,<br />
this new view came to dominate. Bro<strong>the</strong>r Luke, in his writings, shaped<br />
this new orientation into a coherent teaching. In this view <strong>the</strong> world is<br />
no more a space plunged to perdition, a place to be avoided, but<br />
a place where Christian hope, known only to <strong>the</strong> elect but intended<br />
for all, should be verified and tested. Christians should not escape<br />
from <strong>the</strong> world to create an alternative society of <strong>the</strong>ir own and to<br />
wait for rescue. They are to witness to <strong>the</strong>ir hope <strong>by</strong> an active life in<br />
critical solidarity with o<strong>the</strong>r people.<br />
The church is still understood as an alternative community, alternative<br />
to <strong>the</strong> prevailing way of life and administration in <strong>the</strong> society.<br />
apparent in times of crisis. It is hardly an accident that <strong>the</strong> first edition of Barthís<br />
Letter to <strong>the</strong> Romans (1919) brings a damning critique of politics that is a dirty<br />
struggle for power. ÑEs lohnt sich nicht zu unterscheiden.ì (Barth, K. Gesamtausgabe.<br />
II. Akademische Werke. Der Rˆmerbrief 1919. Z¸rich 1985, p. 503).<br />
2 See e. g. Peschke, E. Kirche und Welt in der Theologie der Bˆhmischen Br¸der.<br />
Berlin 1981. p. 101ñ120.<br />
52
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
However, <strong>the</strong> mission of <strong>the</strong> church is not to be an island where<br />
people can find rescue from perdition but to be an example of <strong>the</strong><br />
possibility of organising human community and its relationships differently<br />
from <strong>the</strong> logic of power. Christians, who enter into daily<br />
relations, vocations and functions in society, are to be in <strong>the</strong>se places<br />
a constant reminder of this alternative possibility, shaped <strong>by</strong> mutual<br />
love, forgiveness and awareness that all people are completely equal<br />
before <strong>the</strong> authority of <strong>the</strong> word of God. In <strong>the</strong> light of <strong>the</strong> Gospel<br />
every authority or power is an entrusted responsibility enabling us to<br />
serve according to <strong>the</strong> pattern of Christ, to live not for ourselves but<br />
for o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
This new shape of <strong>the</strong> Brethren teaching was in a way more socially<br />
subversive than <strong>the</strong> original separatism. The opinion that <strong>the</strong><br />
worldly power need not necessarily be evil <strong>by</strong> its nature, that it can be<br />
used well, does not blunt <strong>the</strong> edge of <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís profound critique<br />
of worldly dominion. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, while <strong>the</strong> initial refusal of <strong>the</strong><br />
world led to indifference in regard to <strong>the</strong> differences in <strong>the</strong> ways<br />
social relations were shaped, now <strong>the</strong> whole society and its structures<br />
are measured <strong>by</strong> criteria which qualify ìexceeding righteousnessî<br />
according to <strong>the</strong> Gospel. The Brethren observe carefully not only<br />
how far <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> Union, both common and<br />
noble, corresponds with <strong>the</strong>se criteria but <strong>the</strong>y also evaluate in this<br />
light <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> whole society. The first generation demanded <strong>the</strong><br />
transformation of <strong>the</strong> organisation of society according to <strong>the</strong> Gospel<br />
but at <strong>the</strong> same time <strong>the</strong>y considered it as unrealisable in this world.<br />
Now <strong>the</strong> Brethren tried to apply <strong>the</strong>se claims in <strong>the</strong>ir relationship<br />
with society and tried to work for its enforcement <strong>by</strong> persuasion and<br />
personal example. In this way <strong>the</strong> existing orders are put under question<br />
more effectively than through <strong>the</strong> original rejection. As <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />
entered public life and <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong>ir teaching began to<br />
grow it became more and more apparent that <strong>the</strong>y formed a foreign<br />
body in society, a community that could threaten some of <strong>the</strong> established<br />
and accepted orders and practices. This was without doubt one<br />
of <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong> opposition against <strong>the</strong> Brethren streng<strong>the</strong>ned<br />
to <strong>the</strong> point when, on St. Jamesís Day 1508, a royal Mandate was<br />
issued against <strong>the</strong>m, where<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>y were outlawed.<br />
The Union lived in <strong>the</strong> Czech kingdom under <strong>the</strong> threat of this<br />
53
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
mandate for a whole century. During <strong>the</strong> time <strong>the</strong> mandate was not<br />
lifted: on <strong>the</strong> contrary, it was several times reinforced. The reason is<br />
not to be found in <strong>the</strong> simple fact that <strong>the</strong> Brethren were <strong>the</strong> heirs of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Hussites. So were <strong>the</strong> Czech Utraquists who, never<strong>the</strong>less, became<br />
a Reformation church during <strong>the</strong> 16 th century and used <strong>the</strong><br />
fragile but recognised protection of <strong>the</strong> Reformation confession defended<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> nobility. The reason why <strong>the</strong> Union<br />
was outlawed and was unable to escape this position, in spite of repeated<br />
efforts made especially <strong>by</strong> its noble members and adherents,<br />
is to be found in <strong>the</strong> very teaching of <strong>the</strong> Union, predominantly in its<br />
social dimension.<br />
2. Characteristic Features of <strong>the</strong> Social Teachings of <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />
Throughout <strong>the</strong> time of its existence <strong>the</strong> Union of Brethren insisted<br />
on certain principles that inevitably caused problems in relation to<br />
society. Consequent separation of secular and spiritual power was<br />
one those principles, order and discipline in <strong>the</strong> church was <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> time of Bro<strong>the</strong>r Luke <strong>the</strong>y came to <strong>the</strong> conviction that <strong>the</strong><br />
church is not a tool for rescuing people from <strong>the</strong> world but a community<br />
sent to <strong>the</strong> world as a witness and example. This community<br />
must share in <strong>the</strong> effort to shape <strong>the</strong> worldís structures and relationships<br />
in a more just way. At <strong>the</strong> same time <strong>the</strong>y declared clearly and<br />
firmly that <strong>the</strong> church is not and must not be a part of <strong>the</strong> structures of<br />
<strong>the</strong> world. It must be nei<strong>the</strong>r subject to any power manipulation nor<br />
dependent on human authorities, however favourably inclined to <strong>the</strong><br />
church <strong>the</strong>y may be.<br />
The second characteristic feature, emphasis on order and discipline<br />
as an indispensable mark of a Christian community, is understood<br />
as <strong>the</strong> result of <strong>the</strong> authority of Godís word in human life and<br />
any responsible ministry of <strong>the</strong> church is unthinkable without it. The<br />
Brethren expressed <strong>the</strong>ir concern for order in <strong>the</strong> church during <strong>the</strong><br />
negotiations with <strong>the</strong> Czech <strong>Protestant</strong>s concerning <strong>the</strong> Czech Confession<br />
3 as well as in <strong>the</strong> negotiations following <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty<br />
3 Hrejsa, F. »esk· konfesse. JejÌ vznik, podstata a dÏjiny. Praha 1912. p. 156n.<br />
54
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
of Rudolf II. And even as late as 1619 we can read in a writing of<br />
some Brethren priests: ìregard is to be paid to order and discipline<br />
which is <strong>the</strong> foremost treasure of <strong>the</strong> Unionî. 4 The writing shows at<br />
<strong>the</strong> same time what <strong>the</strong> main features of <strong>the</strong> order and discipline look<br />
like:<br />
ñ that <strong>the</strong> priests would have <strong>the</strong> power and duty of chastening and<br />
excommunicating those who sin;<br />
ñ that <strong>the</strong>y would not administer [<strong>the</strong> Eucharist] commonly to anybody<br />
but only to those whose conscience <strong>the</strong>y know;<br />
ñ that <strong>the</strong> administration of <strong>the</strong> priests would belong to <strong>the</strong> Elders<br />
or Deans or Superintendents ra<strong>the</strong>r than to <strong>the</strong>ir Collators [owners of<br />
estates] so that those who violate <strong>the</strong> order could be punished <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
Elders;<br />
ñ that <strong>the</strong> Elders would have <strong>the</strong> authority to establish priests in<br />
parishes;<br />
ñ that some godly, honourable persons would be established as<br />
helpers to <strong>the</strong> priests to help <strong>the</strong> priests in supervising <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />
people. The nobility would help <strong>by</strong> turning <strong>the</strong>ir hands to this task. 5<br />
We can see that this document counts on <strong>the</strong> hand of <strong>the</strong> secular<br />
authorities but <strong>the</strong> principles mentioned say that such authority is<br />
bound to ensure that <strong>the</strong> church would have <strong>the</strong> freedom to administer<br />
its own affaurs. It means that <strong>the</strong> authority is to look after itself,<br />
not to intervene into church matters. The Brethren insist until <strong>the</strong> last<br />
moment both on <strong>the</strong> autonomy of <strong>the</strong> church administration (where<br />
<strong>the</strong> secular power has no right whatever to intervene and act) and on<br />
<strong>the</strong> authority of <strong>the</strong> church discipline (which does not care for any<br />
social differences but places all equally before <strong>the</strong> claim of Godís<br />
word, his judgement and grace). The Brethren kept <strong>the</strong>se central principles<br />
of <strong>the</strong>ir understanding of <strong>the</strong> Gospel even in <strong>the</strong> last years<br />
when some voices appeared in <strong>the</strong> Union pointing to <strong>the</strong> large <strong>Protestant</strong><br />
churches and <strong>the</strong>ir teaching. That is why A. Moln·r was able to<br />
state that ìthroughout <strong>the</strong> whole period of its historical existence<br />
from <strong>the</strong> mid-15 th century to <strong>the</strong> mid-17 th century <strong>the</strong> Union of Breth-<br />
4 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝ch v markrabstvÌ MoravskÈm staröÌm jejich p¯edloûen˝<br />
etc. In M¸ller, J. T. (ed.). Spisy J. A. KomenskÈho, ËÌslo 3. Praha 1898,<br />
pp. 41ñ51. Quotation from p. 50.<br />
5 Op. cit., p. 49.<br />
55
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
ren on <strong>the</strong> whole remained faithful to <strong>the</strong> narrow path of confessors,<br />
undeterred <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> violent persecution from <strong>the</strong> Catholic rulers or <strong>by</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> disgrace of <strong>the</strong> Utraquists and not allured <strong>by</strong> a desire for peace<br />
guaranteed <strong>by</strong> some diplomatic concessionsî. 6 The social teaching of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Brethren from <strong>the</strong> beginning to <strong>the</strong> end represents an alternative<br />
model different both from <strong>the</strong> majority norms of society and from <strong>the</strong><br />
attitudes of o<strong>the</strong>r Reformation churches. Though <strong>the</strong>y accepted <strong>the</strong><br />
responsibility for and participation in <strong>the</strong> social and political life <strong>the</strong><br />
Brethren attitudes show an apparent critical distance that repeatedly<br />
prevents <strong>the</strong> Brethren from consenting to some solutions or at least<br />
from approving <strong>the</strong>m without reservations.<br />
It is <strong>the</strong> norm of Godís word, <strong>the</strong> fundamental agent of <strong>the</strong> origin<br />
and <strong>the</strong> continuation of <strong>the</strong> Brethren community that keeps on challenging<br />
and questioning <strong>the</strong> efforts (humanly understandable) to find<br />
a less demanding way of existence, to use diplomatic tools and strategies<br />
to attain a safer and more comfortable position in society at <strong>the</strong><br />
cost of compromising and making concessions to some principles.<br />
We do not say that nothing of that kind happened in <strong>the</strong> Union. Some<br />
examples of such compromising can be found and <strong>the</strong>y were slowly<br />
growing in number in <strong>the</strong> course of time. Moln·r expressed this fact<br />
<strong>by</strong> an impressive image saying that <strong>the</strong> Union ìdid not avoid inner<br />
bleedingî in its relationship to <strong>the</strong> world. 7 Never<strong>the</strong>less, <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />
teaching insisted on <strong>the</strong> attitude that <strong>the</strong> truth of <strong>the</strong> Gospel, which is<br />
to be witnessed to <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> church, is and will ever be in tension with<br />
<strong>the</strong> desires for wealth, power and glory that are connected almost<br />
inseparably with worldly rule.<br />
Even in <strong>the</strong> Union itself a growing tension can be traced. It was<br />
a tension between <strong>the</strong> settled principles of Brethren social teaching<br />
and <strong>the</strong> practical problems of everyday life in Brethren congregations.<br />
The life of faith according to <strong>the</strong> Brethren rules was so demanding<br />
that certain tension between <strong>the</strong> demands and <strong>the</strong> reality<br />
continually existed. As soon as 1510, after <strong>the</strong> St. Jamesís Day Mandate<br />
(1508), <strong>the</strong> Brethren called for general introspection, pondering<br />
6 Moln·r, A. Eschatologick· nadÏje ËeskÈ reformace. In Od reformace k†zÌt¯ku.<br />
Praha 1956, p. 64.<br />
7 Moln·r, A. K ot·zce bratrskÈ odpovÏdnosti za svÏt. In CÌrkev ve svÏtÏ. Praha<br />
1977, p. 48.<br />
56
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
<strong>the</strong> mistakes and trespasses and rectification of <strong>the</strong> ways. 8 The inconsistency<br />
of <strong>the</strong> practice with <strong>the</strong> Brethren teachings becomes more<br />
frequent and apparent from about <strong>the</strong> 1550ís and it developed into<br />
a serious and perennial problem. When asking for <strong>the</strong> causes of this<br />
situation we come across a paradox, that <strong>the</strong> growing problems to<br />
keep <strong>the</strong> Brethren principles and traditions are connected with <strong>the</strong><br />
spread of <strong>the</strong> Reformation. As <strong>the</strong> Brethren got to know <strong>the</strong> Reformation<br />
movements, and made contacts with <strong>the</strong>m in Poland and as <strong>the</strong><br />
Reformation gained ground among <strong>the</strong> population of Bohemia and<br />
Moravia, <strong>the</strong> Brethren had to ask if <strong>the</strong>ir way was not too narrow, too<br />
moralistic and excessively exclusive. Compared to Lu<strong>the</strong>ranism and<br />
Calvinism it appeared to be so.<br />
Taking <strong>the</strong> Union of Brethren as a movement belonging to <strong>the</strong><br />
European Reformation, we must ask <strong>the</strong> question raised <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> contemporaries<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Brethren, <strong>the</strong> representatives of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation<br />
movements. Why did <strong>the</strong>y differ in a visible, deliberate and<br />
to a certain extent controversial way? Why did <strong>the</strong>y insist on emphases<br />
taken for unimportant or irrelevant for Christian life <strong>by</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
Reformation movements? If we use <strong>the</strong> classification of different Reformation<br />
movements given <strong>by</strong> A. Moln·r 11? it can help us to find<br />
a possible answer to <strong>the</strong> question.<br />
Moln·r marked <strong>the</strong> reform movements of <strong>the</strong> 14 th and 15 th centuries,<br />
especially <strong>the</strong> Valdensians and Hussites, as <strong>the</strong> First Reformation<br />
in opposition to <strong>the</strong> 16 th century European Reformation that he<br />
calls <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation. The First Reformation is characterised<br />
<strong>by</strong> its concentration on <strong>the</strong> story of Jesus, on <strong>the</strong> gospels and especially<br />
on <strong>the</strong> Sermon on <strong>the</strong> Mount as <strong>the</strong> source of rules for Christian<br />
life. It is connected with a strong emphasis on Godís law and with<br />
more imminent expectation of <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> times, i.e., a strong<br />
eschatological perspective. That is why <strong>the</strong> First Reformation is socially<br />
very sensitive, stressing <strong>the</strong> almost revolutionary nature of bib-<br />
8 ìFor we have too freely and comfortably settled in <strong>the</strong> world, made ourselves at<br />
home and peacefully fallen asleep. And many have intermingled into worldly matters<br />
or even defected to <strong>the</strong>mÖî wrote <strong>the</strong> Elders. List Brat¯Ì StaröÌch 1510. In<br />
ÿÌËan, R. Zpr·vy, nauËenÌ a napomenutÌ Jednoty bratrskÈ. Unpublished manuscript<br />
in <strong>the</strong> library of UK ETF. p. 114.<br />
57
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
lical justice, looking for its coming and striving to materialise it in its<br />
communities as far as possible.<br />
The focus of <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation is on <strong>the</strong> message of justification<br />
as expressed in <strong>the</strong> Pauline letters of <strong>the</strong> New Testament. Grace<br />
and liberty are stressed more than demands. The interpretation of <strong>the</strong><br />
Scriptures is more careful, possibly <strong>the</strong> whole range of <strong>the</strong> scriptural<br />
witness is taken into consideration and exaggerated emphases are to<br />
be avoided. It goes hand in hand with a less imminent eschatological<br />
accent and <strong>the</strong>refore also a less sensitive perception of <strong>the</strong> social<br />
consequences of <strong>the</strong> Gospel. The attention is directed more to <strong>the</strong><br />
spiritual life of <strong>the</strong> believer.<br />
The different accents of <strong>the</strong>se two types of Reformation conditioned<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir attitudes toward society and, consequently, <strong>the</strong> place <strong>the</strong>y<br />
took in <strong>the</strong> social structure. In Moln·rís words: ìThe First Reformation<br />
was popular in <strong>the</strong> broadest sense of <strong>the</strong> word. It ga<strong>the</strong>red adherents<br />
mostly from <strong>the</strong> lowest social levels. It was socially disturbing<br />
and sometimes revolutionary. The Second Reformation found an echo<br />
primarily in <strong>the</strong> young bourgeois groups at <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />
of capitalism and <strong>the</strong> subsequent decline of feudalism. Socially it was<br />
conservative.î 9<br />
The fact that <strong>the</strong> main stream of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation looked<br />
for political protection and support from <strong>the</strong> secular power and found<br />
it and connected itself with <strong>the</strong> social power structures is regarded <strong>by</strong><br />
Moln·r as a problematic feature and mistake of <strong>the</strong> Reformation<br />
movement. It happened due to <strong>the</strong> fact ìthat in political issues <strong>the</strong><br />
Reformers allowed <strong>the</strong>mselves to be misled <strong>by</strong> ideas not proceeding<br />
from <strong>the</strong>ir understanding of Godís wordî. 10 The result was that <strong>the</strong><br />
European Reformation returned to <strong>the</strong> medieval concept of <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />
society where church and society merge toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
If it was refusing this alternative that motivated <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís<br />
insistence on <strong>the</strong>ir own way and <strong>the</strong>ir difference from o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>Protestant</strong>s,<br />
it was more than justified. Undoubtedly, such a motive played<br />
an important part in <strong>the</strong> Union but it is not quite easy to say how far it<br />
was <strong>the</strong> decisive one.<br />
9 Ibid.<br />
10 Moln·r, A., Pohyb teologickÈho myölenÌ, p. 406.<br />
58
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
We have said that <strong>the</strong>re was a growing tension between <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory<br />
and practice in <strong>the</strong> Union. The source of this tension was predominantly<br />
in <strong>the</strong> growing desire to join <strong>the</strong> main stream of <strong>the</strong> European<br />
Christian churches, to get rid of <strong>the</strong> hundred years old accusation of<br />
ìPicardsî and of <strong>the</strong> label of a suspicious sect. The tension, which<br />
persisted and even grew until <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty had been issued,<br />
began in <strong>the</strong> ìdialogue between <strong>the</strong> two Reformationsî and it had no<br />
easy and satisfactory solution. It was impossible to become a part of<br />
an established church without abandoning some of <strong>the</strong> important<br />
Brethren principles. There must be a tension between <strong>the</strong> radically<br />
understood Gospel demand for a new life, worthy of <strong>the</strong> name Christian,<br />
which is a way both personally and socially demanding and<br />
uncomfortable, and <strong>the</strong> message of justification <strong>by</strong> faith and Christian<br />
freedom which, however, for <strong>the</strong> sake of its enforcement and<br />
expansion accepted <strong>the</strong> existing orders and confined its social critique<br />
to a level acceptable to those in power.<br />
Such a tension is easiest to overcome <strong>by</strong> silencing one of <strong>the</strong><br />
voices. Concerning <strong>the</strong> Union in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 16 th century<br />
<strong>the</strong>re was no question about <strong>the</strong> impossibility of returning to <strong>the</strong> initial<br />
radicalism of <strong>the</strong> first generation. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, some inclination<br />
toward abandoning old principles and adjusting to <strong>the</strong> European<br />
Reformation could be observed. However, such a step did not find<br />
acceptance among <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ologically educated priests and Elders. That<br />
is why <strong>the</strong> official documents of <strong>the</strong> Union and declarations of <strong>the</strong><br />
synods and conferences usually confirm <strong>the</strong> traditional accents of <strong>the</strong><br />
Brethren and at <strong>the</strong> same time lament <strong>the</strong> ìnaughtiness of <strong>the</strong> people<br />
in <strong>the</strong> congregationsî and ìtransgressing <strong>the</strong> ordersî <strong>by</strong> some priests.<br />
Living under <strong>the</strong> protection of <strong>the</strong> Czech Confession on <strong>the</strong> estates of<br />
favourably inclined nobility gave <strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>the</strong> opportunity to taste<br />
<strong>the</strong> pleasant part of existence as an officially recognised church and<br />
at <strong>the</strong> same time it evoked <strong>the</strong> impression that <strong>the</strong> Union could become<br />
a recognised church without abandoning any of its fundamental<br />
doctrinal positions.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> 17 th century <strong>the</strong> Union stood in <strong>the</strong> midst<br />
of <strong>the</strong>se tensions and struggles for <strong>the</strong> future form of its community<br />
and its teaching. The characteristics ìundeterred and not alluredî applied<br />
much more for <strong>the</strong> first part. The lure of <strong>the</strong> advantages that<br />
59
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
could be used <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Brethren if <strong>the</strong>y became a recognised part of<br />
society had a remarkable influence on <strong>the</strong> willingness of <strong>the</strong> Brethren<br />
to take part in political efforts for legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Czech <strong>Protestant</strong>s<br />
and <strong>the</strong> Union. The legalisation was accomplished through <strong>the</strong><br />
Letter of Majesty.<br />
3. The Legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Union as <strong>the</strong> Root of an Identity<br />
Crisis?<br />
One would have thought that <strong>the</strong> issuing of <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty as<br />
<strong>the</strong> successful end of <strong>the</strong> century of <strong>the</strong> Unityís struggle for recognition<br />
would have marked <strong>the</strong> beginning of a free development and<br />
building of <strong>the</strong> Brethren congregations, schools and o<strong>the</strong>r institutions.<br />
Contrary to this expectation a crisis appeared. The Union as<br />
a whole experienced stagnation, its congregations were decreasing in<br />
many places and some priests asked publicly if it was worth maintaining<br />
<strong>the</strong> Union as an independent church, if it were not more reasonable<br />
to merge with <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Utraquists. Instead of enthusiasm,<br />
great plans and new development <strong>the</strong> Union experienced a crisis<br />
of identity.<br />
We can witness an interesting phenomenon in <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong><br />
Union: many times <strong>the</strong> recognition reappears that persecution has<br />
a useful function. The Brethren express <strong>the</strong>ir conviction that persecution<br />
helps <strong>the</strong> church to return to its roots, to remove undesirable<br />
phenomena developed during a peaceful period. Such an expression<br />
in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> whole Union appeared first in 1510 when <strong>the</strong><br />
Elders spoke about a too comfortable settling in <strong>the</strong> world (see<br />
note 6). A similar statement can be found under more dramatic circumstances<br />
during <strong>the</strong> persecution after <strong>the</strong> Schmalkaldian War. The<br />
Brethren say in N·prava: ìAnd for <strong>the</strong> sake of rectification, God has<br />
visited us with <strong>the</strong>se temptations to refine us, to prove us and to expel<br />
<strong>the</strong> world from us.î 11 As an example of many similar statements that<br />
can be found let us recall one more. Senior Bro<strong>the</strong>r Bartholomew<br />
NÏmËansk˝ evaluated <strong>the</strong> persecution following <strong>the</strong> re-enactment of<br />
11 NapomenutÌ uËinÏnÈ vöechnÏm vÏrn˝m etc.1584. p. 4.<br />
60
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mandate against <strong>the</strong> Brethren in 1602 in <strong>the</strong>se words: ìWe confess<br />
that this persecution was highly needed for us and for our congregations.<br />
We have already grown torpid and bony.î 12<br />
In o<strong>the</strong>r words, <strong>the</strong> Brethren repeatedly came to <strong>the</strong> conclusion<br />
that <strong>the</strong> Union needed persecution if it was to stay watchful in witness<br />
and ministry. Every longer period of a relatively peaceful and<br />
secure life of <strong>the</strong> congregations brought a decline in discipline and<br />
a growing willingness to adjust to <strong>the</strong> larger society. The protection<br />
<strong>the</strong> Czech Confession could provide for <strong>the</strong> Union was weak and<br />
questionable but still <strong>the</strong> discipline and order in those communities<br />
that were allowed to enjoy it declined. The legalisation of <strong>the</strong> Union<br />
through <strong>the</strong> Letter of Majesty brought <strong>the</strong> persecutions to an end and<br />
gave <strong>the</strong> Union equal status with <strong>the</strong> recognised churches but it<br />
brought destructive consequences for <strong>the</strong> inner life of <strong>the</strong> Union.<br />
The above mentioned letter of Brethren priests from Moravia expresses<br />
<strong>the</strong> feeling that a serious inner crisis afflicted <strong>the</strong> Union which<br />
would be unable to survive as an independent body: ìThe last and<br />
main cause is <strong>the</strong> fact that, if we do not merge, our Union truly will<br />
not stand for long but will be stifled and perish.î 13 Comenius later<br />
expresses (1632) <strong>the</strong> same opinion: ìSo we ourselves were becoming<br />
infertile Ö and o<strong>the</strong>rs had no reason to come to us having seen nothing<br />
more among us than anywhere else. So that due to this alone,<br />
even if <strong>the</strong>re were no temptations and enemies striving to spoil <strong>the</strong><br />
Union, it would have to disappear silently and be extinguished like<br />
a burnt candle.î 14<br />
The situation of <strong>the</strong> Union in <strong>the</strong> last years before <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years<br />
War gave rise to <strong>the</strong> conviction that <strong>the</strong> best solution would be to<br />
merge with <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> church. Young Brethren priests name three<br />
reasons for such a step. The position of <strong>the</strong> priests would be improved.<br />
They would reach at last a socially recognised status and be<br />
rid of mockery. The state of <strong>the</strong> church property would improve;<br />
excessive poverty would be removed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> possibility to ga<strong>the</strong>r<br />
church taxes and ti<strong>the</strong>s. Finally, whole parishes would be taken over<br />
12 Quoted <strong>by</strong> Rejchrtov·, N. V·clav Budovec z Budova.Praha 1984. p. 34.<br />
13 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝chÖ In Spisy J. A. KomenskÈho, ËÌslo 3, p. 47.<br />
14 Ot·zky nÏkterÈ o JednotÏ Brat¯Ì Ëesk˝ch. In Veöker˝ch spis˘ J. A. KomenskÈho<br />
sv. 17. Brno 1912, p. 276.<br />
61
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Union, which would become a church for all parishioners, not<br />
just a minority of those who actively join it. The time for such an<br />
action is favourable for ì<strong>the</strong> common people drive <strong>the</strong> idolaters and<br />
malefactors away and ask for <strong>the</strong> Gospelî. 15 The idea that <strong>the</strong> Union<br />
would be able to bring its special contribution, namely discipline and<br />
order, to <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> church <strong>by</strong> way of merger was as unreal as <strong>the</strong><br />
impression that <strong>the</strong> common people desired for a truly Christian life.<br />
The common people always desired to improve <strong>the</strong>ir situation no<br />
matter in whose name it would happen. It is true that in those times<br />
Reformation often brought such an improvement. But concerning<br />
discipline and order in <strong>the</strong> Union, <strong>the</strong>se regularly did worse, <strong>the</strong> better<br />
<strong>the</strong> situation was in terms of property and institution.<br />
Hrejsa concluded from <strong>the</strong> letter that it was ìapparent what <strong>the</strong><br />
church development aimed at: a full unionî. 16 This is and will remain<br />
nothing more than a hypo<strong>the</strong>sis. Apparent in <strong>the</strong> letter is <strong>the</strong> desire to<br />
become a part of a recognised, socially established and safely accommodated<br />
church.<br />
We can find a similar view expressed <strong>by</strong> Comenius. In his writing<br />
ìSome questions about <strong>the</strong> UnionÖî he analyses <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong><br />
Union did not grow sufficiently. Comenius identifies three causes<br />
with a common denominator: <strong>the</strong> Brethren were not willing or not<br />
able to accept <strong>the</strong> position of a recognised part of <strong>the</strong> Christian society.<br />
The first cause is <strong>the</strong> lack of ìliterary arts and schools Ö what<br />
was <strong>the</strong> root of <strong>the</strong> weakness that even in those settlements where<br />
<strong>the</strong>y had patrons <strong>the</strong>y did not enter into all churches, leaving this task<br />
to o<strong>the</strong>r priests. They confined <strong>the</strong>mselves to those listeners who<br />
turned to <strong>the</strong>m voluntarily.î The second hindrance in spreading <strong>the</strong><br />
Union was in a paradoxical way <strong>the</strong> Reformation, and its preaching<br />
of <strong>the</strong> sober teaching to <strong>the</strong> whole church. Due to this fact <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong>s<br />
ìentered whole communities and churches and found acceptance;<br />
but we, sticking to our particularity, not only stayed in <strong>the</strong><br />
corner but <strong>the</strong> larger herd perpetually grew through those who came<br />
from <strong>the</strong> smaller herd.î The third problem was <strong>the</strong> poverty of <strong>the</strong><br />
Brethren that prevented <strong>the</strong>m from gaining better workers. But it was<br />
15 Spis mlad˝ch knÏûÌ bratrsk˝chÖ, p. 45.<br />
16 Hrejsa, F. »esk· konfesse. p. 533.<br />
62
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
caused <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> very fact ìour fa<strong>the</strong>rs did not enter upon <strong>the</strong> privileged<br />
churches and schools invested with incomesî and <strong>the</strong>y had no means<br />
of collecting <strong>the</strong> necessary finances. 17<br />
Comenius rightly observed <strong>the</strong> sociological aspect of <strong>the</strong> church<br />
life, that need to invest in education, workers and public presentation<br />
which has an important influence on <strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> life of<br />
any community. But he did not consider <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological reasons that<br />
led <strong>the</strong> Brethren to form <strong>the</strong>ir congregations in a way different from<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r reformation churches. To put it plainlz, he did not consider why<br />
<strong>the</strong> Brethren could not take over parishes and taxes if <strong>the</strong>y wanted to<br />
stay who <strong>the</strong>y were. The Union as such could not become a part of<br />
<strong>the</strong> social system. The view of Comenius is to a large extent shaped<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> perspective of a Christian society of which <strong>the</strong> church is an<br />
unquestioned part. He notes <strong>the</strong> ways ì<strong>by</strong> which o<strong>the</strong>r church unions<br />
are edifiedî and comes to <strong>the</strong> conclusion that it is ìmostly through<br />
<strong>the</strong>se two things: schools and <strong>the</strong> protection of <strong>the</strong> authorities. So it is<br />
with <strong>the</strong> Lu<strong>the</strong>rans, Calvinists, Armenians, Arians, even with <strong>the</strong> Jesuits.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> whole, all use this way but <strong>the</strong> Anabaptists who edify<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir inner order. No o<strong>the</strong>r union in <strong>the</strong> world has its<br />
order as complete as <strong>the</strong> Anabaptistsî. 18<br />
Obviously, it did not occur to Comenius that <strong>the</strong> Union could be<br />
on <strong>the</strong> side of <strong>the</strong> Anabaptists in this respect, as a community that was<br />
not maintained <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> favour of <strong>the</strong> authorities or <strong>by</strong> cultural efforts<br />
but <strong>by</strong> its inner order proceeding from personal faith. He identifies,<br />
however, confessional certainty, moral sincerity, church order and<br />
discipline as primary tasks in <strong>the</strong> church renewal. Those characteristics<br />
apply for alternative communities. Forming churches with <strong>the</strong><br />
help of public authorities and schools is a strategy that shaped <strong>the</strong><br />
churches that have been called national or popular in later times. The<br />
church that <strong>the</strong> first Brethren considered necessary to leave in ìneed<br />
of salvationî was shaped in <strong>the</strong> very same way. The Union came into<br />
being as an alternative community clearly distinguished from <strong>the</strong><br />
majority of <strong>the</strong> society and it kept its character even after departing<br />
from <strong>the</strong> initial separatism. One of its particular features was pre-<br />
17 All quotations Ot·zky nÏkterÈ o JednotÏ brat¯Ì Ëesk˝ch, p. 274f.<br />
18 Op. cit., p. 276.<br />
63
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
cisely <strong>the</strong> fact that it ga<strong>the</strong>red exclusively those who consciously<br />
asked for membership. The communities of <strong>the</strong> Union were deliberately<br />
and logically minority communities.<br />
One of those who observed this was <strong>the</strong> Lu<strong>the</strong>ran <strong>the</strong>ologian Flacius<br />
Illyricus as early as 1556. In a letter to Anton Bodenstein he<br />
enumerates <strong>the</strong> reasons why <strong>the</strong> Brethren cannot be considered a real<br />
church. In addition to doctrinal reasons he notes that ì<strong>the</strong> order of<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir religion and <strong>the</strong> form of <strong>the</strong>ir worship is not suited for <strong>the</strong> inclusion<br />
of whole communities and nations, which is necessary if we do<br />
not want to nourish pernicious rupturesî. 19 Regarding <strong>the</strong> nature of<br />
<strong>the</strong> 16 th century society Flacius was right. The social climate was not<br />
ready to accept <strong>the</strong> existence of free minority churches. The political<br />
administration was too narrowly connected with religion. The Union<br />
came into being as a free minority church and kept this character<br />
throughout <strong>the</strong> whole period of its existence. That was <strong>the</strong> reason for<br />
trying to suppress it. Herrnhut historian J. Th. M¸ller shares <strong>the</strong> same<br />
view, saying that <strong>the</strong> Union could not exist as an established, socially<br />
recognised church while keeping its original form. Its distinguishing<br />
emphasis on <strong>the</strong> community of believers as <strong>the</strong> shape of <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />
church could live only in a free community, independent from <strong>the</strong><br />
secular authorities and <strong>the</strong>ir protection. 20<br />
The crisis in <strong>the</strong> Union seems to have been catalysed, if not initiated,<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> official status <strong>the</strong> church acquired through <strong>the</strong> Letter of<br />
Majesty. The possibility of existing as an official church and <strong>the</strong> opportunities<br />
connected with such an existence had a disintegrating influence<br />
on <strong>the</strong> Union. The younger generation of priests probably<br />
failed to realise <strong>the</strong> deep discrepancy between <strong>the</strong> Brethren concept<br />
of order and discipline and <strong>the</strong> popular, majority model of <strong>the</strong> church<br />
as accepted both in Lu<strong>the</strong>ranism and Calvinism. Should church discipline<br />
be introduced into a majority church that exercises its supervision<br />
over whole communities in a given place, sooner or later some<br />
use of violence would be necessary. It would be necessary to exact<br />
19 ìÖeorum ratio religionis formaque Ecclesiarum ceremoniarum non satis erit<br />
apta ad complectendas magnas civitates ac integras gentes, quod tamen fieri necesse<br />
est, nisi velimus perniciosa schismata alereî. Illyrici scriptum de receptione fratrum<br />
an M. Antonium Bodenstein. In GINDELY, A. (ed.). Quellen zur Geschichte der<br />
Bˆhmischen Br¸der. Wien 1859, p. 281.<br />
20 M¸ller, J. Th. Geschichte der bˆhmischen Br¸der III, Herrnhut 1931, p. 230.<br />
64
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
obedience from those who would not accept <strong>the</strong> order voluntarily and<br />
make <strong>the</strong>m fulfil <strong>the</strong>ir duties <strong>by</strong> using power against <strong>the</strong>m. That would<br />
mean abandoning <strong>the</strong> century-old principle of separation between <strong>the</strong><br />
secular and spiritual power and giving up respect for each personís<br />
freedom of conscience and tolerance for o<strong>the</strong>r opinions.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> last years before <strong>the</strong> war <strong>the</strong> indications of possible fundamental<br />
change in <strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> Union seem to be <strong>the</strong> strongest<br />
in <strong>the</strong> entire course of <strong>the</strong> Unityís existence. The signs of growing<br />
willingness to accept <strong>the</strong> model of a majority Reformation church<br />
were apparent. I dare say that it would have meant a definite departure<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Unityís original roots. But <strong>the</strong> chain of political events<br />
that had already been in motion at that time finished <strong>the</strong> ìcrisis of<br />
legalityî of <strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>by</strong> destroying <strong>the</strong> Union and has left <strong>the</strong><br />
puzzle of its possible fur<strong>the</strong>r development permanently open. We can<br />
state that <strong>the</strong> Brethren did not abandon <strong>the</strong> path of socially critical<br />
witness, inherited from <strong>the</strong> Hussite tradition, but we must add that<br />
<strong>the</strong>y were not given an opportunity to do so. Soon <strong>the</strong>y were outlawed<br />
and <strong>the</strong>y were repeatedly confirmed in <strong>the</strong>ir attitude <strong>by</strong> persecutions<br />
from <strong>the</strong> majority society. When finally an opportunity for<br />
social integration opened up and <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís willingness to give<br />
up <strong>the</strong>ir particularity and join <strong>the</strong> broad stream of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation<br />
was markedly increasing, <strong>the</strong> White Mountain disaster put<br />
an end to <strong>the</strong> whole issue.<br />
4. Conclusion<br />
The social teaching of <strong>the</strong> Union originated in <strong>the</strong> understanding of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Gospel as a spiritual power addressing people and changing <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
thinking and acting. Justification and justice, <strong>the</strong> individual and <strong>the</strong><br />
social aspect of such a change are inseparably connected in this teaching.<br />
Christian faith is an attitude toward life that is visibly demonstrated<br />
<strong>by</strong> certain consequences in human relationships. The particular<br />
mode of <strong>the</strong>se consequences is characterised <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> claim for<br />
ìexceeding righteousnessî according to Mat<strong>the</strong>wís Sermon on <strong>the</strong><br />
Mount. It remained <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís basic yardstick for measuring<br />
ìwhat should <strong>the</strong> life of <strong>the</strong> sons of God be like and what deeds are<br />
65
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
commanded <strong>by</strong> Himî. 21 The social responsibility of Christians, shaped<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>se rules, evidently carries on <strong>the</strong> radical concept of <strong>the</strong><br />
First Reformation. It strives to keep a critical distance from <strong>the</strong> social<br />
structures of power, to question social differences and to stress <strong>the</strong><br />
supremacy of Godís commands as <strong>the</strong> norm that sees all people as<br />
fundamentally equal. The requirement of <strong>the</strong> freedom of conscience<br />
and <strong>the</strong> tolerance of diverse opinions are rooted in this conviction.<br />
The Reformation emphasis on Christian liberty as a spiritual value,<br />
granted immediately and unconditionally to each believer through<br />
<strong>the</strong> grace of God, liberated people from <strong>the</strong> custody of church institutions<br />
and introduced <strong>the</strong>m into <strong>the</strong> church as a community of equally<br />
liberated individuals. The <strong>the</strong>ology of <strong>the</strong> Brethren connected this<br />
emphasis with <strong>the</strong> renewed community of everyday life. In <strong>the</strong>ir view<br />
Christian liberty must manifest itself as liberty to serve in <strong>the</strong> household,<br />
in <strong>the</strong> workshop, in <strong>the</strong> community, in <strong>the</strong> craft, in <strong>the</strong> office<br />
and in using all things necessary to everyday life. All this is involved<br />
in <strong>the</strong> claim of Godís justice that should assert itself in all <strong>the</strong>se<br />
worldly matters, frequently in a way that breaks <strong>the</strong> limits of <strong>the</strong><br />
established social orders in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> love of neighbour.<br />
The uniqueness of <strong>the</strong> Brethrenís social teaching was in its effort<br />
to keep and develop some accents, o<strong>the</strong>rwise limited to a handful of<br />
radicals standing outside of public life, and introduce it into <strong>the</strong> larger<br />
society. The Brethren sought to keep <strong>the</strong> prophetic critique of <strong>the</strong><br />
secular social structures while remaining open to society, to announce<br />
<strong>the</strong> claim of <strong>the</strong> approaching Kingdom of God that questions all o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
claims and makes <strong>the</strong>ir character provisional and partial. The Reformation<br />
discernment of <strong>the</strong> limitations of human possibilities, <strong>the</strong>ologically<br />
speaking <strong>the</strong> discernment of our sinfulness, protected <strong>the</strong><br />
Brethren from falling into sectarian fanaticism while <strong>the</strong> eschatological<br />
perspective of hope helped <strong>the</strong>m to keep a critical distance from<br />
worldly structures. The task of formulating <strong>the</strong> social claim of <strong>the</strong><br />
Gospel in terms that would have to be taken into account <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
social structures was not easy but <strong>the</strong> Brethren succeeded in it for<br />
a long time. Moln·r speaks at this point about dialogue between <strong>the</strong><br />
Reformations:<br />
21 BratrskÈ vyzn·nÌ 1607, VII.2. In »ty¯i vyzn·nÌ, Praha 1951, p. 141.<br />
66
THE CRISIS OF THE UNION OF CZECH BRETHRENÖ<br />
ìThe <strong>the</strong>ology of <strong>the</strong> Czech Brethren, having its roots in <strong>the</strong> First<br />
Reformation, refused to part from <strong>the</strong> Second Reformation. In Brethren<br />
<strong>the</strong>ology both Reformations talk to each o<strong>the</strong>r and toge<strong>the</strong>r consent<br />
to bow to <strong>the</strong> truth which is Christ. This defines <strong>the</strong> peculiarity of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Brethren <strong>the</strong>ology and its importance for church history. And in<br />
this task we can see <strong>the</strong> stimulating role of Brethren <strong>the</strong>ology for our<br />
time.î 22<br />
We observed that <strong>the</strong> Brethren lost much of <strong>the</strong>ir prophetic emphasis<br />
in <strong>the</strong> last years of <strong>the</strong>ir existence. The eschatological perspective<br />
was overshadowed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> interest for a place in <strong>the</strong> secular structures.<br />
The last generation before <strong>the</strong> White Mountain battle shows especially<br />
evident signs of <strong>the</strong> fading of <strong>the</strong> prophetically critical element<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Brethren tradition, caused <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> attractive possibility of becoming<br />
an unquestioned and recognised part of society. Certain inclinations<br />
to such an attitude could be found much earlier but <strong>the</strong>re was<br />
no occasion for <strong>the</strong>ir developing. Once more, Moln·r points to this in<br />
one of his studies, stating that in <strong>the</strong> Brethren reflection of <strong>the</strong> relationship<br />
to society and <strong>the</strong> world ìafter <strong>the</strong> time of Luke or maybe of<br />
Augusta a gap appeared in Brethren thought because <strong>the</strong> Union ceased<br />
to reflect systematically and under <strong>the</strong> eschatological perspective<br />
on even <strong>the</strong> possibility of shaping a broader society than <strong>the</strong> church.<br />
Only Comenius, under completely changed circumstances, took up<br />
again <strong>the</strong> positive legacy of Christian care for <strong>the</strong> task of reform in<br />
<strong>the</strong> world. It is hardly accidental that he did so in <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong><br />
hope in <strong>the</strong> coming Christ <strong>the</strong> King.î 23<br />
And it is hardly accidental, let us add, that Comenius was brought<br />
to <strong>the</strong> eschatological perspective in a situation of disaster, war and<br />
persecution, in <strong>the</strong> situation when <strong>the</strong> Brethren once again stood outside<br />
of all secular structures as outlaws and exiles. For <strong>the</strong> greater<br />
part of its existence, <strong>the</strong> Union was drawn away from any idea of<br />
becoming an established part of society. Its critical distance and prophetic<br />
role were at least partly formed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> hostile social environment.<br />
When this pressure ceased to exist, <strong>the</strong> attractiveness of a peaceful<br />
conformed life proved to be irresistible even for a community<br />
22 Moln·r, A. Pohyb teologickÈho myölenÌ, p. 297.<br />
23 Moln·r, A. Eschatologick· nadÏje ËeskÈ reformace. p. 82.<br />
67
JINDÿICH HALAMA<br />
such as <strong>the</strong> Union. Adversity benefits <strong>the</strong> confessing attitude of <strong>the</strong><br />
church. Discrimination or even mild persecution has a visibly positive<br />
influence for <strong>the</strong> witness of <strong>the</strong> church. It can be demonstrated in<br />
<strong>the</strong> development of <strong>the</strong> Unionís teaching. The radicalness of <strong>the</strong> social<br />
claim of <strong>the</strong> Gospel is clearer and more acceptable for us under<br />
radical conditions, in a situation when we have nothing to lose, so to<br />
say. A secure and safely living church looks naturally for easier ways<br />
and is unable to resist comprome.<br />
For more than a century <strong>the</strong> Union was <strong>the</strong> bearer of <strong>the</strong> message<br />
about <strong>the</strong> social claim of <strong>the</strong> Gospel for Czech society. The Brethren<br />
kept <strong>the</strong> heritage of <strong>the</strong> radical wing of <strong>the</strong> Hussites, <strong>the</strong> Taborites,<br />
until <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> 17 th century. In <strong>the</strong> central points of <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
social teaching, such as <strong>the</strong> necessity of separating religion from <strong>the</strong><br />
power structures or <strong>the</strong> freedom of conscience of each individual,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y paved a way that <strong>the</strong> larger society was able to follow only much<br />
later. Even today many communities painfully struggle to apply <strong>the</strong>se<br />
norms. The crucial idea of <strong>the</strong>ir social teaching, life as service to God<br />
in <strong>the</strong> neighbour, led <strong>the</strong> Brethren to practical consequences in different<br />
areas of social life. Through exercising <strong>the</strong>se consequences in<br />
various vocations and in different social settings <strong>the</strong> Brethren created<br />
a number of inspiring examples of <strong>the</strong> Christian social responsibility.<br />
When it seemed that <strong>the</strong> lure of social recognition of <strong>the</strong> Union could<br />
silence this heritage, <strong>the</strong> Thirty Years War put an end to everything.<br />
The development of <strong>the</strong> social teaching of <strong>the</strong> Brethren was<br />
abruptly and violently finished but its legacy may have become<br />
sharper and more urgent for that very reason. The teaching of <strong>the</strong><br />
Brethren forms a unique chapter in efforts to find a socially responsible<br />
model of Christian life, determined <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> prophetic claim of<br />
Godís word and sensitive to <strong>the</strong> needs of our neighbours in <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
everyday life. It is an exceptional phenomenon not only within <strong>the</strong><br />
Czech Christianity but also in <strong>the</strong> context of <strong>the</strong> European Reformation.<br />
68
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Stanislav Segert, Los Angeles<br />
5 Publication activity<br />
Since all manuscripts from Qumran caves became accessible in early<br />
1990s, various publications were devoted to <strong>the</strong>se important texts.<br />
Also <strong>the</strong>ir official edition, Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judean Desert, exhibited<br />
more activity.<br />
This instalment of this review series is devoted to this series of<br />
editions, presenting texts most carefully and providing <strong>the</strong>m with<br />
relevant comments. In previous instalments publications of various<br />
kind were reviewed, monographs, collections of articles, original approaches,<br />
and also surveys of research.<br />
The substantial publication, Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls,<br />
published in two volumes <strong>by</strong> Oxford University Press, is reviewed in<br />
this article (v. 7.12). The entry ìPublicationî <strong>by</strong> Corrado Martone<br />
(Encyclopedia, pp. 721ñ723) gives survey of this activity. Recent<br />
publications and announcements indicate <strong>the</strong> growing interest in <strong>the</strong><br />
Dead Sea Scrolls, both for scholarly research and for providing access<br />
to important discoveries to general public.<br />
3.1.01 Official edition<br />
The series Discoveries of <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert (abbreviation DJD) was<br />
connected since 1955 with Jordan Department of Antiquities and with<br />
institutions important for <strong>the</strong> work on manuscripts. Emanuel Tov, Professor<br />
at <strong>the</strong> Hebrew University in Jerusalem, was appointed in 1990<br />
editor-in-chief of Israel Antiquities Authority. He serves in this function<br />
also for DJD. Its purpose is to publish manuscripts and archaeological<br />
discoveries from <strong>the</strong> Judaean desert. Most volumes are devoted<br />
to discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, also represented in special<br />
volumes are sites south and north of it.<br />
69
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword to <strong>the</strong> first volume of DJD G. Lankester Harding<br />
wrote that <strong>the</strong> work is <strong>by</strong> necessity slow and that <strong>the</strong> series can be<br />
completed after few years. He was right concerning <strong>the</strong> slowness;<br />
<strong>the</strong> series is not yet completed after near<strong>by</strong> half a century since<br />
1955. First volumes were prepared <strong>by</strong> few editors. They were members<br />
of <strong>the</strong> official editorial team. Since 1990s <strong>the</strong> number of editors<br />
is much larger, thus <strong>the</strong> editorial work is much faster. Scholars<br />
from three continents now are participating. Some individual editions<br />
are based on preliminary transcriptions and comments of previous<br />
editors; some of <strong>the</strong>m died before <strong>the</strong>y could complete <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
editorial work.<br />
The slow sequence of sections, 7 volumes in 1966ñ1982, and <strong>the</strong><br />
fast progress <strong>the</strong> 1990s, is visible on <strong>the</strong> following survey.<br />
Chronological survey of DJD volumes:<br />
1955 ñ I; 1961 ñ II; 1962 ñ III; 1963 ñ IV; 1968 ñ V; 1977 ñ VI;<br />
1982 ñ VII; 1990 ñ VIII; 1992 ñ IX; 1994 ñ X, XII, XIII; 1995 ñ XIV,<br />
XIX; 1996 ñ XVIII; 1997 ñ XV, XX, XXII, XXIV, XXVII; 1998 ñ<br />
XI, XXIII, XXV, XXVI; 1999 ñ XXIX, XXXIV, XXXV; 2000 ñ XVI,<br />
XXXVI, XXXVIII; 2001ñ XXX, XXXI.<br />
Individual volumes contain finds from one site or from sites close to<br />
each o<strong>the</strong>r. These sites are listed in <strong>the</strong> last section of <strong>the</strong> following<br />
survey of DJD volumes. In <strong>the</strong> volume XXXVIII finds from 5 sites<br />
are published. Only few sites are in <strong>the</strong> north: Keter Jericho, in vol.<br />
XXXVIII, Wadi Daliyeh, vol. XXIV. The o<strong>the</strong>r sites are in <strong>the</strong> south<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Qumran area.<br />
Not all sites in <strong>the</strong> south are represented in DJD. Finds from<br />
Masada and from <strong>the</strong> Cave of Letters were published in Jerusalem,<br />
texts from Khirbet Mird in Louvain. Most prolific source of manuscripts<br />
and o<strong>the</strong>r finds are Qumran caves. Important finds were found<br />
in caves 1Q and 11Q, minor finds in ìsmall cavesî 2ñ3 and 5ñ10. By<br />
far <strong>the</strong> richest is Qumran cave 4.<br />
4Q manuscripts are published in some volumes according to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
numbers; as <strong>the</strong>y were assigned with respect to <strong>the</strong> genre of texts,<br />
<strong>the</strong>se volumes are arranged conveniently. Even more convenient is<br />
<strong>the</strong> arrangement of volumes according to categories of texts.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> following survey <strong>the</strong> criteria mentioned here are applied.<br />
70
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Survey of DJD volumes:<br />
CATEGORIES / DJD KIND YEAR REVIEW<br />
SITES NUMBERS IN CV<br />
Q 1ñ2,5ñ11<br />
1Q I 1995<br />
2ñ3Q, 5ñ10Q III 1962<br />
11Q V Psalms 1965<br />
11Q XXIII II 1998<br />
4Q<br />
Biblical<br />
VII XII Gen ñ Num 1994 7<br />
IX XIV Deu ñ Ki 1995 8<br />
(XII) (XVII) Samuel<br />
X XV Prophets 1997 9<br />
XI XVI Psa-Chr 2000 10<br />
IV IX PaleoñHeb 1992<br />
Parabiblical<br />
VIII XIII 1 1994 11*<br />
XIV XIX 2 1995 12<br />
XVII XXII 3 1997 13<br />
XXI XXX 4 2001 23<br />
Halakhic<br />
XXV XXXV 1999 14<br />
(XVI)<br />
(XXI)<br />
Calendrical<br />
3.1.1ñ24<br />
71
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
Sapiential<br />
XV XX 1 1997 15<br />
XXIV XXXIV 2 1999 16<br />
Poetic & Lit.<br />
VI XI 1 1998 17<br />
XX XXIX 2 1999 18<br />
Individual texts<br />
XIX XXVI S 1998 19<br />
XIII XVIII DamascusD.1996 4**<br />
V X MMT 1994 3*<br />
I V 158ñ186 1968<br />
II VI 128ñ157 1977<br />
III VII 428ñ520 1982<br />
XVIII XXV 521ñ528 + 576<br />
ñ 579 1998 20<br />
ñ Aramaic<br />
XXII XXXI 329ñ549 2001 24<br />
Miscellaneous<br />
XXVI XXXVI 2000 22<br />
Unidentified<br />
XXIII XXXIII<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r sites<br />
Wadi Murabbaat<br />
II 1961<br />
Nahal Hever ñ Seiyal<br />
72
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
VIII I Greek 1990<br />
XXVII II documentary 1997 3 *<br />
Wadi Daliyeh<br />
XXIV seals 1997 5 **<br />
(XXVIII) legal I<br />
(XXXII) legal II<br />
Jud. Desert XXXVIII miscellaneous 2000 21<br />
Numbers within round brackets: Volumes not yet published<br />
Volumes reviewed in CV ñ * ñ **<br />
* 36/1994: vol. IX. pp. 247ñ254, 3.1.1; X, 255ñ260; 3.1.2<br />
** 41/1999: vol. XVII, pp. 159ñ162, 3.1.4; XXIV, 162ñ165, 3.1.5:<br />
XXVII, 155ñ159, 3.1.3<br />
Prices of volumes are occasionally indicated in <strong>the</strong> following reviews.<br />
Prices of smaller volumes are about USD 70, of larger volumes<br />
about USD†90. The numbers in brackets of DJD volumes in<br />
this survey point to those being prepared for publication. Many,<br />
mostly shorter texts which were edited previously are reedited in<br />
DJD. 11Q10 TargumJob, published previously in 1971 in Leiden, is<br />
reedited in DJD XXIII (v. infra 3.1.6).<br />
In <strong>the</strong> DJD survey some important texts from Qumran caves are<br />
not included: Complete text of Isaiah (1950) and incomplete<br />
text†(1955) from 1Q, also peöer Habakkuk (1950), Hodayot 1QH<br />
(1955), Community Rule 1QS (1955), War Scroll 1QM (1955). These<br />
texts from 1Q were edited ñ years in brackets ñ and mostly reedited.<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r included is <strong>the</strong> Temple Scroll 11Q19 (1977/1983); <strong>the</strong> fragments<br />
of this text, 11Q20, are published in DJD XXIII (v. infra 3.1.6),<br />
In <strong>the</strong> 4Q volumes only 4Q texts are presented. The relations between<br />
<strong>the</strong>m and manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> same work from o<strong>the</strong>r sources are listed<br />
in tables.<br />
The arrangement of DJD volumes is consistent, with respect to <strong>the</strong><br />
character of texts. The large size ñ 25 ◊ 31 cm ñ is convenient for<br />
presenting texts and additional materials in well legible forms. The<br />
volumes are provided with forewords in which <strong>the</strong> development of<br />
73
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
work on <strong>the</strong> edition is explained and <strong>the</strong> editors and <strong>the</strong>ir co-operators<br />
presented. Appropriate attention is devoted to <strong>the</strong> preliminary work<br />
on preparing manuscripts for edition. The contributions of participants<br />
and of institutions are acknowledged.<br />
In some volumes prefaces or introductions inform about character<br />
of texts and about arrangements of <strong>the</strong>ir editions. Individual editions<br />
are provided with introductory information about relevant features of<br />
manuscripts. Physical description of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts, especially of<br />
skin or papyrus, and detailed measurements may be compared with<br />
photographic reproductions on plates.<br />
Sections of palaeography offer characterisations of scripts which<br />
serve as bases for dating of manuscripts. Only in a few instances<br />
dating with help of radiocarbon was applied. Manuscripts are from<br />
<strong>the</strong> period between <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 3 rd century B. C. E and 68 C. E.<br />
Sections on orthography are in some instances followed <strong>by</strong> data on<br />
phonology and vocabulary. Information about content and genre of<br />
manuscripts are included. Transcriptions of texts are in standard Hebrew<br />
ñ also for cryptic texts ñ and Greek letters. They are arranged in<br />
lines according to <strong>the</strong> lines of original scrolls. Some fragments are<br />
combined and presented in reconstructions. A terminological note:<br />
The term ìtransliterationî may be more appropriate, as <strong>the</strong> printed<br />
letters are representing letters of originals. The term ìtranscriptionî<br />
may be reserved for rendering of o<strong>the</strong>r than alphabetic scripts. Transcriptions<br />
are followed <strong>by</strong> notes on readings; <strong>the</strong>y are helpful especially<br />
for badly damaged manuscripts. Non-biblical texts are translated<br />
ñ into English, in volumes II, III, VI, VII, XXV, XXXI and some<br />
in volume XXII into French. The translations are also arranged according<br />
to <strong>the</strong> lines of <strong>the</strong> originals. Biblical manuscripts are not<br />
translated. Comments to editions are often detailed. They interpret<br />
texts and also point to <strong>the</strong>ir relations to o<strong>the</strong>r texts, biblical and<br />
non-biblical. Some individual editions are closed with conclusions,<br />
summarising results of research. Words of Hebrew and Aramaic texts<br />
are listed in concordances, some separate for individual texts. In plates<br />
all manuscripts are reproduced, mostly in 1:1 scale, some enlarged.<br />
Application of modern technological method made some difficult<br />
fragments better legible.<br />
Close co-operation of competent editors with <strong>the</strong>ir colleagues has<br />
74
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
produced reliable editions and relevant interpretations. They were<br />
printed in user-friendly publications with help of effective methods<br />
applied <strong>by</strong> able assistants and technicians. Grateful users of this magnificent<br />
collection appreciate available editions and express best<br />
wishes for fur<strong>the</strong>r work providing access to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls.<br />
3.1.6 Qumran Cave 11ñII<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXIII. ñ Qumran Cave 11ñII.<br />
11Q2ñ18, 11Q20ñ31. By Florentine GarcÌa MartÌnez, Eibert J. C.<br />
Tigchelaar, and Adam S. van der Woude, incorporating earlier editions<br />
<strong>by</strong> J. P. M. van der Ploeg. ISBN 0-19-826959-5. Oxford:<br />
Clarendon Press 1998, xiv + 487 pp., pl. IñLIV.<br />
All manuscripts from Qumran cave 11 are now published. 11Q1<br />
was edited <strong>by</strong> D. N. Freedman and K. A. Mat<strong>the</strong>ws in 1985, The<br />
Paleo-Hebrew Leviticus Scroll. 11Q19, The Temple Scroll, was published<br />
<strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1977 and 1983, and <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron in 1996. The<br />
Psalms Scroll of Qumran Cave 11 (11QPS a cf. 11Q5) was published<br />
<strong>by</strong> J. A. Sanders in 1965, DJD IV.<br />
This large volume is called ìDutch volumeî(cf. xv). Dutch institutions<br />
provided funds for acquiring manuscripts found <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Bedouin<br />
in 1956 to <strong>the</strong> Palestine Archaeological Museum in Jerusalem in 1961<br />
and 1962. All three editors of <strong>the</strong> volume are at <strong>the</strong> Qumran Institute<br />
at <strong>the</strong> University of Groningen, Van der Woude as <strong>the</strong> first director,<br />
GarcÌa MartÌnez as <strong>the</strong> present director; Dr. Tigchelaar at <strong>the</strong> Institute<br />
provided also most of <strong>the</strong> typesetting. Van der Ploeg is professor at<br />
<strong>the</strong> University of Nijmegen.<br />
Foreword (xiñxii) <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov informs about <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />
volume. Preface (xiiiñxv) <strong>by</strong> Florentino GarcÌa MartÌnez explains <strong>the</strong><br />
development of <strong>the</strong> edition.<br />
In this volume both biblical and non-biblical texts are published.<br />
Texts 11Q2ñ9 are fragments of books of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible, text<br />
11Q10 is targum of Job. 11Q2 Leviticus (1ñ9, pl. I, 9 frgs) was written<br />
about 50 C. E. in elegant square script, only tetragrammaton<br />
YHVH is in <strong>the</strong> Palaeo-Hebrew script. Deuteronomy (11ñ14, pl. II, 3<br />
frgs) is also from about 50 C. E. 11Q4 Ezekiel, edited <strong>by</strong> Edward<br />
D. Herbert (15ñ28, pl. II, LIV, frgs. 1ñ9). This text was purchased <strong>by</strong><br />
75
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
Claremont Graduate School and edited <strong>by</strong> W. H. Brownlee in 1963.<br />
This scroll written about <strong>the</strong> beginning of Christian era, found in<br />
badly damaged state, is now reconstructed (cf. 17ñ19). 11Q5 Psalms,<br />
Fragments E, F (29ñ36, pl. IVñV), supplement The Psalms Scroll in<br />
DJD (v. supra) Fragment E contains remains of four psalms. It was<br />
published <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1966 and <strong>by</strong> J. A. Sanders in 1967. Fragment<br />
F is published here (36) for <strong>the</strong> first time. 11Q6 Psalms b (37ñ47,<br />
pl. Ill, 9 frgs) has in frg. 2 three verses of Ps 119 in stichometric<br />
arrangement. 1Q7 c (49ñ61, pl. VI, 11 frgs). 11Q8 d (63ñ76, pls.<br />
VIIñVIII, 17 frgs). 11Q9 Psalms 6 ? (77ñ78, pl. VIII, 1 frg.). Biblical<br />
texts are compared with <strong>the</strong> Masoretic texts, and occasionally with<br />
ancient versions, Greek, Latin, Syriac. Extra-biblical texts contained<br />
in <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts are provided with translation. 11Q10 targum<br />
Job (79ñ180, pls. IXñXXI, frgs. 1ñ27, A ñ W). This manuscript was<br />
already published <strong>by</strong> J. P. M. van der Ploeg and A. S. van der Woude,<br />
Le targum de Job de la grotte XI de Qumran (Leiden: Brill 1971). On<br />
columns IñXXXVIII free Aramaic version of preserved chapters†17ñ42<br />
is partially preserved (86). This manuscript was written in<br />
late formal Herodian type, in <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. (87).<br />
The manuscript is carefully described (79ñ89). Transliterations of<br />
fragmentary columns are provided with notes of readings, translations<br />
with detailed comments (90ñ171). Also unidentified fragments<br />
are presented (171ñ189), 11Q11 apocryphal Psalms (181ñ205, pls.<br />
XXIIñXXV, LIII, columns IñVI). Badly damaged scroll was opened<br />
in 1963. The manuscript was written in late formal Herodian script<br />
about 50ñ70 C. E. Remains of three songs against demons and of<br />
Psalm 91 are preserved, 11Q12 Jubilees (207ñ220, pl.†XXVI,<br />
13 frgs.) on fragmentary manuscript from about 50 C. E. could be<br />
partially reconstructed with help of <strong>the</strong> Ethiopic translation. 11Q13<br />
Melchizedek (221ñ241, pl. XXVII, 11 frgs) written about 50 B. C. E.<br />
describes <strong>the</strong> end of days, in which Melchizedek, a heavenly figure,<br />
will overthrow Belial and his lot. 11Q14 Sefer ha-Milhamah<br />
(243ñ251, pl. XXVIII, 4 frgs) is related to 4Q285, a version of <strong>the</strong><br />
War Scroll (1QM). In 11Q14 <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> victorious eschatological<br />
war is presented. 11Q15 Hymns a (253 ñ 256, pl. XXIX, 4 frgs).<br />
11Q16 b (257ñ258, pl. XXIX, frgs.añc). 11Q17 Shirot ëOlat ha-<br />
Shabbat (259ñ304, pl. XXXñXXXIV, LIII, 42 frgs). This scroll of<br />
76
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Song of Sabbath Sacrifice was opened <strong>by</strong> van der Ploeg in 1963.<br />
C. Newsom published a critical edition of Songs in 1985. She also<br />
edited 4Q400 ñ 407 in DJD XI (1998), 173ñ401 (cf. infra 3.1.17.).<br />
11Q17 was reconstructed in columns Iñ X, contains remains of<br />
Songs 7ñ13. The manuscript in small beautiful script was written at<br />
about <strong>the</strong> beginning of Christian era. 11Q18 New Jerusalem ar<br />
(305ñ355, pls. XXXVñXL, LIII, 37 frgs). This Aramaic work is attested,<br />
also in fragmentary form, in manuscripts from caves 1, 2, 4,<br />
and 5. 11Q18 deals with Temple and offerings. 11Q20 Temple b<br />
(357ñ409, pls. XLIñXLVIII, 43 frgs.). The Temple Scroll 3 11Q19<br />
was published <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin in 1977 and 1983, and with o<strong>the</strong>r manuscripts<br />
<strong>by</strong> E. Qimron in 1996. Fragments of 11Q20 form columns<br />
IñXVI (358ñ359), which can be compared to columns of 11Q19<br />
(363). The parallels to 11Q19 are underlined in transliterations.<br />
11Q21 Temple c ? (411ñ414, pl. XLVIII, 3 frgs.) is probably a copy of<br />
Temple Scroll. 11Q22 paleo Unidentified Text (419ñ420, pl. XLVIII,<br />
7 frgs.). 11Q23 cryptA Unidentified Text ar (419ñ420, pl. XLVIII,<br />
3 frgs), Aramaic text in cryptic script. 11Q24 Unidentified Text ar<br />
(421ñ422, pl. XLIX, 1 frg.). 11Q25ñ28 Unidentified Text A (pl.<br />
XLIX, 423ñ426, 8 frgs.); B (427ñ428, 3 frgs.); C (429ñ430, 2 frgs.);<br />
D (pl. L,U3l, 1 frg.). 11Q29 Fragment Related to Serekh ha-Yahad<br />
(433ñ434, pl. L, 1 frg.). 11Q30 Unidentified Fragment (435ñ444,<br />
pls. LñLI, 28 frgs.). 11Q31 Unidentified Wads (445ñ446, pl. LII).<br />
Four scrolls before opening are reproduced on plates LIIIñLIV.<br />
Concordances (447ñ487) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann list Hebrew<br />
words with added vowel signs (448ñ466), and Aramaic words<br />
(467ñ487). Manuscripts published in DJD XXIII are mostly fragmentary.<br />
They were found <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Bedouin in 1956, in <strong>the</strong> cave†11,<br />
distant from <strong>the</strong> Essene community centre. Some 11Q manuscripts<br />
were written in <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E., in later period of <strong>the</strong> Essene<br />
community at <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea. Probably new members of <strong>the</strong> community<br />
were staying in <strong>the</strong> 11Q cave; <strong>the</strong>y could use some recently<br />
composed and written works. While previously published 11Q texts<br />
(v. supra) are relatively well preserved, <strong>the</strong> fragmentary texts edited<br />
in this volume required demanding examination for <strong>the</strong>ir publication<br />
and partial reconstruction. The editors completed this task most successfully.<br />
All texts from cave 11 are now available for fur<strong>the</strong>r re-<br />
77
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
search. Especially <strong>the</strong> study of Hebrew can benefit from relevant<br />
sources, made accessible previously and completely now.<br />
3.1.7ñ10 Biblical manuscripts<br />
In this series of 4Q manuscripts biblical texts in standard Jewish<br />
script are included. Manuscripts in Palaeo-Hebrew scriptñand also<br />
Greek manuscriptsñwere published in DJD IX (reviewed in<br />
CV 36/1994: 247ñ254,3.1.1). Biblical manuscripts in this series are<br />
presented according patterns used in o<strong>the</strong>r DJD volumes. Manuscripts<br />
are introduced <strong>by</strong> informationís on physical details, palaeography<br />
and orthography. Transcriptions are printed in lines corresponding<br />
to those in <strong>the</strong> original scrolls, and are followed <strong>by</strong> notes<br />
on readings.<br />
Texts are not translated. They are provided with lists of variants,<br />
from Hebrew texts and from ancient versions, Greek, Latin, Syriac<br />
and targums, occasionally also Coptic, Ethiopic, Armenian. Fragments<br />
from 4Q are related to mostly <strong>the</strong> Masoretic text, mostly in<br />
tables. Textual character of 4Q manuscripts is defined.<br />
The sequence of books is generally that of Hebrew Bible. In <strong>the</strong><br />
first volume first four books of <strong>the</strong> Torah are presented, in <strong>the</strong> second<br />
Deuteronomy and ìhistoricalî books, in <strong>the</strong> fourth Prophets and in<br />
<strong>the</strong> fifth Writings. One exception: For Samuel <strong>the</strong> third volume, not<br />
yet published, is reserved.<br />
3.1.7 Biblical manuscript [1]<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XII ñ Qumran Cave 4 VII. Genesis<br />
to Numbers. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, James R. Davila,<br />
Nathan Jastram, Judith E. Sanderson, Emanuel Tov, John Strugnell.<br />
ISBN 0-19-826365-1. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1994. xvi + 272 pp.,<br />
plates IñXLIX.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) Eugene Ulrich explains <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />
volume. He began organising it in 1985, following <strong>the</strong> invitation of<br />
Frank Moore Cross. Participation of editors is acknowledged as is <strong>the</strong><br />
support of co-operators and of institutions. Abbreviations and sigla<br />
are listed (xiiiñxv), with bibliographical data. In <strong>the</strong> introduction<br />
78
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
(1ñ6) <strong>the</strong> importance of ancient Hebrew manuscripts is appreciated.<br />
Some from Qumran cave 4 were purchased from <strong>the</strong> Bedouin. The<br />
dating of <strong>the</strong> scrolls is stated for <strong>the</strong> period between about<br />
150 B. C. E. and 68 C. E. The introduction contains also information<br />
about naming and numbering of <strong>the</strong> Qumran scrolls and about arrangement<br />
of introductions to <strong>the</strong> individual editions. Most of <strong>the</strong>m<br />
contain fragments of only one book of <strong>the</strong> Pentateuch. In texts 4Q1,<br />
4Q17 and 4Q23 two books are represented. The numbers of manuscripts<br />
are: Genesis 9 + 1, Exodus 8 + 3, Leviticus 5 + 1, Numbers<br />
1 + 1. Genesis manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> James R. Davila.<br />
4Q1 4QGenñExod a (7ñ30, pls. IñV, 61 frgs.) contains fragments<br />
from <strong>the</strong> area between Gen 22 and Exod 9. The script points to<br />
125ñ100 B. C. E. 4Q2 Gen b (31ñ38, pls. VIñVIIJ, 4 frgs.). 4Q3 c<br />
(39ñ42, pl. IX, 1 frg.). 4Q4 d (43ñ46, pl. IX, 1 frg.). 4Q5 e (47ñ52, pl.<br />
X, 10 frgs.). 4Q6 f (53ñ55, pl. XI, 1 frg.). 4Q7 g (57ñ60, pl. XII, 3<br />
frgs.). 4Q8 h (61ñ64, pl. XII, 3 frgs. + title BRäJT without íA). 4Q9 j<br />
(65ñ73, pl. XIII, 12 frgs.) 4Q10 k (75ñ78, pl. XII, 5 frgs.).<br />
Manuscripts of Exodus 4Q13 Exod b and 4Q17 ExodñLev f were<br />
edited <strong>by</strong> Frank Moore Cross, 4Q14ñ16 Exod and 4Q18ñ21 Exod <strong>by</strong><br />
Judith E. Sanderson.<br />
4Q13 Exod b (79ñ95, pls. XIVñXV, 6 frgs.). 4Q14 c (97ñ125, pls.<br />
XVIñXX, 45 frgs.). 4Q15 d (127ñ128, pl. XXI, 1 frg.).ñ 4Q16 e<br />
(129ñ131, pl. XXI, 1 frg.) 4Q17 ExodñLev f (133ñ144, pl. XXII,<br />
5 frgs.). ñ 4Q18 Exod 8 (145ñ146, pl. XXI, 1 frg.). 4Q19 h (147,<br />
pl. XXI, 1 frg.). ñ 4Q20 j (149ñ150, pl. XXI, 3 frgs.). ñ 4Q21 k (151,<br />
pl. XXI, 1 frg.).<br />
Manuscripts of Leviticus were edited <strong>by</strong> Eugen Ulrich (4Q23ñ24)<br />
and <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov (4Q25, 26, 26ab).<br />
4Q23 LevñNum a (153ñ176. pls. XXIIIñXXX, 103 frgs.). 4Q24<br />
Lev b (177ñ187, pls. XXXIñXXXIV, 30 frgs.). 4Q25 c (189ñ192, pl.<br />
XXXV, 9 frgs.).ñ4Q26 d (193ñ195, pl. XXXVI, 4 frgs.).ñ4Q26a e<br />
(197ñ201, pl. XXXVII, 9 frgs.). 4Q26b g (203ñ204, pl. XXXVII,<br />
1frg.).<br />
Manuscript with Numbers only, 4Q27,was edited <strong>by</strong> Nathan<br />
Jastram. Num is contained also in 4Q23.<br />
4Q27 Num b (295ñ267, pls. XXXVIIIñXLIX, 109 frgs.). In this<br />
relatively well preserved manuscript from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st<br />
79
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
century B. C. E. some lines are in red ink (cf. pl. XLIX); <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
rendered in italics in <strong>the</strong> transcriptions (cf. 210ñ211, 209).<br />
Index of biblical passages (269ñ270) facilitates access to <strong>the</strong> fragments,<br />
as does index of <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (271ñ272).<br />
On plates IñXLVIII fragments are reproduced on black and white<br />
photographs; on plate XLIX <strong>the</strong> originals colours, brown skin, red<br />
and black ink, are well visible.<br />
Some editions are based on Ph. D. dissertations at Harvard University,<br />
supervised <strong>by</strong> Professor Cross. James R. Davila ñ who received<br />
his Master of Arts degree at University of California, Los<br />
Angeles†ñ used for 4Q1ñ10 his dissertation of 1988, Nathan Jastram<br />
for 4Q27 his dissertation of 1990. This volume is <strong>the</strong> result of demanding<br />
editorial activity. Great amount of fragments was competently<br />
combined into coherent manuscript editions. They are very<br />
helpful for thorough study of first four books of Pentateuch. Also <strong>the</strong><br />
analyses of texts are significant contribution to biblical studies.<br />
3.1.8 Biblical manuscripts [2]<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIV. Qumran Cave 4†IX. Deuteronomy,<br />
Joshua, Judges, Kings. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross,<br />
Sidney White Crawford, Julie Ann Duncan, Patrick W. Skehan,<br />
Emanuel Tov, Julio Trebolle Barrera. ISBN 0-19-826366-X. Oxford:<br />
Clarendon Press 1995. xvi + 188, plates IñXXXVI.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) Eugene Ulrich explains how <strong>the</strong> editors<br />
co-operated on production of this volume, and acknowledges <strong>the</strong> support<br />
of personalities and institutions. The introduction (1ñ6) to this<br />
second volume of <strong>the</strong> series of biblical manuscripts in Jewish script<br />
informs about <strong>the</strong> naming and numbering of <strong>the</strong> scrolls and about <strong>the</strong><br />
arrangement of <strong>the</strong> individual editions: introductions, transcriptions,<br />
notes, and reproductions.<br />
Deuteronomy is represented <strong>by</strong> 19 manuscripts (7ñ142). They<br />
were edited <strong>by</strong> Sidney White Crawfordñ4Q26, 30ñ331, 33ñ34,<br />
41ñ 43, Julie Ann Duncan ñ 4Q29, 32, 35, 37 ñ 38, 39ñ40, and Patrick<br />
W. Skehan and Eugene Ulrichñ4Q44.<br />
4Q28 Deut a (7ñ8, pl. I, 1 frg.). 4Q29 b (9ñ14, pl. II, 8 frgs.). 4Q30 c<br />
(15ñ34, pls. IIIñIX, 62 frgs.). 4Q31 d (35ñ38, pl. X, columns IñII.).<br />
80
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
4Q32 e (39ñ44, pl. XI, 8 frgs.). 4Q33 f (45ñ54, pls. XIIñXV, 35 + 6<br />
frgs.). 4Q34 g (55ñ59, pl. XI, 11 frgs.). 4Q35 h (61ñ70, pl. XVñXVIII,<br />
15 frgs.). 4Q36 i (71ñ74, pl. XIX, 6+1 frgs.). 4Q37 j (75ñ91,<br />
p. XXñXXIII, 34 + 13 frgs.). 4Q38 Deut k1 (93ñ98, pl. XXIV, 5 frgs.).<br />
4Q38a k2 (93ñ105, pl. XXV, 10 frgs.), and 4Q38b k3 (107, pl. XXV,<br />
1 frg.) are separate texts; <strong>the</strong> name of God, YHVH, is written in square<br />
script in Deut k1 , in Palaeo-Hebrew script in Deut k2<br />
4Q39 Deut l (109ñ112, pl. XXVI, 11 frgs.). 4Q40 m (113ñ116, pl.<br />
XXV, 5 frgs.). 4Q41 n (117ñ128, pls. XXVIIñXXIX, columns IñVI.).<br />
4Q42 o (129ñ133, pl. XXX, 15 frgs.). 4Q43 p (135ñ136, pl. XXXI, 2<br />
frgs.). 4Q44 q (137ñ142, pl. XXXI, 5 frgs.).<br />
The editors devoted appropriate attention to relations of Qumran<br />
manuscripts to Masoretic and Samaritan texts. The differences appear<br />
especially in orthography. Deuteronomy is also well represented<br />
in o<strong>the</strong>r Qumran caves: 1Q4ñ5, 2Q10ñ12, 5Q1, 6Q3 (?), 11Q3. In<br />
4Q also manuscripts 4Q45ñ46 in Palaeo-Hebrew script were found.<br />
The importance of Deuteronomy for <strong>the</strong> Qumran community can be<br />
seen in great number of manuscripts and also in use of Deuteronomy<br />
in some non-biblical texts. The ìhistoricalî books are attested only in<br />
few manuscripts, Joshua and Judges in two, Kings in one. Samuel<br />
scrolls 4Q51ñ53 have to be published in DJD XVII.<br />
4Q47 Josh 3 (143ñ152, pls. XXIIñXXIV, 22 frgs.) was edited <strong>by</strong><br />
Eugene Ulrich.<br />
4Q48 Josh (153ñ160, pl. XXXV, 6 frgs.) was published ñ with<br />
reconstruction ñ <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov.<br />
Three manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> Julio Trebolla Barrera:<br />
4Q49 Judg a (161ñ164, pl. XXXVI, 1 frg.). 4Q50 b (165ñ169,<br />
pl. XXXVI, 3 frgs.).<br />
4Q54 Kgs (171ñ183, pl. XXXVII, 8 frgs.). 1 Kings 7:19ñ8:19 is<br />
reconstructed (180ñ181). The original reading in 1 Kings 8:16 is<br />
partially preserved (177).<br />
Editions are provided with many references to Hebrew texts,<br />
Masoretic and Samaritan, and to ancient versions, especially Greek<br />
Septuagint and Syriac. Index of biblical passages (185ñ186) can be<br />
used also for comparison with o<strong>the</strong>r texts and versions. Index of <strong>the</strong><br />
contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (187ñ188) is a convenient tool for <strong>the</strong><br />
study of <strong>the</strong> texts. Photographs of manuscripts on plates IñXXXVII<br />
81
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
are mostly well legible. The legibility of some fragments was enhanced<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir enlargement. The careful edition of fragmentary manuscripts<br />
is provided with detailed introductions and copious notes.<br />
They can be effectively used for <strong>the</strong> study of biblical books, especially<br />
of Deuteronomy.<br />
3.1.9 Biblical manuscripts [4]<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XV. Qumran Cave 4 X. The Prophets.<br />
By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, Russell E, Fuller, Judith<br />
E. Sanderson, Patrick W. Skehan, Emanuel Tov, with <strong>the</strong> collaboration<br />
of Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy, Curt Niccum. ISBN 0-19-826937-4.<br />
Oxford: Clarendon Press 1997. xvi + 525 pp., plates IñLXIV.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) E. Ulrich explains <strong>the</strong> work of editors and<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir assistants as well as <strong>the</strong> outside support. The introduction (1ñ6)<br />
provides information about <strong>the</strong> arrangement of <strong>the</strong> edition, presented<br />
already previously. Nearly half of <strong>the</strong> volume is devoted to 18 manuscripts<br />
of Isaiah. Jeremiah is represented <strong>by</strong> less manuscripts, 5,<br />
Ezekiel <strong>by</strong> 3, Twelve Prophets <strong>by</strong> 7. The edition of 4Q Isaiah manuscripts<br />
was drafted <strong>by</strong> Skehan, after his death in 1980 it was completed<br />
<strong>by</strong> Ulrich (xi).<br />
4Q55 Isa a (7ñ18, pls. IñII, 18 frgs.) 4Q56 b (19ñ43, pls. IIIñVI, 47<br />
frgs.). 4Q57 c (45ñ73, pls. VIIñXII, 79 frgs.). The name of God,<br />
YHWH, is written in Palaeo-Hebrew script, and also <strong>the</strong> word for<br />
God, íLWHYM (46). 4Q58 d (75ñ88, pls. XIIIñXV, 16 frgs.). 4Q59 e<br />
(89ñ97, pls. XIIIñXV, 25 frgs.). 4Q60 f (99ñ111, pls. XVIIIñXXI, 34<br />
frgs.). 4Q61 g (113ñ115, pl. XXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q62 h (117ñ119, pl. XXI,<br />
2 frgs.). 4Q62a i (121ñ122, pl. XXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q63 j (123, pl. XXII,<br />
1 frg.). 4Q64 k (125ñ127, pl. XXII, 5 frgs.). 4Q65 l (125ñ130, pl. XXII,<br />
2 frgs.), 4Q66 m (131ñ132, pl. XXII, 3 frgs.). 4Q67 n (133ñ134, pl.<br />
XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q68 o (135ñ137, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q69 papIsa p<br />
(139, pl. XXIII, 2 frgs.). 4Q69a q (141, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.). 4Q69b r<br />
(143, pl. XXIII, 1 frg.).<br />
The Jeremiah manuscripts were edited <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov.<br />
4Q70 Jer a (145ñ170, pls. XXIVñXXIX, frgs. 1ñ36: columns<br />
IñXIV, 37ñ50). This text written about 300 B. C. E. is one of <strong>the</strong><br />
earliest Qumran scrolls.<br />
82
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
4Q71 b (171ñ176, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). 4Q72 C (177ñ201, pls.<br />
XXXñXXXVI, frgs. 1ñ55, 56ñ72). 4Q72a d (203ñ205, pl. XXXVII,<br />
1 frg.). 4Q72b e (207, pl. XXXVII, 1 frg.<br />
Judith E. Sanderson edited <strong>the</strong> Ezekiel manuscripts.<br />
4Q73 Ezek a (209ñ214, pl. XXXVIII, 4 frgs.). 4Q74 b (215ñ218, pl.<br />
XXXIX, 6 frgs.). 4Q72b C (219ñ220, 1 frg.).<br />
The manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> Twelve were edited <strong>by</strong> Russell E. Fuller.<br />
4Q76 XII a (221ñ232, pls. XLñXLII, 23 frgs.). The sequence in<br />
columns IñVII is Zech Mal, Jon (222). 4Q77 XII b (233ñ236,<br />
pl. XLIII. 6 frgs.). 4Q78 c (237ñ251, pls. XLIXñXLVI, 38 frgs.).<br />
4Q79 d (253ñ256, pl. XLVII, 2 frgs.). 4Q80 e (257ñ265, pl. XLVII,<br />
25 frgs.). 4Q81 f (267ñ270, pl. XLVIII, 5 frgs.). 4Q82 g (271ñ318, pls.<br />
XLñLIV, frgs. 1ñ105 + unidentified frgs. 106ñ258).<br />
Ca<strong>the</strong>rine Murphy contributed <strong>by</strong> applying technological advances,<br />
computer searching and digital imaging. Index of biblical<br />
passages (319ñ321) and index of <strong>the</strong> contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts<br />
(323ñ325) facilitate orientation in this rich collection of important<br />
texts. Photographic reproductions are presented on plates IñLIV,<br />
Some fragments are deteriorated, especially those of <strong>the</strong> manuscript<br />
4Q82 XII 8 (pls. XLIXñLXIV). Patterns of deterioration are shown on<br />
pls. XLIXñLII. Small fragments 60 and 61 were photographed at<br />
verso and verso mirror (pl. LVIII).<br />
Manuscripts are exactly described and measured. Their dates are<br />
indicated according to palaeographic criteria. Relations to Hebrew<br />
text types, also those attested in Qumran scrolls, are listed, as are<br />
those to ancient versions. Both reliable editions and insightful observations<br />
will be highly appreciated as significant contributions to biblical<br />
studies.<br />
The Book of Isaiah is <strong>the</strong> only book of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible completely<br />
preserved in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, in <strong>the</strong> manuscript published<br />
in 1950, IQIsa a . In 1Q also <strong>the</strong> large text Isa b (l955) was found.<br />
Shorter manuscripts are 1Q8 and 5Q3. Commentary of peöer type is<br />
attested, 4Q161ñ165, 3Q4. Book of Isaiah was frequently quoted in<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r works. Now 4Q texts can be used to enrich <strong>the</strong> intensive research<br />
of this book.<br />
83
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
3.1.10 Biblical manuscripts [5]<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XVIñQumran Cave 4 XI. Psalms<br />
to Chronicles. By Eugene Ulrich, Frank Moore Cross, Joseph<br />
A. Fitzmyer, Peter W. Flint, Sarianna Metso, Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy,<br />
Curt Niccum, Patrick W. Skehan, Emanuel Tov and Julio Trebolle<br />
Barrera. ISBN 0-19-826943-9. Oxford: Clarendon Press<br />
2000. xvi + 303 pp., pls. IñXXXVIII.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiñxii) E. Ulrich informs about <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong><br />
edition, <strong>the</strong> participation of editors and <strong>the</strong>ir colleagues, and about<br />
various kinds of support. The introduction (1ñ6), similar to those in<br />
previous volumes of this series of biblical manuscripts, deals with<br />
arrangement of individual editions. In this edition of manuscripts of<br />
Writings about half is devoted to Psalms. The o<strong>the</strong>r books follow in<br />
<strong>the</strong> standard sequence. Psalms were edited <strong>by</strong> P. W. Skehan, E. Ulrich,<br />
and P. W. Flint (7ñ167). Ps 122, 4Q522, quoted from ano<strong>the</strong>r 4Q text,<br />
was previously edited <strong>by</strong> …. Puech (169ñ170). Due to <strong>the</strong> large<br />
number of Psalms manuscripts, 23 + 1, <strong>the</strong>ir list is presented here in<br />
briefest manner: <strong>the</strong> 4Q number, letter of sequence, pages of edition,<br />
plates, numbers of fragments.<br />
83 a (7ñ22, IñII, 24). 84 b (23ñ48, IIIñVI, 37). 85 c (49ñ61. VIIñIX,<br />
26). 86 d (63ñ71, X, 14). 87 e (73ñ84, XIñXII, 26). 88 f (85ñ106,<br />
XIIñXIV, 1ñ2 + v. infra). 89 g (107ñ112, XV, 6, v. infra). 90 h (113ñ115,<br />
XV, 2, v. infra). ñ91 j (117ñ121, XVI, 9). 92 k 123ñ125, XVII, 1). 93 l<br />
(127ñ129, XVII, 1). 94 m (131ñ133, XVII, 9). 95 n (135ñ137, XVIII,<br />
3). 96 o (139ñ141, XVIII, 2). 97 p (143ñ144, XVIII. 2). 98 q (145ñ149,<br />
XIX, 11). 98a r (151ñ152, XIX, 2). 98b S XIX, 2). 98c t (155, XIX, 1).<br />
98d u (157, XX, 1). 98e v (159, XX, 1). 98f w (161ñ162, XX, 2). 98g x<br />
(163ñ167, XX, 1). 4Q522 (169ñ170, v. infra).<br />
Ad 4Q88: After Ps 109 non-biblical poems with translations<br />
(96ñ106: Apostrophe to Zion, Eschatological Hymn, Apostrophe to<br />
Judah).<br />
Ad 4Q89 and 90: Psalm 119 was written with each verse on separate<br />
line.<br />
Ad 4Q522: Psalm 122 is reedited with references to <strong>the</strong> edition <strong>by</strong><br />
…. Puech in ìProphÈtie de Josueî in DJD XXV (cf. 3.1.20), frgs.<br />
22ñ25, pp. 69ñ70, pl. IV.<br />
84
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Job, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich and Sarianna Metso: 4Q99 Job a171ñ178<br />
(pl. XXI, 23 frgs). 4Q100 b (179ñ180, pl. XXII, 6 frgs.).<br />
Proverbs, <strong>by</strong> Patrick W. Skehan and Eugene Ulrich: 4Q102 Prov a<br />
(181ñ182, pl. XXII, 2 frgs.). 4Q103 b (183ñ186, pl. XXIII, 15 frgs.)<br />
Ruth, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich and Ca<strong>the</strong>rine M. Murphy: 4Q104 Ruth a<br />
(187ñ189, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.).ñ4Q105 b (191ñ194, pl. XXIX, 4 frgs.).<br />
Canticles, <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov: Introduction to 4Q106ñ108 (195ñ198):<br />
Some passages, e.g. Cant 4:4ñ7, are omitted. The copies of <strong>the</strong> Five<br />
Scrolls are of small size, perhaps for liturgical use. 4Q106 Cant 3<br />
(199ñ204, pl. XXIV, 6 frgs) 4Q107 b (205ñ218, pl. XXV, 3 frgs.).<br />
4Q108 c (219, XXV, 1 frg.).<br />
Qoheleth, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich: 4Q109 Qoh a (221ñ226, pl. XXVI,<br />
7 frgs.). 4Q110 b (227, pl. XXVII, 2 frgs.).<br />
Lamentations, <strong>by</strong> Frank Moore Cross: 4Q111 Lam (pls.<br />
XXVIIñXXVIII, 4 frgs.).<br />
Daniel, 4Q112ñ115 <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich, 4Q116 <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich<br />
and Curt Niccum. 4Q112 Dan a (239ñ254, pls., XXIXñXXXI,<br />
18 frgs.). 4Q113 b (255ñ267, pls. XXXIIñXXXIII, 20 frgs.). 4Q114 c<br />
(269ñ277, pls. XXXIVñXXXVI, 3 frgs.). 4Q115 Dan d (pls.<br />
XXXVIñXXXVII, 16 frgs.). 4Q116 e (287ñ289, pl. XXXVIII, 7 frgs.).<br />
Ezra, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich: 4Q117Ezra (291ñ293, pl. XXXVIII,<br />
3frgs.).<br />
Chronicles, <strong>by</strong> Julio Trebolle Barrera: 4Q118 Chr (295ñ297,<br />
pl. XXXVIII, 1 frg.).<br />
Index of biblical passages (299ñ300); Es<strong>the</strong>r and Nehemiah are<br />
not represented. Index of contents of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts (301ñ302). All<br />
photographs on plates IñXXXVIII are of natural size. The editors<br />
produced a reliable edition of fragmentary, often difficult texts. Their<br />
introduction and lists of variants enhance <strong>the</strong> value of this volume.<br />
The large number of Psalms manuscripts may stimulate <strong>the</strong>ir more<br />
detailed research.<br />
3.1.11ñ13 Para-biblical texts<br />
Various kinds of para-biblical texts and <strong>the</strong>ir various relations to biblical<br />
books are characterised <strong>by</strong> Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief of DJD,<br />
85
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
in his foreword to volume XIII (ix). As most of <strong>the</strong> 4Q documents<br />
had to be published according to <strong>the</strong>ir literary genre (cf. ib.), originally<br />
three volumes had to be devoted to <strong>the</strong>m. These volumes XIII<br />
(1994), XIX (1995), and XXII (1997) are reviewed here below, <strong>the</strong><br />
fourth volume (XXX) published in 2001 is reviewed in addition<br />
v. infra 3.1.23.<br />
3.1.11 Para-biblical Texts, Part 1<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIII ñ Qumran Cave 4ñVIII.<br />
Para-biblical Texts, Part 1. By Harold Attridge, Torleif Elgvin, Jozef<br />
Milik, Saul Olyan, John Strugnell, Emanuel Tov, James VanderKam<br />
and Sidnie White, in consultation with James VanderKam.<br />
ISBN 0-19-826760-6. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1994. x + 470 pp.,<br />
pls. IñXLIII.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (ixñx) Emanuel Tov points to new features in publishing<br />
4Q texts (v. supra, 3.1.11ñ13). He also mentions that full concordances<br />
of all <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> non-biblical texts will be published.<br />
The section A (1ñ175) contains fragments of 13 manuscripts, <strong>the</strong><br />
section B (187ñ351) those of 5 manuscripts; sections C, D, E contain<br />
one manuscripts each (cf. 353ñ441).<br />
A. Jubilees, <strong>by</strong> J. VanderKam and J. T. Milik.<br />
4Q216ñ224 are from <strong>the</strong> book of Jubilees which is completely<br />
preserved in accurate Ethiopic translation (4). 4Q216 Jubilees a (1ñ22,<br />
pls. IñII, 18 frgs.). 4Q217 papJubilees b ? (23ñ33, pl. III, 8 frgs.).<br />
4Q218 (35ñ38, pl. IV, 1 frg.). 4Q219 (39ñ53, pl. IV, 16 frgs.). 1Q220 e<br />
(55ñ61, pl. V, 1 frg.). 4Q221 f (63ñ85. pl. VI, 19 frgs.). 4Q222 g<br />
(87ñ94, pl. V, 6 frgs.). 4Q223ñ224 pap h (95ñ140, pls. VIIñIX,<br />
69 frgs.).<br />
Previously unknown texts, classified <strong>by</strong> Milik as Pseudo-Jubilees,<br />
employ <strong>the</strong> language of Jubilees, but are not copies of it (142): 4Q225<br />
Pseudo-Jubilees a (141ñ155, pl. X, 3 frgs.). 4Q226 b (157ñ169, pl. XI,<br />
14 frgs.). 4Q227 c (171ñ175, pl. XII, 2 frgs.). 4Q228 Text with<br />
a Citation from Jubilees (177ñ185, pl. XII, 5 frgs.).<br />
B. Reworked Pentateuch, <strong>by</strong> E. Tov and S. White, who edited<br />
4Q365a. Tov wrote <strong>the</strong> introduction to 4QReworked Pentateuch bñe<br />
(187ñ196): Manuscripts 4Q364ñ367 and 4Q158 are copies of a com-<br />
86
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
position called now Reworked Pentateuch. The Pentateuch text is<br />
provided <strong>by</strong> exegetical additions. The basic biblical text belongs to<br />
<strong>the</strong> so called Proto-Samaritan group.<br />
4Q364 Reworked Pentateuch b (197ñ254, pls. XIIIñXXI, frgs.<br />
1ñ32, AñZ, AAñII). 4Q365 c (255ñ318, pls. XXIIñXXXII, frgs.<br />
1ñ38, AñX). 4Q366 d (335ñ343, pls., XXXV, 5 frgs.). 4Q367 e<br />
(345ñ351, pl. XXXVI, frgs. 1ñ3, A).<br />
4Q365a Temple? (319ñ333, pls. XXXIIIñXXXIV, 5 frgs.). This<br />
text contains non-biblical material similar to <strong>the</strong> Temple Scroll, 11Q19.<br />
C. Prayer of Enosh, <strong>by</strong> H. Attridge and J. Strugnell: 4Q369<br />
(353ñ362, pl. XXXVII, 9 frgs.). The name of person is written on<br />
frg. 1, col. I, line 10, as ḤNWK and translated Enoch.<br />
D. paraKings et al., <strong>by</strong> S. Olyan: 4Q382 pap (365ñ416, pls.<br />
XXXVIIIñXLI, 154 frgs.). The name of God, tetragrammaton, indicated<br />
<strong>by</strong> four dots, v. frg. 9, line 5).<br />
E. Paraphrase of Genesis and Exodus, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin and E. Tov:<br />
4Q422 (417ñ441, pls. XLIIñXLIII, frgs. 1ñ10, AñT). Columns IñIII<br />
are arranged as reconstruction on plate XLII.<br />
Concordances (443ñ470) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. J. Pfann and W. Schniedewind<br />
present words according to groups of texts: 4Q216ñ<br />
228.4Q364ñ367. 4Q369, 4Q382, 4Q422. Photographs of <strong>the</strong> papyrus<br />
manuscript 4Q382 (pls. XXXVIIIñXLI) are well legible. On plate<br />
XLI <strong>the</strong>y are conveniently arranged, so that <strong>the</strong>y look like a reconstruction.<br />
3.1.12 Para-biblical Texts, Part 2<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XIX ñ Qumran Cave 4 XIV.<br />
Parabiblical Texts, Part 2. By Magen Broshi, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Joseph<br />
Fitzmyer, Erik Larson, Carol Newsom, Lawrence Schiffman, Mark<br />
Smith, Michael Stone, John Strugnell and Ada Yardeni,in consultation<br />
with James VanderKam. ISBN 0-9-826389-9. Oxford: Clarendon<br />
Press 1995. xii + 267 pp., pls. IñXXIX.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov mentions that this volume was<br />
typeset in Jerusalem.<br />
añd Texts are published in sections AñM. Five texts are Aramaic,<br />
Tobit, 4Q 196ñ199, and List of False Prophets, 4Q399.<br />
87
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
A. Tobit, <strong>by</strong> J. Fitzmyer. This section is provided with introduction<br />
to texts 4Q196ñ200 (1ñ5). Both <strong>the</strong> Aramaic and Hebrew form<br />
agree with <strong>the</strong> Greek version in Codex Sinaiticus and with Vetus<br />
Latina. 4Q196 papTobit ar (7ñ39, pls. IñV, 49 frgs.), Aramaic on<br />
papyrus. 4Q197 b ar (41ñ56, pls. VIñVIII, 7 frgs.). 4Q198 c ar (57ñ60,<br />
pl. VIII. 2 frgs.). 4Q199 d ar (61ñ62, pl. VIII, 2 frgs.). 4Q200 Tobit e<br />
(63ñ76, pls. IXñX, 9 frgs.) is Hebrew.<br />
B. By M. Broshi and A. Yardeni: 4Q339 List of False Prophets ar<br />
(77ñ79, pl. XI, 1 frg.). This Aramaic text may not be an Essene composition,<br />
as <strong>the</strong>y used only Hebrew; with reference to S. Segertís<br />
publications of 1963 and 1965 (77, n. 2).<br />
C. By M. Broshi and A. Yardeni, 4Q340 List of Netinim (81ñ84,<br />
pl. XI, 1 frg.).<br />
D. By C. Newsom, 4Q370 Admonition on <strong>the</strong> Flood (85ñ97,<br />
pl. XII, 1 frg.).<br />
E. By C. Newsom, 4Q374 Discourse on <strong>the</strong> Exodus/Conquest Tradition<br />
(99ñ110, pl. XIII, 16 frgs.).<br />
F. By J. Strugnell, 4Q375 Apocryphon of Moses a (111ñ119,<br />
pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q376 b ? (121ñ136, pl. XV, 2 frgs.). Related to 1Q22<br />
and 1Q29. Probably following <strong>the</strong> tradition of Zadokite priests.<br />
G. By M. Smith. 4Q384 papApocryphon of Jeremiah B? (137ñ162,<br />
pl. XVI, 27 frgs.). The relation to 4Q385ñ390 is unclear.<br />
H. By M. Smith. 4Q391 papPseudo-Exekiel 6 (153ñ193, pls.<br />
XVIIñXXV, 78 frgs,). The language is similar to canonical book of<br />
Ezekiel.<br />
I. By M. Smith. 4Q462 Narrative C (198ñ209, pl. XXVI, 7 frgs.). ñ<br />
4Q463 D (211ñ214, pl. XXVII, 4 frgs.). The imminent restoration of<br />
<strong>the</strong> people of God is announced (v. 205ñ208).<br />
J. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q454 Exposition on <strong>the</strong> Patriarchs<br />
(215ñ230, pl. XXVIII, 11 frgs.). This narrative has expository character<br />
(v. 210ñ211).<br />
K. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q464a Narrative E (231ñ232,<br />
pl. XIX, 1 frg.).<br />
L. By E. Eshel and M. Stone. 4Q464b Unclassified Fragments<br />
(233ñ234, pl. XXIX, 2 frgs.).<br />
M. By E. Larson, L. Schiffman, and J. Strugnell, 4Q470 Text Men-<br />
88
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
tioning Zedekiah (235ñ244, pl. XXIX, 3 frgs.). The King is evaluated<br />
more positively. due to his covenant with God.<br />
S. Pfann prepared two concordances, Hebrew (246ñ258), in which<br />
14 texts are listed separately, and Aramaic (259ñ267), containing<br />
words from 4Q196ñ199 and from 4Q339. Plates IñXXIX present reproduction<br />
of Hebrew and Aramaic texts, those on plates IñVIII<br />
and XI. Different scripts used in Aramaic manuscripts correspond to<br />
those in Hebrew texts (cf. 7, 41, 57, 61). The arrangement is consistent;<br />
physical description analyses of palaeography and orthography,<br />
precede <strong>the</strong> editions of original textsí, notes and readings, translations<br />
and comments follow. Close co-operation of many scholars produced<br />
<strong>the</strong> publication of important texts, a reliable basis for fur<strong>the</strong>r<br />
research, and valuable observations and suggestions.<br />
3.1.13 Parabiblical Texts, Part 3<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXII ñ Qumran Cave 4 XVII.<br />
Parabiblical Texts, Part 3. By George Brooke, John Collins, Torleif<br />
Elgvin, Peter Flint, Jonas Greenfield, Erik Larson, Carol Newsom,<br />
…mile Puech, Lawrence H. Schiffman, Michael Stone and Julio<br />
Trebolle Barrera, in consultation with James VanderKam. ISBN<br />
0-19-826936-6. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1996. xii + 351 pp., pls.<br />
IñXXIX.<br />
In this third volume more than half is devoted to four Aramaic<br />
texts, while <strong>the</strong> Hebrew texts are mostly minor. E. Tov appreciates<br />
<strong>the</strong> effective support for <strong>the</strong> editing and producing of this collection,<br />
in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi).<br />
A. Aramaic Levi Document, <strong>by</strong> M. E. Stone and J. C. Greenfield:<br />
4Q213 Levi a ar (1ñ24, pl. I, 5 frgs.) The Aramaic work served as<br />
a source for Greek Testament of Levi, found in Cairo Geniza (2). This<br />
version provided help for reconstruction of <strong>the</strong> Aramaic work. Poetic<br />
structure is presented in <strong>the</strong> reconstruction (13). 4Q213a Levi b ar<br />
(25ñ36, pl. II. 6 frgs.). Fragments 1ñ2 are reconstructed with help of<br />
Greek text from Athos. 4Q213b c (37ñ41, pl. III, 1 frg.). 4Q214 Levi d<br />
ar (43ñ51, pl. III, 5 frgs.). 4Q214a e (53ñ60, pl. IV, 3 frg.). 4Q214b f<br />
(61ñ72, pl. IV, 8 frgs.).<br />
89
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
B. By M. E. Stone: 4Q215. Testament of Naphthali (73ñ82, pl. V,<br />
1 frg.). Two fragmentary narratives, <strong>the</strong> young Naphthali as speaker.<br />
C. By J. Collins: 4Q242 Prayer of Nabonidus ar (83ñ93, pl. VI, 4<br />
frgs.). Fragments of a wisdom tale, related to Daniel 4.<br />
D. By J. Collins and P. Flint: Pseudo-Daniel ar. Introduction to<br />
4Q243ñ245 (95) informs about previous editions. 4Q243 Pseudo-Daniel<br />
a ar (97ñ121, pls. VIIñVIII, 40 frgs.). 4Q244 b (123ñ131,<br />
pl. IX, 14 frgs.). 4Q243ñ244 The Combined Text (133ñ151) is similar<br />
to Daniel 1ñ6. The text is reconstructed, translated and commented<br />
(138ñ151). 4Q245 Pseudo-Daniel c ar (153ñ164, pl. X, 4 frgs.). List<br />
of priests is only partially preserved.<br />
E. By …. Puech: 4Q246 Apocryphe de Daniel ar (165ñ184, pl. XI,<br />
1 frg.).The text is printed according to <strong>the</strong> lines of <strong>the</strong> manuscript<br />
(167ñ168) and also arranged according to <strong>the</strong> stichometry, in cola<br />
and verses (168ñ169). The religious titles probably refer to historical<br />
personalities of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E.<br />
F. Commentaries on Genesis and Malachi, <strong>by</strong> G. Brooke: 4Q252<br />
Commentary on Genesis A (185ñ207, pls. XIIñXIII, 6 frgs.). 4Q253<br />
B (209ñ212, pl. XIV, 3 frgs.). 4Q254 C (217ñ232, pl. XV, 17 frgs.).<br />
4Q254a D (233ñ236, pl. XVI, 3 frgs.). Selected passages are explained.<br />
4Q253a Commentary on Malachi (213ñ215, pl. XIV, 1 frg.).<br />
G. Apocryphon of Joshua, <strong>by</strong> C. Newsom. Introduction to<br />
4Q378ñ379. This text is of <strong>the</strong> type represented in Jubilees. 4Q378 a<br />
(241ñ262, pls. XVIIñXX, 29 frgs.). 4Q379 b (263ñ288, pls.<br />
XXIñXXV, 41 frgs.).<br />
H. By T. Elgvin. 4Q473 The Two Ways (289ñ294, pl. XXVI,<br />
2 frgs.). Deuteronomic phrases are condensed into an admonition.<br />
I. Miscellaneous Texts, <strong>by</strong> E. Larson and L. H. Schiffman: 4Q478<br />
papFragment Mentioning Festivals (295ñ296, pl. XXVI, 1 frg.).<br />
4Q479 Text Mentioning Descendants of David (297ñ299, pl. XXVII,<br />
3 frgs.). 4Q480 Narrative F (301ñ302, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481<br />
Text Mentioning Mixed Kinds (303ñ304, pl. XXVIII, 2 frgs.).<br />
J. By J. Trebolle Barrera. 4Q481a Apocryphe dí…lisÈe (305ñ309,<br />
pl. XXX, 3 frgs.).<br />
K. Miscellaneous Texts, <strong>by</strong> E. Larson and L. H. Schiffman:<br />
4Q481b Narrative G (311ñ312, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481c Prayer<br />
for Mercy (313ñ314, pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q481d Fragments with<br />
90
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Red Ink (315ñ319, pl. XXIX, 7 frgs.). 4Q481e, Narrative H (321ñ322,<br />
pl. XXIX, 1 frg.).<br />
Concordances <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann (32ñ351) have 17 Hebrew (325ñ341)<br />
and 4 Aramaic sections (342ñ351). Some reproductions on plates are<br />
enlarged, to be better legible. This volume containing reliable editions<br />
of mostly fragmentary texts is a valuable contribution to Dead<br />
Sea Scrolls studies. The efforts of editors will be highly appreciated.<br />
It can be expected that especially research in Qumran Aramaic will<br />
be stimulated <strong>by</strong> reliable and well commented edition of Aramaic<br />
documents.<br />
3.1.14 Halakha<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXV. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXXV.<br />
Halakhic Texts. By Joseph Baumgarten, Torleif Elgvin, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel,<br />
Erik Larson, Manfred R. Lehmann, Stephen Pfann, Lawrence<br />
H. Schiffman. ISBN 0-19-827006-3. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999.<br />
xii + 173 pp., plates IñXII.<br />
E. Tov, editor-in-chief, recommends in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) to study<br />
texts contained in this collection toge<strong>the</strong>r with <strong>the</strong> rules such as 1QS,<br />
4QMMT. And he appreciates those who helped produce this volume.<br />
S. Pfann edited 4Q249, 4Qpap cryptA Midrash Sefer Moshe (1ñ24,<br />
pls. IñII, 14 fragments). The discussion on <strong>the</strong> cryptic script has to<br />
appear in DJD XXXVI (cf. 4, n. 8). The title MDRä SPR MWäH is on<br />
<strong>the</strong> back of <strong>the</strong> scroll. The Torah was studied during nightly meetings<br />
of <strong>the</strong> community, <strong>the</strong> conclusions were written down. The palaeography<br />
of <strong>the</strong> titles inquadrate script and <strong>the</strong> Carbonñ14 tests point to<br />
<strong>the</strong> date in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E. Only few<br />
fragments could be translated. Column i was reconstructed (18ñ20).<br />
The legal interpretation of leprosy is similar to that in Rabbinic sources<br />
(23ñ24).<br />
E. Larson, M. R. Lehmann and L. Schiffman co-operated on <strong>the</strong><br />
edition of 4Q251, 4Q Halakha A (25ñ51, pls. IIIñIV, 26 frgs). Its<br />
language and its content follow Hebrew Bible. 4Q264a, Halakha B<br />
(53ñ56, pl. V, 3 frgs) was edited <strong>by</strong> J. Baumgarten. T. Elgvin edited<br />
4Q472a, Halakha C (155ñ156, pl. XII, 1 frg.). The manuscript<br />
4Q265, called Miscellaneous Rules, (57ñ78, pl. VñVIII, fragments<br />
91
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
1ñ7, añ1) is edited and thoroughly commented <strong>by</strong> J. Baumgarten. He<br />
explained <strong>the</strong> Sabbath laws in <strong>the</strong> appendix (75ñ78). J. Baumgarten<br />
provided 4Q274ñ276, Tohorot AñC, with a substantial introduction<br />
(79ñ97). The laws of purity had a pervasive influence on <strong>the</strong> life of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Qumran community. Various kinds of impurity are explained, and<br />
also kinds of purification, with use of liturgies. Purification through<br />
<strong>the</strong> Holy Spirit is included. 4QTohorot are preserved in 4 manuscripts;<br />
A 4Q274 (99ñ109, pl. VIII, 3 frgs), B a 4Q276 (111ñ113, pl. IX,<br />
1 frg.), B b 4Q277 (115ñ119, pl. IX, 2 frgs.), C 4Q278 (121ñ122,<br />
pl. IX, 1 frg.) J. Baumgarten edited also 4Q284, Purification Liturgy<br />
(123ñ129, pl. XI, 10 frgs.) which refers to sprinkling water. And he<br />
edited 4Q284a, Harvesting (131ñ133, pl. XI, 4 frgs), dealing with<br />
fruits. E. Eshel edited 4Q414, Ritual of Purification A (135ñ154,<br />
pls.XIñXII, 36 frgs), a collection of rituals and prayers, parallel to<br />
4Q512. The immersion rules relate to 11Q Temple Scroll XLIXñL.<br />
The concordance (159ñ173) was prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann. This<br />
volume is based in part on earlier transcriptions <strong>by</strong> Josef (sic)<br />
T. Milik. About half of this volume was prepared <strong>by</strong> Joseph Baumgarten.<br />
Especially valuable is his detailed and well substantiated explanation<br />
of purification rituals; he compares <strong>the</strong>m with later Jewish<br />
sources. This points to <strong>the</strong> important contribution of texts published<br />
in this volume; <strong>the</strong>y deal with some matters previously known only<br />
from later Jewish sources. Now <strong>the</strong>se matters are attested already<br />
in <strong>the</strong> period of Second Temple.<br />
3.1.15ñ16 Sapiential Texts<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XX. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXV.<br />
Sapiential Texts, Part 1. By Torleif Elgvin, Menachem Kister, Timothy<br />
Lim, Bilhah Nitzan, Stephen Pfann, Elisha Qimron, Lawrence<br />
H. Schiffman and Annette Steudel. ISBN 0-19-826938-2. Oxford:<br />
Clarendon Press 1997. x + 246 pp., plates IñXVIII.<br />
Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief, points in <strong>the</strong> preface (x) to <strong>the</strong> functions<br />
of <strong>the</strong> sapiential didactic compositions: admonitions, instructions,<br />
and meditations. He appreciates <strong>the</strong> contribution of Joseph<br />
A. Fitzmyer, who served as <strong>the</strong> consulting editor. The texts are presented<br />
in 8 sections, AñH (1ñ224).<br />
92
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
A. Words of <strong>the</strong> Maskil to All Sons of Dawn, <strong>by</strong> S. J. Pfann and<br />
M. Kister: 4Q298 4QcryptA WordsÖ (1ñ30, pls. IñII, 8 fragments).<br />
The fragmentary scroll is carefully described (2ñ7). Only <strong>the</strong> title and<br />
first sentence are in <strong>the</strong> Jewish ìsquareî script (cf. 7ñ9). The manuscript<br />
is written in Cryptic A script; its letter forms are presented from<br />
texts 4Q298, 4Q249, and 4Q317 (9ñ13). The decipherer of this script,<br />
J. T. Milik is mentioned in a note (7, n. 18). The MASKIL addresses<br />
<strong>the</strong> novices of <strong>the</strong> Essene community. Fragments are presented in<br />
standard Hebrew letters and provided with translations and comments.<br />
B. Mysteries, <strong>by</strong> L. Schiffman, are introduced (31ñ32); <strong>the</strong> title is<br />
explained as rendering of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew term RZYM. 4Q299, Mysteries a<br />
(33ñ97, pls. IIIñVII, 106 frgs.) are related to 1Q27. Poetic rendering<br />
(38) points to <strong>the</strong> original structure. 4Q300, Mysteries v (99ñ114,<br />
pl. VIII, 14 frgs.) is similar and partially parallel. 4Q301, Mysteries c ?<br />
(113ñ123, pl. IX, 10 frgs), is not clearly related to <strong>the</strong> preceding<br />
compositions.<br />
C. Admonitory Parable, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q302, 4QpapÖ (125ñ149,<br />
pls. XñXII, 18 frgs), resembling <strong>the</strong> lawsuit pattern in <strong>the</strong> Bible, was<br />
composed in <strong>the</strong> 3 rd century B. C. E.<br />
D. Meditations on Creation, <strong>by</strong> T. Lim: 4Q303, A; 4Q304, B;<br />
4Q305 C (151ñ153, 155, 157ñ158, pl. XIII, 1 + 1 + 1 frgs.) These<br />
fragments reflect on opening chapters of Genesis.<br />
E. Sapiential Texts, <strong>by</strong> A. Steudel: 4Q411, Sapiential Hymn<br />
(159ñ162, pl. XIV, 1frg.) is probably of pre-Qumran origin. 4Q412,<br />
Sapiential-Didactic Work A (163ñ167, pl. XIV, 4 frgs) is apparently<br />
a didactic collection.<br />
F. Composition concerning Divine Providence, <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron:<br />
4Q413 (169ñ171, pl. XIV, 2 frgs.) exhorts <strong>the</strong> reader to past events.<br />
G. Ways of Righteousness, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: This composite work is<br />
attested in two fragmentary manuscripts, 4Q420 a (173ñ182, pl. XV,<br />
7 frgs.) and 4Q421 b (183ñ202, pl. XIV, 13 frgs.). They contain<br />
sapiential sayings and admonitions.<br />
H. Sapiential Texts, <strong>by</strong> A. Steudel: 4Q426 Sapiential-Didactic<br />
Work B (203ñ210, pl. XVII, 6 frgs., this collection was not<br />
Qumranic). 4Q426, Sapiential-Hymnic Work A (211ñ224, pl. XVIII,<br />
13 frgs) contains prayer, hymnic and didactic elements.<br />
93
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
S. Pfann prepared Concordances (225ñ146) in which words are<br />
listed separately according to manuscripts.<br />
3.1.16<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXIV. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñXXIV.<br />
Sapiential Texts, Part 2. 4QInstruction (MUSAR LE-MEVÕN):<br />
4Q415ff. With a re-edition of 1Q26 <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell and Daniel<br />
J. Harrington and an edition of 4Q423 <strong>by</strong> Torleif Elgvin.<br />
ISBN 0-19-826982-X. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999. xvi-I-584 pp.,<br />
pls. IñXXXI.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xiiiñxvi) Emanuel Tov explains <strong>the</strong> arrangement<br />
of this last volume of sapiential texts from 4Q. In <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxvi)<br />
Strugnell and Harrington explain <strong>the</strong> history of this edition and<br />
acknowledge <strong>the</strong> contributions of scholars. General Introduction<br />
(1ñ40) informs about manuscripts and <strong>the</strong>ir relation. The Hebrew title<br />
of this work may be rendered as ìInstruction for a MAVEN / Studentî.<br />
The editorial principles are modified due to preservation of manuscripts.<br />
The contents of major fragments are analysed (8ñ17).<br />
Lifeñsetting (19ñ22) is considered as non-sectarian; <strong>the</strong> same conclusion<br />
is based on observations of language (22ñ32). This work can be<br />
located, as concerns purpose and time, between Proverbs and Sirach<br />
(36). Select bibliography (36ñ40) informs also about related texts.<br />
A. Instruction, <strong>by</strong> J. Strugnell and D. J. Harrington. General Introduction<br />
(1ñ40), v. supra. 4Q415 Instruction a (41ñ71, pls. IñII,<br />
32 frgs.). This manuscript from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> first century<br />
B. C. E. contains cosmological and paraenetic passages. 4Q416 b<br />
(73ñ141, pls. IIIñVII, 22 frgs). 4Q417 c (143ñ210, pls. VIIIñXI,<br />
29 frgs.). 4Q418 d (211ñ474, pls. XIIñXXVII, 303 frgs). Many fragments<br />
can be only doubtfully identified. 4Q418a e (475ñ495, pls.,<br />
XVIIIñXIX, 25 frgs). 4Q418b Text with Quotation from Psalm 107?<br />
(497ñ499, pl. XXIX, 2 frgs). 4Q418c Instruction f ? (501ñ503,<br />
pl. XXIX, 1 frg.).<br />
All <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts are provided with notes of readings and detailed<br />
comments. In translations italics are used for words reflecting<br />
uncertain readings or problematic interpretation. As it is common in<br />
this series, <strong>the</strong> alineations of <strong>the</strong> translation correspond to those in <strong>the</strong><br />
94
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
manuscript; some stichometric divisions are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters<br />
at <strong>the</strong>ir beginning, to indicate <strong>the</strong> poetic structuring (cf. 7). For<br />
a collection of manuscripts with many mutual parallels a complete reconstruction<br />
of <strong>the</strong> entire work would be welcome. Users of this well<br />
substantiated edition can find help in notes pointing to composite text.<br />
B. Instruction, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: 4Q423 Instruction g (505ñ533, pls.<br />
XXXñXXXI, 24 frgs.) was written probably in <strong>the</strong> early first century<br />
C. E.<br />
C. Appendix, <strong>by</strong> J. Strugnell and D. Harrington: 1Q25 IQ Instruction<br />
(Re-edition) (535ñ539, 5 frgs.). This manuscript was previously<br />
published <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik in DJD I (101ñ102, pl. XX), in 1955. The<br />
new presentation sometimes differs from <strong>the</strong> edition in DJD I.<br />
Concordance again prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann (541ñ584) refers<br />
to Hebrew words in 4Q texts covered <strong>by</strong> this volume.<br />
Effective operation of ten editors and participation of J. A. Fitzmyer<br />
as consultant have provided reliable access to <strong>the</strong> important<br />
sapiential texts in two volumes, opening way to fur<strong>the</strong>r research,<br />
3.1.17ñ18 Poetry and Liturgy<br />
3.1.17.<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XI. ñ Qumran Cave 4ñVI. Poetical<br />
and Liturgical Texts, Part 1. By Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Hanan Eshel, Carol<br />
Newsom, Bilhah Nitzan, Eileen Schuller and Ada Yardeni. ISBN<br />
0-19-826880-5. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998. x + 473 pp., plates<br />
IñXXXII.<br />
The fast sequence of editions was made possible thanks to extended<br />
team of editors, of different backgrounds. Four editors of this<br />
volume are active in Israel, two in America. All six editors are ladies,<br />
as is Monica L. W. Brady, who served as consulting editor in cooperation<br />
with James C. VanderKam. Foreword (ix) was written <strong>by</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>se two consulting editors. Only 4Q texts are published in this first<br />
volume of poetical and liturgical texts. This volume was produced in<br />
camera-ready form at <strong>the</strong> University of Notre Dame (Notre Dame,<br />
Indiana). Manuscripts are presented in four sections, AñD. Concordances<br />
(427ñ473) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann are arranged according to <strong>the</strong>se<br />
sections.<br />
95
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
A. Berakhot, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: The texts 4Q286ñ290 contain liturgical<br />
blessings and curses; <strong>the</strong>ir structure and contents are presented in<br />
<strong>the</strong> introduction (1ñ5) on tables. Also ceremonial laws are represented.<br />
4Q286 Berakhot a (7ñ48, pls., IñIV, 20 frgs.) from about<br />
50 C. E. is exactly described (7ñ9). The laws of leprosy are reconstructed<br />
in <strong>the</strong> appendix (46ñ48). 4Q287 b (49ñ60, pls.VñVI, 10 frgs.).<br />
4Q288 c (61ñ65, pl. VII, 3 frgs). 4Q289 d (67ñ71, pl. VII, 3 frgs.).<br />
4Q290 e (73ñ74, pl. VII, 1 frg.).<br />
B. Non-Canonical Psalms, <strong>by</strong> E. Schuller: This edition is based on<br />
<strong>the</strong> doctoral dissertation of <strong>the</strong> editor, published in 1986 (cf. ix),<br />
Non-Canonical Psalms of Qumran. 4Q389 (75ñ85, pl. VIII, 7 frgs.)<br />
is a collection of psalms not known from o<strong>the</strong>r sources. ñ 4Q381 B<br />
(87ñ172, pls. IXñXV, 110 frgs) is a collection of psalms ascribed to<br />
biblical figures.<br />
C. Shirot ëOlat HaShabbat, <strong>by</strong> C. Newsom: This edition is based<br />
on <strong>the</strong> doctoral dissertation, published in 1985, Songs of <strong>the</strong> Sabbath<br />
Sacrifice. This edition contains 8 texts from Qumran cave 4,<br />
4Q400ñ407, and <strong>the</strong> text from Masada, 1k. The manuscript from<br />
cave 11, 11Q17, is published in DJD XXIII (259ñ304; cf. supra<br />
3.1.6). 4Q400 a (173ñ196, pl. XVI, 7 frgs.) has in frg. 1 <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />
of <strong>the</strong> first song, written in elevated prose.<br />
4Q401 b (197ñ219, pls., XVIIñXVIII, 38 frgs.). 4Q402 c (221ñ237,<br />
pl. XVIII, 11 frgs.) 1k. MasShirot ëOlat HaShabbat (239ñ252,<br />
pl. XIX, columns IñII) was found at Masada during <strong>the</strong> first season ñ<br />
1963/64 ñ of excavation. The column II overlaps with 4Q403. Formulaic<br />
pattern of <strong>the</strong> Psalms of Seven Chief Princes is reconstructed<br />
and commented (249ñ252). 4Q403 d (253ñ292, pl. XX, 3 frgs.) contains<br />
on frg. 1 46 relatively well preserved lines. 4Q404 e (293ñ305,<br />
pl. XXI, 24 frgs.}. 4Q405 f (307ñ393, pls. XXIIñXXX, 105 frgs.).<br />
Sequence of fragments is reconstructed in columns AñM, songs 6ñ12<br />
(312ñ315). Fragments 24ñ105 could be assigned. 4Q406 8 (395ñ398,<br />
pl. XXXI, 5 frgs). 4Q407 h (399ñ401, pl. XXXI, 2 frgs.)<br />
D. Apocryphal Psalms and Prayer, <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel, H. Eshel and<br />
A. Yardeni: 4Q448 (403ñ425, pl. XXXII, columns IñIII) includes a<br />
prayer for King Jonathan ñ Alexander Jannaeus, 103ñ76 B. C. E. The<br />
script was influenced <strong>by</strong> Aramaic script, cf. drawings of letters<br />
(406ñ408).<br />
96
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Texts in this volume, carefully edited and commented, provide<br />
a reliable basis for study of Hebrew poetry in period preceding <strong>the</strong><br />
beginning of Christianity.<br />
3.1.18 Poetry and Liturgy<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXIX.ñQumran Cave 4ñXX. Poetical<br />
and Liturgical Texts, Part 2. By Es<strong>the</strong>r Chazon, Torleif Elgvin,<br />
Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Daniel Falk, Bilhah Nitzan, Elisha Qimron, Eileen<br />
Schuller, David Seely, Eibert Tigchelaar and Moshe Weinfeld.<br />
ISBN 0-19-827005-4. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1999. xiv + 478 pp.,<br />
plates IñXXVII, foldout plates IñIII.<br />
This collection was prepared <strong>by</strong> ten editors, in consultation with<br />
James VanderKam and Monica Brady. It is based in part on earlier<br />
transcriptions and comments <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell. Emanuel Tov explains<br />
in foreword (xviii) that this volume is <strong>the</strong> final one containing<br />
poetical and liturgical texts. And he evaluates those who co-operated<br />
on this edition. The texts are presented in 12 sections, denoted <strong>by</strong><br />
letters AñL.<br />
A. Curses, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q280 (1ñ8, pl. I, 3 frgs.) are directed<br />
towards Melki-reöa and toward those who plot evil against <strong>the</strong> Covenant<br />
of God.<br />
B. Works Containing Prayers, <strong>by</strong> B. Nitzan: 4Q291 A (9ñ14,<br />
3 frgs). 4Q292 B (15ñ18, 2 frgs.). 4Q293 C (19ñ22, 3 frg.). All reproduced<br />
on pl. I.<br />
C. Works of God and Communal Confession, <strong>by</strong> D. Falk: Introduction<br />
(23ñ24) demonstrates that that 4Q392 and 4Q393 belong to<br />
one scroll which contained at least two different compositions. 4Q392<br />
Works of God (25ñ44, pls. IIñIII, 11 frgs.) is a poem resembling to<br />
<strong>the</strong> Hodayot. 4Q393 Communal Confession (45ñ61, pls. IIñIII,<br />
9 frgs.) refers to <strong>the</strong> sin of <strong>the</strong> fa<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
D. Liturgical Work, <strong>by</strong> E. Qimron: 4Q409 A (63ñ67. pl. IV, 4 frgs)<br />
expresses praise on <strong>the</strong> days of festivals.<br />
E. Hodayot, <strong>by</strong> E. Schuller: Introduction relates 4Q427ñ432 to<br />
1QH and 1Q35, also on a table (72ñ73). Within <strong>the</strong>se Thanksgiving<br />
Psalms <strong>the</strong> ìHeidelberg schoolî distinguishes ìHymns of <strong>the</strong> Teacherî<br />
and ìHymns of <strong>the</strong> Communityî (cf. 74ñ75). 4Q427 Hodayot a<br />
97
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
(77ñ123, pls. IVñVI, foldout pl. I, 22 frgs.,) contains psalms in an<br />
order different from that in 1QH. The drawing of <strong>the</strong> reconstructed<br />
scroll is presented on foldout plate. Relations to 1QH and variants<br />
from it are listed (78, 81ñ82, 87). 4Q428 b (125ñ175, pls. VIIñXI,<br />
foldout pl. II, 69 frgs). 4Q429 c (177ñ194, XIñXII, foldout pl. II, 6<br />
frgs.). 4Q430 d (195ñ198, pl. XII, 1 frg.). 4Q431 e (199ñ208, pls.<br />
XIIñXXVIII, foldout pl. III, 2 frgs.). 4Q432 4QpapHodayot f<br />
(209ñ232, pls. XIIIñXIV, foldout pl. III). Texts mostly parallel to<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r Hodayot manuscripts.<br />
Three Hodayotñlike texts: 4Q433 A (233ñ236, pl. XV, 4 frg.).<br />
4Q433a 4Qpap B (237ñ245, pl. XV, 3 frgs.). 4Q440 C (247ñ254, pl.<br />
XVI, 3 frgs.).<br />
F. Barki Nafshi, <strong>by</strong> M. Weinfeld and D. Seely: Introduction to<br />
4Q434ñ438 (255ñ265) explains <strong>the</strong> title attested at <strong>the</strong> beginning of<br />
4Q434, ìBless, O my soul, <strong>the</strong> Lord.î The manuscripts are mutually<br />
related. The large fragments presented in English translation are conveniently<br />
arranged in poetic lines (261ñ265). Texts: 4Q434 a<br />
(267ñ286, pls. XVIIñXIX, 15 frgs.). 4Q435 b (287ñ293, pl. XX, 5<br />
frgs.). 4Q436 c (295ñ305, pl. XXI, 2 frgs,). 4Q437 d (307ñ325, pls.<br />
XXIIñXXIII, 10 frgs). 4Q438 e (327ñ334, pls. XXIIIñXXIV, 11 frgs.).<br />
G. Lament <strong>by</strong> a Leader, <strong>by</strong> M. Weinfeld and D, Seely: 4Q439<br />
(335ñ341, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). The author laments faults of his people.<br />
H. Prayers, <strong>by</strong> E. Chazon: 4Q441 Individual Thanksgiving<br />
(343ñ344, pl. XXV, 1 frg.) 4Q442 B (345, pl. XXV, 1 frg.). 4Q443<br />
Personal Prayer (347ñ366, pl. XXV, 13 frgs.). 4Q444 Incantation<br />
(367ñ378, pl. XXVI, 4 frgs.).<br />
I. Poetic Fragments, <strong>by</strong> E. Tigchelaar: 4Q445 Lament A (379ñ384,<br />
pl. XXVI, 8 frgs.). 4Q446 Poetic Text A (385ñ388, pl. XXVI, 3 frgs.<br />
4Q447 B (389ñ390, pl. XXVI, 1 frg.).<br />
J. Prayers, <strong>by</strong> E. Chazon: Prayers on pl. XVII, 4Q449 A?<br />
(391ñ393), 4Q450 B? (395ñ397), 4Q451 C (399ñ400), 4Q452 D?<br />
(401), 4Q453 Lament B (403), 4Q454 Prayer E? (405ñ406), 4Q456<br />
Halleluyah (407ñ408), 4Q457a Creation? and 4Q457b Eschatological<br />
Hymn (409ñ419), on palimpsest. (Fragments: 2 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 2;<br />
2+2).<br />
K. Self-Glorification Hymn, <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel: 4Q471b (421ñ432, pl.<br />
XXVIII, 4 frgs.). The speaker is identified as <strong>the</strong> eschatological high<br />
98
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
priest, with reference to 1QSb; <strong>the</strong> hymn was probably composed to<br />
remember <strong>the</strong> Teacher of Righteousness. 4Q471c Prayer Concerning<br />
God and Israel (433ñ435, pl. XXVIII, 2 frgs.).<br />
L. Liturgical Works, <strong>by</strong> T. Elgvin: 4Q476 Liturgical Work<br />
A (437ñ443, pl. XXVIII, 3 frgs.), 4Q476a (445ñ446, pl. XXVIII,<br />
2frgs.).<br />
Concordance (447ñ 478) was prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann. Plates<br />
are supplemented <strong>by</strong> foldout plates IñIII on 5 sheets, presenting reconstruction<br />
of manuscripts 4Q427ñ 429 and 4Q432. Fragmentary<br />
texts are published with efficient care, in most userñfriendly manner.<br />
3.1.19 Community Rule<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXVI. Qumran Cave 4ñXIX.<br />
Serekh ha-Yaḥad and Two Related Texts. By Philip S. Alexander and<br />
Geza Vermes. ISBN 0-19-826981-1. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998.<br />
xviii + 253 pp., pls. IñXXIV.<br />
This excellent edition of 4Q manuscripts of <strong>the</strong> central Qumran<br />
text was prepared <strong>by</strong> two British scholars. Geza Vermes of <strong>the</strong> University<br />
of Oxford published previously works on Dead Sea Scrolls;<br />
The Dead Sea Scrolls in English appeared in fourth edition in†1995<br />
(reviewed in CV 40, 1998, 46ñ49). In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov<br />
informs about <strong>the</strong> intensive preparation, and about <strong>the</strong> copy editing in<br />
Jerusalem. The editors explain in <strong>the</strong> preface (xiii) that many problems<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Community Rule, <strong>the</strong> most fundamental of <strong>the</strong> scrolls,<br />
remained unsolved; thus <strong>the</strong>y adopted <strong>the</strong> maximalist approach towards<br />
restoration. Their principles are presented in <strong>the</strong> general introduction<br />
to 4Q255ñ264 (1ñ25). Parallels to 4QS ñ S is abbreviation<br />
for Serekh ñ in 1QS are listed, as are those to 1QS in 4QS. Physical<br />
form and format of <strong>the</strong> S manuscripts are described (4ñ7, table on<br />
pp. 18ñ19). Also palaeography and orthography (7ñ9) are well apparent<br />
(table on pp. 20ñ21). The letters of manuscripts are reproduced<br />
in drawings (table on pp. 22ñ23); <strong>the</strong> dates of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts<br />
can be set with <strong>the</strong>ir help approximately between 125 B. C. E. and<br />
50 C. E. (cf. table on p. 24).<br />
The comparison of S manuscripts points to evolution of <strong>the</strong> text.<br />
Four recessions can be supposed (9ñ12). Publications of S texts are<br />
99
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
traced since 1951, with special attention to <strong>the</strong> recent editions<br />
(10ñ13). The principles of this edition are explained (15ñ17): Maximalist<br />
restoration and reconstruction of <strong>the</strong> texts is applied. In notes<br />
on readings previous attempts are critically discussed. The comments<br />
deal with <strong>the</strong> variants. The introductions of manuscripts inform about<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir forms. Ten manuscripts of 4QSerekh ha-Yahad, 4Q255ñ264,<br />
are published according to <strong>the</strong>se principles. They fit well to <strong>the</strong> arrangement<br />
usual in o<strong>the</strong>r DJD volumes. The unidentified fragments<br />
are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters.<br />
4Q255 a (27ñ38, pl. I, frgs. 1ñ2, AñB) from about 100 B. C. E. is<br />
written on papyrus in crude, early cursive. 4Q256 b (39ñ64, pls. IIñV,<br />
8 frgs.), written in early Herodian formal hand before <strong>the</strong> beginning<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Christian era, is only partially preserved; only 9 from originally<br />
23 columns could be reconstructed. 4Q257 c (65ñ83, pls. VIñIX,<br />
frgs. 1ñ3, A) is written on papyrus. 4Q258 d (83ñ128, pls. XñXIII,<br />
7 frgs.) is written in script similar to that of 4QS b /256. 4Q259 e<br />
(129ñ152, pls. XIVñXVI, frgs.1ñ4, AñB). 4Q260 f (153ñ167, pl.<br />
XVII, 5 frgs.). 4Q261 g (169ñ187, pls. XVIIIñXIX, frgs. lñ6, AñC).<br />
4Q262 h (184ñ191, pl. XX, frg. l, AñB). 4Q263 i (197ñ200, pl. XXI,<br />
1 frg.). 4Q264 (201ñ206, pl. XXI, 1 frg.).<br />
This short survey gives some ideas about <strong>the</strong> fragmentary character<br />
of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts and <strong>the</strong> demanding task of <strong>the</strong>ir edition. Parallels<br />
with 1QS and with o<strong>the</strong>r 4QS texts are listed, some in tables. Two<br />
related texts (207ñ223) were previously in part published and discussed.<br />
4Q275 Communal Ceremony (209ñ216, pl. XXII, 3 frgs.)<br />
contains remains of a rule, probably for <strong>the</strong> annual festival for <strong>the</strong><br />
renewal of <strong>the</strong> covenant. 4Q279 Four Lots (217ñ223, pl. XXIII,<br />
5 frgs.) refers to <strong>the</strong> assignments of rewards in <strong>the</strong> messianic Age.<br />
Appendix: lQ28b. 1QSerekh ha-Yaḥad b (fragment), <strong>by</strong> G. J. Brooke<br />
(227ñ233, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). W. H. Brownlee received this fragment<br />
from Archbishop Athanasios Samuel of Jerusalem in 1994. It was<br />
published in 1994 in Claremont (cf. <strong>the</strong> review in CV 36, 1994,<br />
265ñ266). It belongs to 1QSB 25, col. V, 22ñ25).<br />
Concordances (235ñ253) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann refer to<br />
words in 4Q 255ñ264 (236ñ252), 4Q 275 (253), and 4Q279 (253). In<br />
this careful edition with many notes and comments <strong>the</strong> fragmentary<br />
4QS texts are related to <strong>the</strong> more complete 1QS. The basic work of<br />
100
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
<strong>the</strong> community is better accessible. This edition of 4QS will be effectively<br />
and gratefully used for <strong>the</strong> study of Community Rule and its<br />
influence.<br />
A few notes may be added: The material from 4QS is cited in <strong>the</strong><br />
critical apparatus of <strong>the</strong> edition of Rule of <strong>the</strong> Community (1QS) <strong>by</strong><br />
E. Qimron and J. H. Charlesworth, v. pp. 4 and 6ñ51 in J. H. Charlesworth,<br />
ed., The Dead Sea Scrolls ñ Hebrew, Aramaic and Greek<br />
Texts with English Translations, vol. 1 (T¸bingen/Louisville 1994) ñ<br />
(reviewed in CV 36, 1994, 260ñ265). The Hebrew title of <strong>the</strong> work<br />
Serekh ha-Yahad is appropriately rendered as ìCommunity Ruleî.<br />
The Czech translation ÿ·d Jednoty is more exact. The Hebrew word<br />
is related to numeral ìoneî, as is <strong>the</strong> Czech rendering, and also English<br />
unity, cf. S. Segert, ìThe Unity of <strong>the</strong> New Covenant ñ The Unity<br />
of Brethren. (A Comparison of Two Religious Communities)î,<br />
pp. 71ñ80 ñ esp. p. 73 and n. 34 ñ in Jewish Studies ñ Essays in<br />
Honour of <strong>the</strong> Very Reverend Dr Gustav Sicher Chief Rabbi of Prague<br />
(Prague 1955). The exact title is attested in <strong>the</strong> print of 1609 ìÿ·d<br />
cÌrkevnÌ Jednoty Brat¯Ì »esk˝chî ñ Latin ìRatio disciplinae ordinisque<br />
ecclesiastici in Unitate Fratrum Bohemorumî. The reviewer<br />
expresses appreciation for this information to Martin Wernisch.<br />
3.1.20 Various Hebrew Texts<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXV ñ Qumran grotte<br />
4ñXVIII. Textes HÈbreux (4Q521ñ 4O579). Par …mile Puech. ISBN<br />
0-19-826948-X. Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998. xviii + 229 pp.,<br />
planches IñXV, figures 1 a 2.<br />
This volume, edited <strong>by</strong> …mile Puech, Director of Research at Centre<br />
National de la Recherche Scientifique in Paris, is dedicated to <strong>the</strong><br />
memory of Jean Starcky. Puech wrote <strong>the</strong> article about Starcky<br />
(1909ñ1988) for Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls (v. infra 7.12),<br />
pp. 891ñ892. Jean Starcky was living with his fa<strong>the</strong>r for short time in<br />
Prague. AbbÈ Starcky was most helpful to this reviewer doing research<br />
in Syria in 1963ñ64. Only a few pages of this volume are in<br />
English. Emanuel Tov explains in <strong>the</strong> foreword v (xi) that <strong>the</strong> texts<br />
were originally allotted to Starcky. The concordance is introduced in<br />
English (213 Editions of 12 Hebrew texts are translated and com-<br />
101
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
mented in French (1ñ211), as is <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxvi). Puech describes<br />
<strong>the</strong> demanding work on <strong>the</strong> Hebrew fragments. The texts are<br />
Qumran Essene, except 4Q528 and 4Q576. Aramaic manuscripts<br />
have to be published in ano<strong>the</strong>r volume ñ DJD XXXI. V. infra, 3.1.24.<br />
4Q521 Apocalypse messianique (1ñ38, pls. IñIII, 16 frgs.) was<br />
composed probably in <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E., perhaps<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Teacher. 4Q522 ProphÈtie de JosuÈ (39ñ73, pls. IVñV,<br />
25 frgs.). On frgs. 22ñ25 Psalm 122 is quoted (cf. DJD XVI, pp.<br />
169ñ170). 4Q523 Jonathan (75ñ83, pl. VI, 5 frgs.). The name<br />
YHWNTN on frgs. 1ñ2, line 2, denotes <strong>the</strong> Maccabean leader of <strong>the</strong><br />
middle of <strong>the</strong> 2 nd cent. B. C. E. 4Q524 Rouleau de Temple (85ñ114,<br />
pls. VIIñVIII, figures 1ñ2, 39 frgs.), written in semi-cursive script<br />
about 150ñ125 B. C. E., is probably <strong>the</strong> oldest copy of <strong>the</strong> Temple<br />
Scroll (11Q19ñ20). 4Q525 Beatitudes (115ñ178, pls. IXñXIII,<br />
50 frgs.) was composed and partially written in poetic form. 4Q526<br />
Testament(?) (179ñ181, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q527 Ouvrage liturgique<br />
(183ñ185, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q528 Ouvrage hymnique ou sapiential B<br />
(187ñ190, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). 4Q576 Genese n (191ñ193, pl. XV, 2 frgs.).<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r Genesis manuscripts from 4Q are listed, Gn a ñGn m (191). 4Q577<br />
Texte mentionnant le Deluge (196ñ203, pl. XV, 8 frgs.). 4Q578 Composition<br />
historique B (205ñ208, pl. XV, 1 frg.), concerning Ptolemaios.<br />
4Q579 Ouvrage hymnique(?) (209ñ211, pl. XV, 3 frgs.).<br />
In concordance (213ñ229) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann words from<br />
all texts are listed toge<strong>the</strong>r. Photographs of fragments are presented<br />
on plates IñXV. On verso of plate XV drawings of 4Q524 fragments<br />
6ñ13 and 15ñ22 on reconstructed lines are offered. The editions of<br />
fragmentary manuscripts are arranged similarly to <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r 4Q volumes.<br />
Puech is offering detailed evaluations and comments. In paragraphs<br />
on palaeography all letters are characterised. Dating is based<br />
mostly on palaeographic criteria. Due attention is devoted to <strong>the</strong> use<br />
of letters W and Y for indicating long vowels. In <strong>the</strong> characteristics of<br />
mostly poetic texts typical prose words are traced and counted. At <strong>the</strong><br />
end of some manuscript editions-conclusions about genre and about<br />
origin ñ mostly Qumran Essene ñ are presented. …mile Puech published<br />
<strong>the</strong>se difficult texts in clear and reliable manner. His analyses<br />
will be highly appreciated, even as he himself mentions that <strong>the</strong>y may<br />
be criticised as too detailed (cf. xv). Puech offers valuable observa-<br />
102
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
tions and evaluations as well as suggestions for fur<strong>the</strong>r research of<br />
<strong>the</strong>se texts and <strong>the</strong>ir connections.<br />
3.1.21 Texts from various sites<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXVIII.†ñ Miscellaneous Texts<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert. By James Charlesworth, Nahyan Cohen,<br />
Hannah M. Cotton, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Peter Flint, Haggai Misgav, Mat<strong>the</strong>w<br />
Morgenstern, Ca<strong>the</strong>rine Murphy, Michael Segal, Ada Yardeni<br />
and Boaz Zissu, in consultation with James VanderKam and Monica<br />
Brady. ISBN 0-19-924261-5. Oxford: Clarendon Press 2000.<br />
xviii + 250 pp., figures 1ñ26, plates IñXXXVI.<br />
This volume is different from most volumes of <strong>the</strong> series. While in<br />
nearly all volumes finds from only one site are presented, in this<br />
volume manuscripts and objects from six sites are published. Manuscripts<br />
and objects are reproduced in drawings on figures and in photographs<br />
on plates. Texts in three languages, Hebrew, Aramaic, and<br />
Greek are presented. This difference is reflected at <strong>the</strong> lists of words:<br />
Two concordances prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann (241ñ246) are distinguished,<br />
Hebrew (242ñ243) and Aramaic (243ñ246). Indices to <strong>the</strong><br />
Greek Documentary Texts (247ñ250), prepared <strong>by</strong> N. Cohen, are arranged<br />
according to kind of words, names, special terms, numbers,<br />
general words. In foreword (xvñxvii) Emanuel Tov lists <strong>the</strong> sites from<br />
which texts were published in <strong>the</strong> DJD volumes. The finds <strong>by</strong> Israeli<br />
archaeological missions at o<strong>the</strong>r sites are published elsewhere (cf. xv,<br />
notes 1ñ2). Texts in <strong>the</strong> volume XXXVIII are arranged according to<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir sites in sections AñF, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>by</strong> numbers. In <strong>the</strong> following<br />
survey Hebrew biblical manuscripts will be indicated first, <strong>the</strong>n o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
texts, Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek.<br />
A. Keter Jericho (1ñ113, figures 1ñ26, plates IñXXXI). ñ Archaeological<br />
Introduction (3ñ20, fig. 1ñ15, pl. IñV), <strong>by</strong> E. Eshel and<br />
B. Zissu. Keter Jericho (v. Joshua 18:12) is a ridge one kilometre<br />
west of Jericho. Texts and objects were discovered in caves during<br />
<strong>the</strong> excavations in 1986 and 1993. Various finds were recovered.,<br />
from different periods, from Chalcolitic to present. The site, plans of<br />
caves, artefacts, and pottery are described and reproduced on figures<br />
and plates. All texts from <strong>the</strong> Jericho area written on papyrus. They<br />
103
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
are numbered 1ñ19 (21ñ113, fig 16ñ24, pls. VIñXXI). Texts 8ñ15<br />
were edited <strong>by</strong> A. Yardeni. E. Eshel, H. Eshel, and H. Misgav participated<br />
on edition of Aramaic texts, 1ñ3, 6ñ7. Greek texts were edited<br />
<strong>by</strong> N. Cohen: 4ñ5, 19; and H. M. Cotton: 16ñ18. 11. papDeed or Letter<br />
(73ñ75, fig. 23, pl. XV) concerning a house is written in Hebrew.<br />
Three texts from <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. are indicated as heb?:<br />
9. papDeed A (67ñ69, fig. 21ñ22, pl. XIIIñXIV) is not well legible.<br />
10. papDeed B (71ñ72, fig. 22, pl. XIV) contains only a few legible<br />
words. 14. papUnclassified Text (81ñ82, fig. 24, pl. XVI) consists of<br />
two small fragments. Some Hebrew and some Aramaic small early<br />
illegible fragments from <strong>the</strong> 1 st or 2 nd century C. E. are published as<br />
15. papUnqlassified Fragments (83ñ89, fig, 24ñ25, pl. XVIñXVIII).<br />
Aramaic papyri: 1. papList of Loans ar (21ñ30, fig. 16ñ17, pl.<br />
VIñVII), written in formal cursive script, contains names and sums of<br />
money. 2. papDeed of Sale or Lease ar (31ñ36, fig. 18, pl. VIII) concerns<br />
a field. 3. papDeed of Sale ar (37ñ41, fig. 18, pl. VIII).<br />
6. papUnidentified Texts ar (53ñ54, pl. XII): 5 fragments. 7. pap Sale<br />
of Date Crop ar (55ñ62, fig. 19ñ20, pl. XIñXII) is a double document<br />
from <strong>the</strong> 3 rd year of <strong>the</strong> Roman Emperor Domitianus, i.e. 84 C. E.<br />
8. papDeed A ar (63ñ65, fig. 21, pl. XIII: 5 fragments. ñ 12. papDeed<br />
B ar (77ñ78, fig. 23, pl. XV). 13. papUnclassified Text ar (79ñ80, fig.<br />
23, pl. XV) is dated on <strong>the</strong> 18 th year of Emperor Traianus, i.e.<br />
116 C. E. The photographs of <strong>the</strong>se texts are difficult to read, <strong>the</strong><br />
letters are better legible in <strong>the</strong> drawings <strong>by</strong> A. Yardeni on <strong>the</strong> figures.<br />
Greek texts are transliterated and provided with diacritical marks.<br />
Texts 4ñ5e are introduced <strong>by</strong> N. Cohen (43). Fragments año are<br />
grouped and measured. 4. papDeed of Sale or Lease? gr (45ñ47,<br />
pl. IX) is preserved on 4 fragments. 5añd. papUnidentified Texts(s)<br />
gr (49ñ50, pl. X). 5e. papTransaction Concerning Seeds gr (51ñ52,<br />
pl. XI). 19ñ19h.Introduction (101) informs about fragments concerning<br />
measurements and groups. 19. papWritten Order? gr (103ñ105,<br />
pl. XXñXXI). 19b. papList of Witnesses? gr (109, pl. XXñXXI). 19a.<br />
papUnidentified Text A gr (107, pl. XXñXXI). 19cñh. papUnidentified<br />
Texts B gr (111ñ113, pl. XXñXXI). 16. papText Mentioning<br />
<strong>the</strong> Emperor Hadrian gr (93ñ95, pl. XVIII), written on 1 May<br />
128 C. E. 17. papDeed? gr (97, pl. XIX). 18. papFiscal Acknowledgement<br />
gr (99ñ100, pl. XIX).<br />
104
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
B. Wadi Sdeir (115ñ129). The valley is located west from Ein Gedi<br />
(cf. map, fig. 1). 1. Sdeir Genesis (117ñ124, pl. XXII. G. Murphy.<br />
Two fragmentary columns from <strong>the</strong> second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st<br />
century C. E. 2. papPromissory Note? ar (125ñ129, fig. 26, pl.<br />
XXIII). A. Yardeni. The document was written probably in 135 C. E.<br />
3. and 4. Unidentified Text A and B are presented only on photographs<br />
(pl. XXIII and XXIV), cf. viii.<br />
C. Naḥal Ḥever and Naḥal Ḥever/Wadi Seiyal (131ñ200). Sites<br />
located south-west from EinñGedi. Some fragments were found <strong>by</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> Bedouin, some <strong>by</strong> Y. Yadin. Biblical Scrolls: Introductions.<br />
(133ñ135). Scrolls 1ñ4 were originally assigned to J. C. Greenfield;<br />
after he passed away, <strong>the</strong>y were edited <strong>by</strong> P. Flint. 1a. 5/6 HevNumbers<br />
a (137ñ140, pl. XXIV, 4 frg.). 1b 5/6 HevPsalms (141ñ166, pl.<br />
XXVñXXVII), written after 50 C. E. Remains of 18 psalms on eleven<br />
columns, in stichometric format, usually two cola to <strong>the</strong> line. 2. XHev/<br />
SeNumbers b (173ñ177, pl. XXIX). 3. SXHev/SeDeuteronomy<br />
(179ñ182, pl. XXIX). 5. XHev/SePhylactery (183ñ191, pl. XXX).<br />
M. Morgenstern and M. Segal. Relatively well preserved passages<br />
from Exodus and Deuteronomy, in small script. 2 8HevPrayer<br />
(167ñ169, pl. XXVIII), and 6. XHev/SeEschatological Hymn<br />
(193ñ200, pl. XXXI). M. Morgenstern. 4. 8Hev papUnidentified Text<br />
gr (171ñ172, pl. XXVIII). H. M. Cotton.<br />
D. Nahal Mishmar (201ñ204). Located halfway between EinñGedi<br />
and Masada. 2. 1Mish papList of Names and Account gr (203ñ204,<br />
pl. XXXII). H. M. Cotton. E. Nahal Ṣeíelim (205ñ228). Located north<br />
from Masada. M. Morgenstern. 2ñ3. 34 Ṣeíelim: Introduction (207).<br />
The documents were discovered in <strong>the</strong> ìCave of Scrollsî<br />
2. 34SeNumbers (209, pl. XXXIII). 3.34Se papDeed ar (211ñ214,<br />
pl. XXXIV, 12 frg.). H. M. Cotton. 4ñ5.34 Ṣeíelim: Introduction<br />
(215). These and o<strong>the</strong>r texts belonged to Jewish refugee hidden<br />
during <strong>the</strong> Bar Kokhba revolt. 4. 34Se papCensus List from Judaea or<br />
Arabia gr (217ñ225, pls. XXXIVñXXXV, frg. añf). 5. 34Se pap Account<br />
gr (227ñ226, pl. XXXV).<br />
E. Unknown Provenance (229ñ239). 1. XJoshua (231ñ239,<br />
pl. XXXVI). J. Charlesworth. Columns IñIII are related to 4QJosh /<br />
4Q48. Figures: (cf. xiñxii) 1. Map of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Region. 2ñ6. Plans<br />
of caves. 7ñ15. Pottery and artefacts. 16ñ26. Texts and scripts. Plates<br />
105
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
(cf. xiiiñxiv): IñV. Keter Jericho, view, caves. VIñXXI. Papyri.<br />
XXIñXXXVI. Texts from sites BñF. The preceding survey shows <strong>the</strong><br />
variety of sites and finds. The texts were carefully edited <strong>by</strong> 12 editors,<br />
mostly from Israel. Non-biblical texts are provided with translations.<br />
In comments <strong>the</strong>re are many references to texts from o<strong>the</strong>r sites<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea area. This collection supplements previous editions<br />
from sites between Qumran and Masada. Some texts were published<br />
in <strong>the</strong> DJD series, volumes VIII and XXVII (reviewed in CV 41,<br />
1999, 155ñ159). O<strong>the</strong>r editions of finds from this area are mentioned<br />
(xv, n. 2). Most texts are from <strong>the</strong> ìPost-Qumranî period, <strong>the</strong>y are in<br />
spite of <strong>the</strong>ir mostly fragmentary preservation important sources for<br />
<strong>the</strong> study of history, especially of <strong>the</strong> time of Bar Kokhba war.<br />
3.1.22 Miscellanea, 1<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXVI ñ Qumran Cave 4 XXVI.<br />
Cryptic Texts <strong>by</strong> Stephen J. Pfann and Miscellanea, Part 1 <strong>by</strong> Philip<br />
Alexander, Magen Broshi, Es<strong>the</strong>r Chazon, Hannah Cotton, Frank<br />
Moore Cross, Torleif Elgvin, Doro<strong>the</strong>e Ernst, Es<strong>the</strong>r Eshel, Hanan<br />
Eshel, Joseph Fitzmyer, Florentine GarcÌa MartinÈz, Jonas C. Greenfield,<br />
Menachem Kister, Armin Lange, Erik Larson, AndrÈ Lemaire,<br />
Timothy Lim, Joseph Naveh, Dana Pike, Michael Sokoloff, Hartmut<br />
Stegemann, Annette Steudel, Michael Stone, Loren Stuckenbruck, Shemaryahu<br />
Talmon, Sarah Tanzer, Eibert J. C. Tigchelaar, Emanuel Tov,<br />
Geza Vermes, and Ada Yardeni. ISBN 0-19-827017-8. Oxford: Clarendon<br />
Press 2000. xvi + 739 pp., plates IñXLIX.<br />
This volume is remarkable as it contains many texts, 65 in normal<br />
script and 40 in cryptic script; 31 editors and 2 consultants participated<br />
on its realisation. In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xvñxvi) E. Tov presents<br />
content of three sections: First contains miscellaneous texts, including<br />
reñeditions, second three ostraca from Khirbet Qumran, third<br />
cryptic texts. Participation of individuals and institutions is appreciated.<br />
First section, Miscellanea (1ñ493) contains texts from 4Q (3ñ483)<br />
and unknown origin (484ñ493). 4Q EnochGiants Aramaic texts are<br />
edited <strong>by</strong> L. Stuckenbruck: 4Q103 a (8ñ41, pls. IñII, 13 frgs.), 4Q206<br />
frgs. 2ñ3 f (42ñ48, pl. II); also a text unknown in <strong>the</strong> extant recensions,<br />
106
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
4Q201 frgs. 2ñ8 (107, pl. I). Re-edited texts are presented in 4 appendixes:<br />
1Q23 a (49ñ66). 1Q24 b ? (67ñ72). 2Q26 (73ñ75). 6Q8 pap<br />
(76ñ94). E. J. C. Tigchelaar and F. GarcÌa MartÌnez introduced<br />
40208ñ209 (95ñ103). They belong to <strong>the</strong> ìsynchronistic calendarî,<br />
arranged according to rising of <strong>the</strong> moon. 4Q208 Astronomical<br />
Enoch a ar (104ñ131, pls. IIIñIV, 37 frgs.). 4Q209 b ar (132ñ171, pls.<br />
VñVII, 41 frgs.). By E. Chazon and M. Stone: 4Q215a Time of Righteousness<br />
(172ñ184, pl. VIII, 4 frgs.), a poetic eschatological work.<br />
By A. Yardeni: 4Q234 Exertitium Calami A (185ñ186, pl. IX, 1 frg.).<br />
By M. Broshi: 4Q247 Pesher on <strong>the</strong> Apocalypse of Weeks (187ñ191,<br />
pl. IX, 1 frg.). By M. Broshi and E. Eshel: 4Q248 Historical Text<br />
A (192ñ200, pl. IX, 1 frg.). By H. Stegemann: 4Q269 Damascus<br />
Document d frgs. 10, 11 (Re-edition), 15, 15 (201ñ211, pl. IX). By<br />
J. Fitzmyer: 4Q281añf. Unidentified Fragments A, añf (212ñ215, pl.<br />
X). 4Q282añt B, añt (216ñ227, pls. XñXI). By P. Alexander and<br />
G. Vermes: 4Q285 Sefer ha-Milḥamah (228, pls. XIIñXIII, 10 frgs.),<br />
related to War Scroll 1QM. By E. J. C. Tigchelaar: 4Q294<br />
SapientialñDidactic Work C (247ñ248, pl. XIV, 1 frg.). By T. Lim:<br />
4Q306 Men of <strong>the</strong> People Who Err (249ñ254, pl. XIV, 3 frgs.), a halakhic<br />
text from <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumran period. 4Q307 Text Mentioning<br />
Temple (255ñ258, pl. XIV, 9 frgs.). By J. C. Greenfield and<br />
M. Sokoloff: 4Q318 Zodiology and Brontology ar (259ñ274, pls.<br />
XVñXVI, 7 columns), meteorological omens. By J. Fitzmyer: 4Q33<br />
Historical Text C (275ñ281, pl. XVII, 10 frgs.). 4Q332 D (281ñ286,<br />
pl. XVII, 3 frgs.). 4Q333 E (287ñ289, pl. XVIII, 2 frgs.). By E. Tov:<br />
4Q338 Genealogical List? (290, pl. XIX, illegible). By J. Naveh:<br />
4Q341 Exertitium Calami C (291ñ293, pl. XVIII, 1 frg.). By<br />
H. Cotton: 4Q350 Account gr (294ñ295, pl. XX, 2 frgs.), Greek. By<br />
A. Yardeni: 4Q355 Account ar or heb (296, pl. XX, 2 frgs.), ñ 4Q360<br />
B Exercitium Calami B (297, pl. XX, 1 frg.). By A. Steudel: 4Q408<br />
Apocryphon of Moses c ? (298ñ315, pl. XXI, 17 frgs.), morning and<br />
evening ritual. 4Q410 Vision and Interpretation (316ñ319, pl. XXI,<br />
4trgs.). By S. Tanzer: 4Q419 Instruction-like Composition<br />
A (320ñ332, pl. XXII, 11 frgs.). 4Q424 B (333ñ346, pl. XXIII, 4 + 2<br />
frgs.), collection of wisdom sayings. By A. Lange: 4Q440a<br />
Hodayot-like Text D (347ñ348, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). 4Q440b Fragment<br />
Mentioning a Court (349ñ350, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). By E. Chazon:<br />
107
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
4Q455 Didactic Work C (351ñ352, pl. XXIV, 1 frg.). By E. Larson:<br />
4Q458 Narrative A (353ñ365, pl. XXV, 19 frgs.). 4Q459 Narrative<br />
Work Mentioning Lebanon (366ñ368, pl. XXIV, 19 frgs.). 4Q460<br />
Narrative Work and Prayer (369ñ386, pl. XXVI, lOfrgs.). 4Q461 Narrative<br />
B (387ñ393, pl. XXVII, 5 frgs.). ñ 4Q465 papText Mentioning<br />
Samson? (394ñ395, pl. XXVII, 1 frg.). By D. Pike: 4Q466 Text Mentioning<br />
<strong>the</strong> Congregation of <strong>the</strong> Lord (396ñ397, pl. XXVII, 1 frg.).<br />
4Q467 Text mentioning ìLight to Jacobî 398ñ400, pl. XXVII,<br />
2 frgs.). By M. Broshi: 4Q468añd Unidentified Fragments C, añd<br />
(401ñ405, pl. XXVIII, 4 frgs.). 4Q468e Historical Text F (406ñ411,<br />
pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.), mentioning Ptolais, friend of <strong>the</strong> tetrarch<br />
Archelaus. By A. Lange: 4Q468f Historical Text G (412ñ413,<br />
pl. XXVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q468g Eschatological Work A? (414ñ415,<br />
pl. XVIII, 1 frg.). 4Q468i Sectarian Text? (416ñ417, pl. XXIX,<br />
1 frg.). 4Q468J papUnclassified Fragments (418ñ419, pl. XXIX,<br />
5 frgs.). By D. Ernst and A. Lange: 4Q468k Hymnic Text B?<br />
(420ñ421, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). ñ 4Q4681 Fragment Mentioning Qoh<br />
1:8ñ9 (422, pl. XXIX, 1 frg.). 4Q468mñbb Unidentified Fragments<br />
D, mñbb (423ñ432). By E. Larson: 4Q469 Narrative I (433ñ438,<br />
pl. XXX, 10 frgs.); J. Strugnell made available his transcriptions. Parallels<br />
to 4Q439. By E. Eshel and H. Eshel: 4Q471 WarñScrollñlike<br />
Text B (439ñ445, pl. XXX, 3 frgs.). By E. Eshel and M. Kister:<br />
4Q471q Polemical Texts (446ñ449, pl. XXXI, 1 frg.). By T. Elgvin:<br />
4Q472 Eschatological Work B (450ñ455, pl. XXXI, 2 frgs.). 4Q474<br />
Text Concerning Rachel and Joseph (456ñ463, pl. XXXI, 1 frgs.).<br />
4Q475 Renewed Earth (464ñ473, pl. XXXI, 1 frg.). By E. Eshel:<br />
4Q477 Rebukes Reported <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Overseer (474ñ483, pl. XXXII,<br />
3frgs.).<br />
Qumran Texts of Unknown Origin. ñ They are marked <strong>by</strong> X before<br />
Q. By S. Talmon: XQ5a Text A (= 11Q Jub. frg. 7a) (485ñ486, pl. XII,<br />
1 frg.). XQ5b Text B (= 11Q Hymns b frg. 2) (487ñ468, pl. XXII,<br />
1 frg.). By A. Lemaire, in French: XQ6 Offering ar (490ñ491,<br />
pl. XXII, 1 frg.). By A. Lange: XQ7 Unidentified Text (492ñ493,<br />
pl. XXXII, 1 frg.).<br />
The second section of <strong>the</strong> volume (495ñ512): Ostraca from Khirbet<br />
Qumran. They were found at <strong>the</strong> wall between <strong>the</strong> community centre<br />
and <strong>the</strong> cemetery (497). By F. M. Cross and E. Eshel: KhQ[1]<br />
108
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Ostracon (497ñ507, pl. XXXIII). The shred of a large jar contains<br />
a draft or a copy of a deed of gift. KhQ[2]Ostracon (508, pl. XXXIV).<br />
By E. Eshel: KhQ[3]Ostracon (509ñ512, pl. XXXIV), scribal exercise.<br />
The third section, 3. Cryptic Texts (513ñ701) were edited <strong>by</strong><br />
S. J. Pfann. He provided his edition of texts 4Q249añz and 250añj<br />
with a detailed introduction (515ñ546). Pfann explains <strong>the</strong> arrival of<br />
<strong>the</strong> papyrus fragments to <strong>the</strong> Museum in Jerusalem. J. T. Milik was<br />
assigned <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts in 1955. More than 250 fragments are<br />
analysed and edited (cf. 615ñ516). Physical description (517ñ539)<br />
deals especially with papyrus, its fibres, colours and also with Carbonñ14<br />
dating, pointing to <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century B. C. E. Script styles are<br />
characterised. Letters are described and presented in drawings (cf.<br />
526ñ532). Most community manuscripts written in <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century<br />
B. C. E. were written in cryptic A script. In this early period of <strong>the</strong><br />
community <strong>the</strong> priority of Serekh ha-ëEdah ñ 1QSa, Rule of <strong>the</strong> Congregation<br />
ñ can be observed.<br />
In appendix 1 (534ñ543) a critical edition of this text is presented,<br />
in reconstruction and with translation and analysis. In appendix 2<br />
(544ñ546) on basis of redaction stages of Serekh ha-ëEdah three periods<br />
of development of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community are presented: (1)<br />
initial priests, (2) <strong>the</strong> Teacher of Righteousness, (3) maskilim ñ ìMastersî.<br />
Cryptic A texts 249añz, 250añj, 313, 313a and 313b (547ñ701,<br />
pls. XXXVñXLIX) are edited similarly to o<strong>the</strong>r Hebrew texts, with<br />
transcriptions in standard Hebrew letters. The text 4Q249 Midrash<br />
Sefer Moshe is presented only on photograph (pl. XLIX), with reference<br />
to transcription in DJD XXXV (cf. supra, 3.2.14).<br />
Each text is presented in individual edition; in <strong>the</strong> following survey<br />
texts are listed in groups, without references to pages and plates<br />
of individual editions. Texts are marked as 4Qpap cryptA. 4Q249añi<br />
pap CryptA 4QSerekh ha-ëEdah (547ñ574, pls. XXXVñXXXVII).<br />
Most texts consist from 1 fragment only; 4Q249g (563ñ568) has 7<br />
fragments. Some texts are reconstructed with help of 1QSa. 4Q249j<br />
Leviticus h ? (575ñ568, pl. XXXVII). 4Q249kñl Text Quoting Leviticus<br />
A, B (578ñ582, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249m Hodayotñlike Text E<br />
(583ñ584, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249nño Liturgical Work E?, F?<br />
(585ñ587, pl. XXXVIII). 4Q249p Prophecy? (588ñ589, pl. XXXIX).<br />
109
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
4Q249q Fragment Mentioning <strong>the</strong> Planting (591ñ592, pl. XXXIX).<br />
4Q249rñy Unidentified Text AñH (592ñ602, pls. XXXIXñXL).<br />
4Q249z Miscellaneous Texts A (603ñ677, pls. XLIñXLV). 182 very<br />
small fragments are exactly described. 4Q250ñ250a Text Concerning<br />
Cultic Service A, B? (678ñ681, pl. XLVI). 4Q250b Text Related to<br />
Isaiah 11 (682, pl. XLVI). 4Q250-i Unidentified Text I ñ 0 (683ñ693,<br />
pls. XLVIIñXLVIII). 4Q250J Miscellaneous Texts B (694ñ696, pl.<br />
XLVIII). 4Q313 Miqṣat Ma c asíeh ha-Torah g (697ñ699, pl. XLIX).<br />
4Q313añb Unidentified Text P, Q (700ñ701, pl. XLIX).<br />
Concordances (703ñ739) were prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and G. Pfann: Hebrew<br />
(705ñ725) and Aramaic (726ñ739). Photographs are presented<br />
on plates IñXLIX. Some are slightly enlarged. KhQ[l]Ostracon is reproduced<br />
in a clear drawing (pl. XXXIII). Texts in this volume<br />
XXXVI are presented in a manner corresponding to that in <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
volumes, even as many texts differ in form and in content from <strong>the</strong><br />
majority of Qumran texts. The ostraca from Khirbet Qumran were<br />
written in <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E. in vulgar script, different<br />
from styles used in texts written on skin or papyrus. The appearance<br />
and <strong>the</strong> site of ostraca point to <strong>the</strong>ir marginal role; because of it <strong>the</strong>y<br />
may be used for research of <strong>the</strong> background of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community.<br />
In DJD XXXVI only Cryptic A texts are published, <strong>the</strong> Cryptic<br />
B and C texts are listed ñ 4Q362, 363, 363ab ñ as those to be published<br />
elsewhere (xv). This information does not agree with that in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Study Edition (reviewed in CV 41/1999: 170ñ193) pp. 718ñ719,<br />
according to which <strong>the</strong>se cryptic texts are to be published in DJD<br />
XXXVI. In <strong>the</strong> introduction to <strong>the</strong> cryptic texts (515) it is mentioned<br />
that in 1955 J. T. Milik was assigned <strong>the</strong> manuscripts in esoteric<br />
script. This information is provided with reference to <strong>the</strong> book <strong>by</strong><br />
F. M. Cross, The Library of Qumran (reviewed in CV 40/1998:<br />
64ñ67).where <strong>the</strong> deciphering of <strong>the</strong> script <strong>by</strong> Milik is evaluated<br />
(p. 45).<br />
Cryptic A texts published in DJD XX and XXXV and to be published<br />
in DJD XXI in 2001 are listed in <strong>the</strong> foreword (xv). Thus all<br />
Cryptic A texts will be available. The careful edition <strong>by</strong> S. Pfann can<br />
serve as model for <strong>the</strong> future edition of Cryptic B and C texts. Pfann<br />
has used his Analysis of redaction stages of Serekh ha-ëEdah for<br />
establishing stages of <strong>the</strong> Qumran community (544ñ546). This<br />
110
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
method and its results deserve fur<strong>the</strong>r attention. Large space in <strong>the</strong><br />
section 1 (3ñ171) is devoted to Enoch texts. The importance of Enochic<br />
traditions was discussed <strong>by</strong> G. Boccaccini in his book Beyond<br />
<strong>the</strong> Essene Hypo<strong>the</strong>sis (to be reviewed in ìAccess VI). Some manuscripts<br />
in <strong>the</strong> section 1. Miscellanea supplement <strong>the</strong> evidence from<br />
manuscripts already published, many contain fragments of works<br />
known only from <strong>the</strong>se new finds. The names of editors of <strong>the</strong>se<br />
difficult texts are indicated in contents (viiñix). Information about<br />
institutions in which <strong>the</strong>y are active would be welcome. As <strong>the</strong>se<br />
editors also contributed to Encyclopedia (reviewed in CV, v. infra<br />
7.12), its directory (1057ñ1065) provides basic data. The careful editions<br />
of texts is in many respects difficult in Miscellanea, Part 1, will<br />
be gratefully used. And <strong>the</strong> users can express best wishes for <strong>the</strong><br />
edition of Part 2.<br />
Addition<br />
3.1.23 Parabiblical texts, Part 4<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXX ñ Qumran Cave 4 XXI. Parabiblical<br />
Texts, Part 4. Pseudo-prophetic Texts. By Devorah Dimant.<br />
Partially Based on Earlier Transcriptions <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell.<br />
ISBN 0-19-924542-8. Oxford: Clarendon Press 2001. xiv + 278 pp.,<br />
plates IñXII. Price $ 55.00.<br />
Parabiblical texts, parts 1ñ3, DJD volumes XII, XIV, XXII, were<br />
reviewed previously (v. supra 3.1.11ñ13). While <strong>the</strong>se previous volumes<br />
were edited <strong>by</strong> co-operation of more editors, this volume XXX<br />
was edited <strong>by</strong> one editor, Devorah Dimant, Professor at <strong>the</strong> University<br />
of Haifa. In <strong>the</strong> foreword (xi) Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief, explains<br />
<strong>the</strong> content of this last volume of <strong>the</strong> series: rewriting of books<br />
of Ezekiel and Jeremiah. The co-operation on its production is highly<br />
appreciated. Devorah Dimant wrote <strong>the</strong> preface (xiiiñxiv). She explains<br />
that she was in 1985 invited <strong>by</strong> John Strugnell to work on <strong>the</strong><br />
editing. The complex work was supported <strong>by</strong> persons and institutions<br />
on three continents. In <strong>the</strong> general introduction (1ñ3) <strong>the</strong> process of<br />
work is traced since 1956. The classification of fragments is explained.<br />
The volume XXX contains two works: A. Pseudo-Ezekiel<br />
111
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
(5ñ88, plates IñIII); B. Apocryphon of Jeremiah (89ñ260, plates<br />
IVñXII). The concordance (261ñ278) <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann contains<br />
Hebrew words of both works. Hebrew letters on photographic reproductions<br />
of fragments (plates IñXII) are well legible, even those from<br />
badly damaged originals. Both sections are provided with substantial<br />
introductions (7ñ16; 91ñ116). Physical descriptions, information<br />
about content, orthography and grammar precede <strong>the</strong> Hebrew texts,<br />
notes on readings, translations and comments follow <strong>the</strong>m. In passages<br />
entitled ìAnalysisî various problems are explained and discussed.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> introduction to 4QPseudo-Ezekiel (7ñ16) <strong>the</strong> title given <strong>by</strong><br />
J. Strugnell is explained. Pseudo-Ezekiel has some features not represented<br />
in Apocryphon to Jeremiah, and it does not exhibit sectarian<br />
terminology which is attested with some o<strong>the</strong>r affinities in <strong>the</strong> Apocryphon<br />
of Jeremiah. Six copies of Pseudo-Ezekiel represented in <strong>the</strong><br />
fragments are shortly described. Some contain <strong>the</strong> Vision of <strong>the</strong> Dry<br />
Bones. Language and style of Pseudo-Ezekiel follow <strong>the</strong> canonical<br />
book, grammar and orthography are close to Masoretic tradition.<br />
Some relations to non-sectarian ancient Jewish literature can be observed.<br />
And some affinities concerning resurrection can be seen in<br />
early Christian literature. Nearly all copies of Pseudo-Ezekiel were<br />
written in <strong>the</strong> half century before <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> Christian era.<br />
The composition of Pseudo-Ezekiel fits well in mid-second century<br />
B. C. E. The reorganisation of fragments led to some changes of <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
numbers; <strong>the</strong>y follow now <strong>the</strong> supposed sequences of texts. Unidentified<br />
fragments are marked <strong>by</strong> capital letters. 4Q385 AQPseudo-<br />
Ezekiel a (17ñ51, plate I, fragments 1ñ6) is partially reconstructed in<br />
6 columns (cf. 18). Future resurrection of Israel follows Ezekiel cc.<br />
37ñ38. Analysis (31ñ37) points to interpretative character of<br />
Pseudo-Ezekiel. 4Q386 (53ñ69, pl. II, frgs. 1ñ2) is compared with<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r contemporary texts. Historical personalities and events are identified<br />
(55ñ59). 4Q385b c (71ñ75, pl. Ill, 1 frg.) mentions Egypt.<br />
4Q388 d (77ñ84, pl. Ill, frg. 1ñ7). 4Q385a Unidentified Fragments<br />
(85ñ88, pl. Ill, frgs. AñG).<br />
The introduction to 4QApocryphon of Jeremiah (91ñ116) begins<br />
with identification of <strong>the</strong> work. Six extant copies of Apocryphon of<br />
Jeremiah C are characterised and similar texts mentioned. Some pas-<br />
112
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
sages contain episodes from biblical history, some express events<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, some are probably connected with<br />
eschatological events; cf. sequence table (99ñ100). The prose is written<br />
in biblical style. Biblical locutions are listed as are those known<br />
from Qumran literature. The portrayal of Jeremiah (105ñ107) differs<br />
in some points from biblical model. Apocryphon of Jeremiah is related<br />
to some apocryphal and pseudepigraphic texts, especially to <strong>the</strong><br />
Enochic ones, and also to Qumran texts. In Apocrypha of Jeremiah<br />
events are presented in chronological sequence. This Apocryphon<br />
was composed probably about 125ñ100 B. C. E.<br />
Before Apocryphon of Jeremiah C a similar text, Apocryphon of<br />
Jeremiah A is published. Ano<strong>the</strong>r manuscript 4Q384 4QpapApocryphon<br />
of Jeremiah B? was published <strong>by</strong> M. Smith in DJD XIX, cf.<br />
supra 3.1.12. Also <strong>the</strong> text 4Q470 published in DJD XIX may be<br />
related (95). 4Q383 4QApocryphon of Jeremiah A (117ñ127, pl. IV,<br />
frgs. 1ñ6, AñC) is clearly linked to <strong>the</strong> prophet. 4Q385a 4QApocryphon<br />
of Jeremiah C a (131ñ171, pls. IVñVI, frgs. 1ñ18, AñK) is<br />
<strong>the</strong> largest collection of fragments. 4Q387 b (173ñ199, pls. VIIñVIII,<br />
frgs. 1ñ9, A), fragments from <strong>the</strong> middle and later parts of <strong>the</strong> scroll.<br />
4Q388a c (201ñ217, pls. VIIIñIX, frgs. 1ñ7, AñI). 4Q389 d (219ñ234,<br />
pls. IXñX, frgs. 1ñ9, AñE). 4Q390 e (235ñ253, pl. XI, frgs. 1ñ8).<br />
4Q387a f (255ñ260, pl. XII, frgs. 1ñ9).<br />
The volume XXX is result of very demanding activity. Devorah<br />
Dimant very carefully classified <strong>the</strong> fragments and presented <strong>the</strong>m in<br />
appropriate sequence. In her detailed comments she applied her profound<br />
knowledge of Jewish post-biblical literature. Especially important<br />
are passages entitled ìAnalysis,î in which she discussed difficult<br />
problems and offered many valid solutions. Her edition of two<br />
pseudo-prophetic texts is valuable contribution to <strong>the</strong> study of Dead<br />
Sea scrolls. These texts are important for interpretation of prophetic<br />
books, for <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, and for understanding<br />
of eschatology (cf. 96). Their reliable edition will be effectively<br />
and gratefully used for fur<strong>the</strong>r research in <strong>the</strong>se fields which<br />
deserve more attention.<br />
113
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
3.1.24 Aramaic Texts, I<br />
Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean Desert XXXI Qumr‚n Grotte 4 XXII,<br />
Textes aramÈens, Première partie 4Q329ñ549. Par …mile Puech.<br />
ISBN 19-827026-7. Oxford: Clarendon 2001. xvill + 434 pp., pls.<br />
IñXXII. Price USD 80.00<br />
This volume is in French, like <strong>the</strong> previous volumes II, III, VI, VII,<br />
XXV. Like <strong>the</strong> volume XXV (v. supra, 3.1.20), this volume was edited<br />
<strong>by</strong> …mile Puech, Director of Research at <strong>the</strong> Centre National de<br />
Recherche Scientifique in Paris, who works at <strong>the</strong> …cole biblique et<br />
archÈologique francaise in Jerusalem. And like volume XXV, also<br />
this volume is dedicated to <strong>the</strong> memory of Jean Starcky. The English<br />
foreword (xi) was written <strong>by</strong> Professor Emanuel Tov, editor-in-chief<br />
of <strong>the</strong> DJD series. The manuscripts 4Q521ñ578 were originally assigned<br />
to Jean Starcky. …mile Puech continued <strong>the</strong> editorial work.<br />
The remaining texts have to be published in DJD volume XXXVII.<br />
The work on production, done in Jerusalem, is appreciated. The editor<br />
of <strong>the</strong> volume, …mile Puech, remembers in <strong>the</strong> French preface<br />
(xiiiñxvi) <strong>the</strong> work of Jean Starcky on <strong>the</strong> Aramaic texts. Some were<br />
published <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik. Identification and arrangements of texts is<br />
explained. The texts in this volume are related to biblical personalities.<br />
Several texts are testaments.<br />
A. Paroles de Michel. 4Q529 (1ñ8, pl. I, 2 fragments).The title<br />
ìWords of book which Michael said to anglesî introduces a vision.<br />
B. Livre des GÈants. 4Q530ñ533, 203 1. Livre des GÈants bñe : Introduction<br />
(9ñ16). These texts were identified with help of Manichean<br />
Book of Giants, preserved in Middle Persian and o<strong>the</strong>r versions, Book<br />
of Giants, related to <strong>the</strong> Book of Enoch, was composed probably in<br />
<strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E. 4Q203 1 Livre des GÈants a (17ñ18, pl. I,<br />
1 frg.) is republished as appendix. 4Q530 b (19ñ47, pls. IñII, 20 frgs.).<br />
4Q531 c (49ñ94, pls. IIIñV, 47 frgs.). 4Q532 d (95ñ104, pl. VI, 2 frgs.).<br />
4Q533 e (105ñ115, pl. VI, 8 frgs.).<br />
C. Naissance de NoÈ. 4Q534ñ536. Naissance de NoÈ añc : Introduction<br />
(117ñ127). Birth of Noah text was recognised as such after various<br />
scholarly opinions were expressed. Noah was Elect of God. The<br />
text was composed about 160 B. C. E. 4Q534 a (129ñ152, pls. VIIñIX,<br />
114
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
7 frgs.); 4Q535 b (163ñ159, pl. X, 3 frgs.); 4Q536 c (161ñ170, pl. X, 4<br />
frgs.).<br />
D. Testament de Jacob. 4Q537 Testament de Jacob? (171ñ190, pl.<br />
XII, 25 frgs.) Composed in <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian period.<br />
E. Testament de Juda 4Q538 (191ñ199, pl. XII, 4 frgs.) was recognised<br />
<strong>by</strong> relations to Genesis and Jubilees.<br />
F. Testament de Joseph 4Q539 (201ñ211, pl. XII, 5 frgs.) can be<br />
compared to Greek Testament of Joseph.<br />
G. Apocryphe de LÈvi. 4Q540ñ541 Apocryphe de LÈvi añb ?: Introduction.<br />
(213ñ216) Contacts with o<strong>the</strong>r texts mentioning Levi can be<br />
observed. 4Q540 a ? (217ñ223, pl. XII, 3 frgs.); 4Q541 b ? (225ñ256,<br />
pls. XIIIñXIV, 24 frgs.).<br />
H. Testament de Qahat 4Q542 (257ñ282, pl. XV, 3 frgs.). Parting<br />
of Qahat and his son and heir ëAmram.<br />
I. Visions de ë Amram. 4Q543ñ549 añb : Introduction (283ñ288). In<br />
this texts composed about 150 B. C. E. some similarities to <strong>the</strong> Samaritan<br />
tradition were observed <strong>by</strong> J. T. Milik. 4Q543 a (289ñ318,<br />
pls. XVIñXVIII, 46 frgs.). 4Q544 b (319ñ329, pl. XVIII, 3 frgs.)<br />
4Q545 c (331ñ349, pl. XIX, 12 frgs.). 4Q546 d (351ñ374, pl. XX, 25<br />
frgs.). 4Q547 e (375ñ390. pl. XXI, 9 frgs.); 4Q548 f (391ñ398, pl.<br />
XXII, 3 frgs.); 4Q549 g ? (399ñ405, pl. XXII, 2 frgs.). There are many<br />
parallels between <strong>the</strong>se manuscripts.<br />
The concordance (407ñ439) prepared <strong>by</strong> S. and C. Pfann contains<br />
all <strong>the</strong> Aramaic words. Words with morphemes B-, H-, K-, L- are<br />
listed in <strong>the</strong>ir alphabetic order without respect to <strong>the</strong>se morphemes.<br />
Plates IñXXII present clear photographs of <strong>the</strong> fragments, made with<br />
help of infra-red rays. As such photograph was not available for<br />
4Q537 1, Puech offered a drawing (cf. xiv).<br />
The edition of Aramaic texts found in Qumran caves is more detailed<br />
than that of Hebrew texts. It was necessary to identify texts<br />
preserved on fragments. It was necessary to locate <strong>the</strong> texts in <strong>the</strong><br />
Jewish literature of <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian period, before <strong>the</strong> middle of<br />
<strong>the</strong> second century B. C. E., preserved mostly in later reworking and<br />
translations. Puech successfully applied his wide and profound knowledge<br />
and appropriate methodology.<br />
The introductions to text editions deal with identification and<br />
characterisation of fragmentary works. In <strong>the</strong> passages of palaeogra-<br />
115
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
phy all letters are described in alphabetic order. The observations<br />
are used for determining dates of <strong>the</strong> manuscripts. The paragraphs<br />
on orthography and language present conveniently <strong>the</strong>se features on<br />
separate lines. If <strong>the</strong>re are faults or corrections in <strong>the</strong> manuscripts,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are dealt with before <strong>the</strong> editions. The Aramaic texts are presented<br />
in usual Hebrew letters. The notes on readings are added.<br />
French translations are arranged in usual manner, in lines corresponding<br />
to those of <strong>the</strong> originals. Problematic renderings are presented<br />
in Italics. In some instances two different translations are presented<br />
(cf. 4Q530 frg. 5 1, p. 27; 4Q534 frg 1 i 11, p. 134).<br />
Comments following and explaining <strong>the</strong> translations are very detailed.<br />
Previous interpretations are discussed, relations to biblical and<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r ancient texts are evaluated. Many original interpretations and<br />
observations are included.<br />
Even as some texts were copied in <strong>the</strong> Qumran area, <strong>the</strong>y were<br />
mostly composed in <strong>the</strong> Pre-Qumranian era (cf. 259) and brought to<br />
<strong>the</strong> Essene library. These texts are important for <strong>the</strong> study of Judaism<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Second Temple period, of Bible interpretation and of <strong>the</strong> cultural<br />
background. Some studies will be made possible as <strong>the</strong> remaining<br />
Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> cave 4 will be published, and all Aramaic<br />
texts from <strong>the</strong> Qumran area will be available. It will be possible<br />
to prepare a book on <strong>the</strong> Aramaic of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The effectively<br />
used book The Hebrew of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls <strong>by</strong> Elisha<br />
Qimron (Atlanta: Scholars Press 1986; reviewed in Catholic Biblical<br />
Quarterly 50/1988: 308ñ309) can serve as model. The excellent<br />
edition of <strong>the</strong> first part of Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> Qumran cave 4<br />
will be highly appreciated <strong>by</strong> its users. They may wish that …mile<br />
Puech publish such outstanding edition of <strong>the</strong> second part in near<br />
future.<br />
116
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
7. Collections or articles<br />
In this section <strong>the</strong> review of <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia containing about<br />
450†articles is presented (7.12).<br />
7.12 Encyclopedia.<br />
ISBN 0-19-508450-0: Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. Lawrence<br />
H. Schiffman, James C. VanderKam, editors in chief. Oxford<br />
University Press (New York) 2000. Volume 1, pp. iñxiv, 1ñ594. Volume<br />
2, [iñiv] 595ñ1132. (21 ◊ 28 cm). Price USD 295.00.<br />
The purpose of this encyclopaedia is to present to scholars and to<br />
lay people <strong>the</strong> results of research in <strong>the</strong> half century since <strong>the</strong> discovery<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls and to let <strong>the</strong>m know <strong>the</strong> information<br />
relevant for <strong>the</strong> history of our civilisation (vii). Both editors in chief<br />
are well known experts, some of <strong>the</strong>ir publications were reviewed in<br />
this journal (CV 36/1994, 264; 38/1996, 140, 150, 154ñ158; and<br />
38/1996, 139, 144ñ145, 159ñ160). Also o<strong>the</strong>r members of <strong>the</strong> editorial<br />
board (cf. ii) are known for <strong>the</strong>ir work on <strong>the</strong> Scrolls: editors:<br />
George J. Brooke, John J. Collins, Florentine GarcÌa MartinÈz, Eileen<br />
M. Schuller, Emanuel Tov, Eugene Ulrich; consultant Ephraim Stern;<br />
advisers: Joseph A. Fitzmyer, Jonas C. Greenfield, …mile Puech, Hartmut<br />
Stegemann. In <strong>the</strong> Directory of Contributors (1057ñ1065)<br />
179†persons are listed, mostly professors, also researchers in museums,<br />
independent scholars, and even graduate students. Most of <strong>the</strong>m<br />
from <strong>the</strong> United States, many from Canada and from Israel, and also<br />
some from 9 European countries. Articles contributed <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong>m are<br />
listed.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> preface (viiñxiv) <strong>the</strong> editors in chief explain how <strong>the</strong> encyclopaedia<br />
was conceived as all <strong>the</strong> texts became available in <strong>the</strong><br />
1990s. They point to <strong>the</strong>ir importance for history of Judaism and<br />
Christianity. The collections are shortly described and characterised.<br />
Qumran scrolls found at <strong>the</strong> site of <strong>the</strong> community occupied from<br />
about 134 B. C. E. until 68 C. E. are from <strong>the</strong> last three centuries<br />
B. C. E. and <strong>the</strong> first century C. E. Samaria papyri discovered at<br />
Wadi-ed-Daliyeh are Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> 4 th century B. C. E. Bar<br />
Kokhba texts from <strong>the</strong> 2 nd century C. E. were found in valleys south<br />
117
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
of Qumran; also texts in various languages from <strong>the</strong> Iron Age to <strong>the</strong><br />
Byzantine period were discovered in this area. Masada provided Hebrew<br />
and Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong> period before 73 C. E. (cf. 520).<br />
Khirbet Mird yielded Greek, Christian Palestinian Aramaic and Arabic<br />
texts from <strong>the</strong> Byzantine period, and later (cf. 564). The purpose<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia is to encompass all scholarship on <strong>the</strong> scrolls to<br />
date. The work started in 1992. The design relates to 8 conceptual<br />
categories.<br />
How to use <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia (xiiñxiv): The headwords of articles<br />
indicate independent entries, or composite entries, where groups<br />
of related topics provide appropriate contexts, or blind entries, referring<br />
to o<strong>the</strong>r entries concerning <strong>the</strong> subject. Bibliographies at <strong>the</strong><br />
end of articles provide information about basic studies. The Encyclopedia<br />
sums <strong>the</strong> recent accomplishments and points to future tasks.<br />
Those who supported <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong> Encyclopedia are appreciated.<br />
The number of articles is indicated as 450; <strong>the</strong>y are printed on pp.<br />
1ñ1012, two columns on a page. The entries are accompanied <strong>by</strong><br />
bibliographies. Some long entries consist of several articles: ìQumranî<br />
(733ñ746): Archaeology <strong>by</strong> Magen Broshi; ìWritten materialsî,<br />
<strong>by</strong> Devorah Dimant; ìMasadaî (515ñ525): Archaeology, <strong>by</strong> Jodi<br />
Magness; ìHistoryî, <strong>by</strong> Hanan Eshel; ìWritten materialî, <strong>by</strong> Shemaryahu<br />
Talmon; ìDaniel, Book ofî (170ñ178): Hebrew and Aramaic<br />
Text, <strong>by</strong> Eugene Ulrich; Greek Additions, <strong>by</strong> George<br />
W. E. Nickelsburg; Pseudo-Daniel, <strong>by</strong> John J. Collins. In some entries<br />
are tables (v. 109, 458ñ459; cf. 1073) Nei<strong>the</strong>r pictures nor maps<br />
are contained in this encyclopedia; some information can be seen in<br />
bibliographies.<br />
Very useful indexes are at <strong>the</strong> end of volume 2: ìProvisional List of<br />
Documents from <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî (1013ñ1049); ìIndex of Document<br />
Names to Document Numbersî (1051ñ1056); ìDirectory of Contributorsî<br />
(1057ñ1065); ìSynoptic Outline of Contentsî (1067ñ1071);<br />
ìIndexî (1073ñ1132).<br />
Beyond <strong>the</strong> alphabetic arrangement of entries <strong>the</strong> orientation in<br />
this rich treasury of data is provided <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> innovative synoptic outline.<br />
On its first page (1067) <strong>the</strong> general conceptual categories are<br />
listed. Then (1068ñ1071) <strong>the</strong> entries are presented according to <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Among ìPlaces of General Importanceî most attention is devoted to<br />
118
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
ìJudeaî (440ñ455): Economy, Flora, Fauna, Geography, History.<br />
ìArchaeological Sites and Written Materialî are presented. Material<br />
remains are fisted in two classes, ìArchitectureî and ìArtefacts and<br />
Remainsî, including ìWriting Materialsî (996ñ997).<br />
ìWritten Material Discovered in <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî are introduced<br />
<strong>by</strong> ìOverviewî, informing about general entries, such as ìAlphabetsî<br />
(18ñ20), ìPoetryî (679ñ681), and about categories of texts, such as<br />
ìCalendars and Mishmarotî (108ñ117), ìInterpretation of Scripturesî<br />
(376ñ383), ìScripturesî: Texts, Translations, Quotation and Use<br />
(832ñ842). ìWisdom Textsî (976ñ980).<br />
Among ìTextsî discovered are: Hebrew Scripture, ìPsalms, Book<br />
ofî (702ñ710), Biblical Text, Apocryphal Psalms; ìEzekiel, Book ofî<br />
(279ñ284), Biblical Text, Pseudo-Ezekiel; previously known compositions<br />
pseudepigraphs; previously unknown compositions ñ 47 texts,<br />
including Hodayot, Pesher Habakkuk, Rule of <strong>the</strong> Community (ÿ·d<br />
Jednoty), Temple Scroll.<br />
ìLanguages and Scriptsî: Arabic, Aramaic, Greek, Hebrew, Latin,<br />
also: Languages, Names of God, Orthography, Palaeography, Scribal<br />
Practices.<br />
ìRelated Ancient Textsî are listed including Mishna and Tosephta,<br />
Talmudim, Josephus Flavius, Philo Judaeus, Christian ñ New Testament,<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r Christian Writings.<br />
ìHistoryî: ìPolitical, Military and Economic Historyî. ìReligious<br />
History: Jewish Groups ñ also Karaites ñ, Christian Groups ñ also<br />
Jewish Christians, O<strong>the</strong>r Religious Groups and Movements ñ also<br />
Gnosticism.<br />
ìBeliefs, Institutions and Practices:î ìBeliefs,î including Dualism,<br />
Eschatology, God, Messiahs, Warfare, and Religious Beliefs,<br />
Qumran Sect. ìInstitutions:î Community Organisation, Priests, et al.<br />
ìPracticesî: including Celibacy, Mysticism, Sabbath, and Worship,<br />
Qumran Sect.<br />
ìFiguresî: ìHebrew Biblical Figuresî, ìSobriquetsî, including<br />
Teacher of <strong>the</strong> Righteousness; ìContemporaneous Figuresî: Jesus<br />
(404ñ408), John <strong>the</strong> Baptist (418ñ421), Bar Kokhba, Shim c on, and<br />
various rulers.<br />
ìScroll Researchî: ìResearch, Publication and Preservationî, including<br />
Scroll Research, Publication, Discoveries in <strong>the</strong> Judaean<br />
119
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
Desert, Revue de Qumr‚n, Museums and Collections, Scroll Research.<br />
ìTools and Methods of Studyî: Archaeological Surveys, Carbonñ14<br />
Dating, Photography and Computer Imaging, Research Tools.<br />
ìKey Individuals and Institutionsî: 15 individuals, 10 institutions.<br />
This selective survey shows how competently <strong>the</strong> richness of materials<br />
and ideas is made accessible to users of this encyclopaedia.<br />
Also most helpful is <strong>the</strong> arrangement of ìIndexî (1073ñ1132). The<br />
primary essays on <strong>the</strong> topics are referred to page numbers in boldface.<br />
Tables are denoted <strong>by</strong> page numbers in italics, cf. 109, calendars;<br />
458ñ459, judicial procedures: penalties. Names of contributors<br />
are accompanied <strong>by</strong> references to pages of <strong>the</strong>ir articles. Titles of<br />
books and texts are printed in italics. Items are printed at beginning<br />
of lines, related topics are a little shifted aside. Their large numbers<br />
make it possible to trace various contacts of items. And <strong>the</strong> great<br />
number of items and related topics enables to penetrate into <strong>the</strong> data<br />
in <strong>the</strong> manuscripts and <strong>the</strong>ir various connections.<br />
ìProvisional List of Documents from <strong>the</strong> Judean Desertî<br />
(1013ñ1049) is characterised as such in its title (1013). Information<br />
from <strong>the</strong> list published <strong>by</strong> E. Tov in 1999 (cf. CV 41/1999, 181) is<br />
added; additional text sigla in brackets [], names of texts.<br />
Those texts which were written on papyrus are marked <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
abbreviation pap; <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r texts were written on lea<strong>the</strong>r. Also <strong>the</strong><br />
languages of texts are indicated <strong>by</strong> abbreviations: ar ñ Aramaic, nab ñ<br />
Nabatean, gr ñ Greek, lat ñ Latin, arab ñArabic; Hebrew texts are not<br />
marked, only rarely <strong>the</strong> abbreviation heb is used.<br />
Text numbers are in <strong>the</strong> first column, <strong>the</strong> official sigla in <strong>the</strong> second<br />
column, <strong>the</strong> third column provides name or description in Encyclopedia;<br />
if 1999 names are different, <strong>the</strong>y are presented in <strong>the</strong> fourth column.<br />
The largest corpus, documents from Qumran (Q; 1013ñ1034), is<br />
followed <strong>by</strong> texts from Masada (Mas; 1034ñ1035), Murabba c at (Mur;<br />
1035ñ1039), Wadi Sdeir, Naḥal Ḥever, Nahal Ṣeíelim (Seiyal)<br />
(1039ñ1044), Nahal Mishmar, Wadi Ghweir, Wadi enñNar (1044),<br />
Wadi edñDaliyeh (1044ñ1045), Khirbet Mird (1045ñ1049).<br />
The orientation in this complete up-to-date list is facilitated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
ìIndex of Document Names to Document Numbersî(1051ñ156);<br />
names and also types are related to numbers in <strong>the</strong> first column of <strong>the</strong><br />
120
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Provisional List. The list of documents shows quantity and variety of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The Encyclopedia provides relevant data, places<br />
<strong>the</strong>m in context, and points to previous and also future research. Appropriate<br />
attention is devoted to modern research methods: ìCarbonñ14<br />
Datingî, Gregory L. Doudna (120ñ121); ìPhotography and<br />
Computer Imagining,î Bruce Zuckerman and Kenneth Zuckerman<br />
(669ñ675).<br />
Problems which were or are still discussed are presented with exact<br />
substantiation of facts, clear formulation leads to <strong>the</strong>ir understanding.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> entry ìGnosticismî (313ñ317) Birger<br />
A. Pearson concludes that this movement arose from Jewish apocalyptic<br />
traditions, attested also in <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. Michael<br />
A. Knibb gives detailed information about ìTeacher of Righteousnessî<br />
(918ñ921), who cannot be identified with a known historical<br />
figure. For <strong>the</strong> date and au<strong>the</strong>nticity of ìCopper Scrollî (144ñ148) Al<br />
Wolters quotes 6 major <strong>the</strong>ories; he himself considers <strong>the</strong> treasure<br />
au<strong>the</strong>ntic, belonging to <strong>the</strong> Jerusalem Temple before 68 C. E.<br />
A few entries appear unusual. ìAeneidî (10ñ11; Eugene Ulrich) is<br />
description of <strong>the</strong> very small fragment of this poem <strong>by</strong> Virgil, found<br />
at Masada. ìElephantine Textsî (241ñ246) are from <strong>the</strong> 5 th century<br />
B. C. E.; Bezalel Porten compares <strong>the</strong> forms of <strong>the</strong>se Aramaic letters<br />
and documents with those of Hebrew and Aramaic texts from <strong>the</strong><br />
2 nd †century C. E. found in <strong>the</strong> caves south of <strong>the</strong> Qumran area. Among<br />
15†individuals important for <strong>the</strong> work on <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls (cf.<br />
1071) <strong>the</strong>re is one born in Vienna and raised in Brno, Czechoslovakia.<br />
The article ìLicht, Jacobî (494ñ495) was contributed <strong>by</strong> Bilha<br />
Nitzan. She informs about his life (1922ñ1992), about his position of<br />
professor of Bible at Tel Aviv University, and about his works on <strong>the</strong><br />
Dead Sea Scrolls (Cf. J·kob Licht. éivot a dÌlo, Religio 4, 1996,<br />
194ñ200).<br />
Among <strong>the</strong> contributors to Encyclopedia are former students of<br />
this reviewer, from Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore, James<br />
M. Lichtenberger ñ ìLettersî (480ñ485), and from University of California,<br />
Los Angeles: James R. Davila ñ ìExodus, Book ofî<br />
(277ñ279), ìGenesis, Book ofî (299ñ300), ìOrthographyî (625ñ628;<br />
Hebrew, Aramaic), and Robert Good ñ ìJacobî (395ñ396), ìJosephî<br />
(425ñ426), ìJudahî (438ñ439). Professor of Biblical Studies at this<br />
121
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
University, William M. Schniedewind contributed <strong>the</strong> entry ìManasseh,<br />
Kingî (504ñ505).<br />
This short review could point only to a few features of <strong>the</strong> magnificent<br />
Encyclopedia of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls. The more it will be read<br />
and used, <strong>the</strong> more its qualities will be appreciated. In <strong>the</strong>se two large<br />
volumes many data are contained which without its help should be<br />
sought in various, often not easily accessible, publications. Students<br />
and those who aspire to be acquainted with this important discovery<br />
can study <strong>the</strong> topics systematically, with help of <strong>the</strong> synoptic outline.<br />
Researchers can find required information, for which <strong>the</strong>y should<br />
o<strong>the</strong>rwise go to libraries. The contributors, <strong>the</strong> editors, and all who<br />
produced this Encyclopedia, deserve gratitude of its users. This reviewer<br />
can appreciate, how helpful this Encyclopedia will be, as he<br />
will continue his work on <strong>the</strong> Czech translation of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea<br />
Scrolls, which is now being prepared in co-operation with <strong>the</strong> Centre<br />
of Biblical Studies at <strong>the</strong> <strong>Protestant</strong> Theological Faculty of Charles<br />
University in Prague.<br />
8. Books about Dead Sea Scrolls<br />
Even as two prominent scholars in this field, David Flusser and Jakob<br />
Licht, were of Czech origin, relatively few books have been published<br />
in Czech languages. Now an important book <strong>by</strong> David Flusser<br />
is available.<br />
8.1.0 A book <strong>by</strong> David Flusser in Czech translation.<br />
David Flusser, EsejskÈ dobrodruûstvÌ ñ éidovskÈ spoleËenstvÌ od MrtvÈho<br />
mo¯e. »eho si lze povöimnout u JeûÌöe, Pavla, DidachÈ a Martina<br />
Bubera. Praha: Oik˙menÈ 1999. 200 pp. [Translated from German<br />
<strong>by</strong> Petr Sl·ma.]<br />
The development of this book is explained in <strong>the</strong> introduction<br />
(11ñ13): First part was prepared for Israel broadcast in 1982, <strong>the</strong>n<br />
published in Hebrew in 1985, translated into English in 1989, from it<br />
to German in 1992. German edition, extended <strong>by</strong> three additional<br />
essays appeared in 1994 in Cardun Verlag, Winterthur, Das essenische<br />
122
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Abenteuer. Auff‰ligkeiten bei Jesus, Paulus, Didache und Martin Buber.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> introduction Flusser also appreciates <strong>the</strong> importance of <strong>the</strong><br />
Scrolls and of <strong>the</strong> Essene sect. The foreword (7ñ10) was contributed<br />
<strong>by</strong> Clemens Thoma, Professor in Luzern. He evaluates Flusserís work<br />
on Qumran, especially his interpretation of liturgical esoterics. Even<br />
more important is Flusserís interpretation of <strong>the</strong> New Testament.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first part <strong>the</strong> Jewish community of <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea is<br />
charactericed <strong>by</strong> (14ñ94). Flusser informs about Essenes, who isolated<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves, and also about Pharisees and Sadducees (14ñ26).<br />
For <strong>the</strong> period from about 100 B. C. E. to <strong>the</strong> war with Romans in <strong>the</strong><br />
second half of <strong>the</strong> 1 st century C. E., Flusser used Flavius Josephus as<br />
main source (26ñ32). According to Flusser it is possible that Juda <strong>the</strong><br />
Essene, who predicted <strong>the</strong> killing of Antigonos was <strong>the</strong> Teacher of<br />
Righteousness, <strong>the</strong> founder of <strong>the</strong> sect (cf. 28; 31n, 68). The life and<br />
organisation of <strong>the</strong> sect are described (32ñ38). Relations of <strong>the</strong> sect to<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r Israelites are characterised (38ñ50). Essene <strong>the</strong>ological system<br />
(50ñ94) is presented: predestination (50ñ56), antagonism between<br />
spirit and body (56ñ61), history of humanity (61ñ67), apocalyptic<br />
and its literature (67ñ80), hate through love (80ñ87), faith in messiah<br />
(88ñ94).<br />
The second part (95ñ120) is devoted to <strong>the</strong> Doctrine of Twelve<br />
Apostles and to Jesus. The Jewish model for <strong>the</strong> first part of Doctrine<br />
ñ Didache ñ is known from <strong>the</strong> Latin version, Doctrina apostolorum.<br />
Jewish Two Ways are known also from <strong>the</strong> Qumran Rule of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Community (1QS, ÿ·d Jednoty). These texts are compared with<br />
<strong>the</strong> message of Jesus in Mat<strong>the</strong>w 5:17ñ48.<br />
The third part (121ñ152) deals with Essenes and Christianity. In<br />
<strong>the</strong> introduction (121ñ126) Flusser criticised some recent publications.<br />
The Scrolls are useful for <strong>the</strong> study of various trends in Early<br />
Christianity, Jesus and Christology are compared with some features<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Essene texts. Also Qumran and <strong>the</strong> early church are compared<br />
(138ñ152). Qumran Scrolls help to find what is important in ancient<br />
Judaism and Christianity.<br />
The last, fourth part (153ñ192) on two types of faith according to<br />
Buber was published in German as epilogue to Buberís book on this<br />
topic. Only few direct relations to <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls are contained<br />
in this part: a reference to <strong>the</strong> Commentary to Habakkuk (164,<br />
123
STANISLAV SEGERT<br />
n. 458); Essene interpretation of Psalm 143:2 in <strong>the</strong> Thanksgiving<br />
Hymns, according to which man can be justified only <strong>by</strong> Godís grace<br />
(166ñ167). Martin Buber distinguished two types of faith, emuna ñ<br />
Jewish, and pistis ñ Christian.<br />
Four parts of <strong>the</strong> book are provided with 529 notes, references to<br />
Bible and literature, and explanations. In <strong>the</strong> bibliography (193ñ199)<br />
36 Flusserís publications are listed. The translator, Petr Sl·ma, added<br />
to some notes references to Czech publications. In his note (199) he<br />
explains that he used Czech ecumenical Bible translation, for Didache<br />
quotations <strong>the</strong> translation <strong>by</strong> Dan Dr·pal (1985; cf. 95, n. 190), for<br />
quotations from <strong>the</strong> Dead Sea Scrolls <strong>the</strong> translation <strong>by</strong> this reviewer<br />
which is being prepared for publication in Prague.<br />
Even as Flusser grew up, studied and taught in Prague (cf. ìOsmdes·t<br />
let profesora Davida Flusseraî, <strong>the</strong> article to his 80 th birthday,<br />
Religio 5, 1997, 69ñ80), <strong>the</strong> book reviewed here is his first publication<br />
in Czech, which was his main language.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first part Flusser presents <strong>the</strong> Essene community according<br />
to Scrolls and o<strong>the</strong>r sources. He uses his thorough knowledge of texts<br />
and <strong>the</strong> results of research. He complements <strong>the</strong>m <strong>by</strong> his original<br />
observations. Also <strong>the</strong> relevance of <strong>the</strong> ancient ideas for <strong>the</strong> later<br />
times is stressed; Flusser points to Erasmus, Lu<strong>the</strong>r, and Calvin†(146),<br />
to Tolstoy and Gandhi (80ñ81,87). The ancient texts and ideas are<br />
presented in manner well understandable to <strong>the</strong> broader public. This<br />
approach reminds this reviewer how Flusser taught similar topics of<br />
Jewish history and culture in his weekly course of Modern Hebrew,<br />
held in <strong>the</strong> Oriental Institute in Prague in early 1950s. Flusser was<br />
teaching <strong>the</strong> language during <strong>the</strong> first hour, in <strong>the</strong> second hour he was<br />
acquainting his grateful audience with values of Judaism.<br />
Second and third part of this book introduce <strong>the</strong> readers in <strong>the</strong><br />
research on relations between Judaism and early Christianity, <strong>the</strong> area<br />
in which Flusser is one of <strong>the</strong> leading scholars. He contributes substantially<br />
to better mutual contacts between Jews and Christians. The<br />
fourth part evaluates one work of Martin Buber, <strong>the</strong> great philosopher,<br />
with whom Flusser, a philologist was in close contact (cf. 153).<br />
Both were professors at <strong>the</strong> Hebrew University in Jerusalem. While<br />
this reviewer was Flusserís guest in spring 1964, he was able to visit<br />
Buber, thanks to Flusserís recommendation. He learned how highly<br />
124
ACCESS TO THE DEAD SEA SCROLLS ñ V<br />
Buber was evaluating Flusserís personality and activity. Czech readers<br />
can have important book <strong>by</strong> Flusser in <strong>the</strong>ir and his language. The<br />
book on Jesus is now being translated into Czech and will appear<br />
soon. It was reviewed already in <strong>the</strong> journal published in Brno (ìDavid<br />
Flusser on <strong>the</strong> Historical Jesusî, Religio 7, 1998, 63ñ72). And<br />
Czech readers will appreciate Czech translations of o<strong>the</strong>r Flusserís<br />
works. A collection of his articles, especially those on contacts between<br />
Judaism and early Christianity, would be most welcome, in<br />
particular now after he passed away in September 2000.<br />
125
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
Pavel Hoöek<br />
The Trinity and <strong>the</strong> Interfaith<br />
S. Mark Heim, The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology of Religious Ends,<br />
W. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, Grand Rapids, Michigan / Cambridge, U. K.,<br />
2001; Series: Sacra Doctrina: Christian Theology for Postmodern Age, general editor:<br />
A. G. Padgett. Includes bibliography and index, xi + 312 pages, ISBN<br />
0-8028-4758-7.<br />
In his recent book The Depth of <strong>the</strong> Riches: A Trinitarian Theology of<br />
Religious Ends S. Mark Heim proposes a new perspective on interreligious<br />
dialogue. The book is part of <strong>the</strong> series Sacra Doctrina:<br />
Christian Theology for a Postmodern Age. This series is a project of<br />
The Christian Theological Research Fellowship and its goal is to rethink<br />
traditional <strong>the</strong>ological doctrines in <strong>the</strong> light of <strong>the</strong> postmodern<br />
cultural situation.<br />
Given this general goal, Heimës book is in many respects constructive<br />
and innovative. He thinks through new ways of looking at<br />
interreligious dialogue, as this task is pressed upon <strong>the</strong> Christian<br />
church <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> changing cultural situation of <strong>the</strong> Western world.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first part of his book Heim explains his approach to <strong>the</strong><br />
question of religious pluralism. He reviews <strong>the</strong> three traditional Christian<br />
responses to this question: exclusivism, inclusivism and pluralism.<br />
Heimís summary points out <strong>the</strong> following: Exclusivists hold that<br />
<strong>the</strong>re is only one religious end (Christian salvation) and that only<br />
practising Christians can hope to attain this goal. Inclusivists hold as<br />
well that <strong>the</strong>re is only one religious end, which <strong>the</strong>y also identify with<br />
Christian salvation, but <strong>the</strong>y allow <strong>the</strong> possibility that this end will be<br />
achieved <strong>by</strong> many ìanonymous Christiansî (K. Rahner) among <strong>the</strong><br />
adherents of o<strong>the</strong>r religions. Pluralists hold as well that <strong>the</strong>re is only<br />
one religious end, which must not be identified with any concrete<br />
doctrine of any particular religious tradition, but which will never<strong>the</strong>less<br />
be attained <strong>by</strong> all serious believers, regardless of <strong>the</strong>ir particular<br />
convictions. The universal religious end is beyond description in concepts<br />
and propositions (J. Hick), it is only symbolically and vaguely<br />
expressed in all religious traditions.<br />
Heimís main criticism of <strong>the</strong>se traditional approaches is that <strong>the</strong>y<br />
all build on <strong>the</strong> unproven assumption that <strong>the</strong>re must be only one<br />
126
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
religious end for all people. While exclusivism has nothing to offer to<br />
interreligious dialogue, both inclusivism and pluralism tend to underestimate<br />
<strong>the</strong> concrete particularities of religious traditions. This neglect<br />
of particularities is in sharp contrast with <strong>the</strong> witness of religious<br />
traditions to <strong>the</strong> crucial importance of <strong>the</strong>se particularities. For<br />
both inclusivists and pluralists, believers will be ìsavedî (i.e. will<br />
attain <strong>the</strong> only existing religious end) not because, but in spite of <strong>the</strong><br />
concrete shape of <strong>the</strong>ir religious heritage. Heim disagrees with Gandhiís<br />
claim that all religions lead to <strong>the</strong> same goal and are essentially<br />
<strong>the</strong> same in spite of <strong>the</strong>ir apparent differences. In Heimís view <strong>the</strong><br />
concrete practices, rituals, habits, <strong>the</strong> whole lifestyle shaped <strong>by</strong> particular<br />
traditions are essentially important exactly in <strong>the</strong>ir being different<br />
from any o<strong>the</strong>r way of life. They make people who <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
and <strong>the</strong>y shape <strong>the</strong> particular religious end towards which believers<br />
direct <strong>the</strong>ir existence. He points to <strong>the</strong> fact that <strong>the</strong> expectations of<br />
different religions in terms of afterlife are unexchangeable and irreducibly<br />
different. The diversity of <strong>the</strong> ends of particular religions<br />
corresponds to <strong>the</strong> obvious diversity of particular lifestyles and mindsets<br />
which <strong>the</strong>se religions produce in <strong>the</strong>ir adherents. Nirvana is<br />
a paradigmaticly different religious end from <strong>the</strong> Christian eschatological<br />
vision, which again is totally different from <strong>the</strong> humble religious<br />
end of Taoism, etc. What solution to this problem does Heim<br />
offer?<br />
Heim agrees with Hickís view that whatever <strong>the</strong> true nature of<br />
Ultimate reality may be, <strong>the</strong> way it is perceived <strong>by</strong> any human person<br />
will be strongly marked <strong>by</strong> his or her cultural and religious background<br />
and training. Whatever <strong>the</strong> actual ultimate destiny of a believer,<br />
his or her perception of it will be codetermined <strong>by</strong> religious<br />
expectations of <strong>the</strong> particular tradition. These expectations (religious<br />
ends) will be <strong>the</strong>refore at least partially fulfilled and confirmed <strong>by</strong> his<br />
or her actual post mortem condition and experience. This would seem<br />
to imply that Heimís view is simply relativistic. That conclusion appears<br />
to be confirmed <strong>by</strong> Heimís <strong>the</strong>sis that every <strong>the</strong>ory of interreligious<br />
relations must be designed from within oneís particular tradition,<br />
which must provide <strong>the</strong> conceptual framework. There is no<br />
meta<strong>the</strong>ory, free of presuppositions and a priori commitments. Therefore<br />
Heim as a Christian offers a Christian solution, but this solution,<br />
127
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
he claims, can be easily appropriated <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> representatives of o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
religions.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, Heim denies that his stance is relativistic. To<br />
<strong>the</strong> question how can anyone decide which religion (which religious<br />
end) to choose, Heim responds that <strong>the</strong>re is one relative criterion on<br />
which to base such a choice, namely <strong>the</strong> explaining power of each<br />
proposed <strong>the</strong>ory of religion and interreligious relations. In o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
words, we need to ask which religion is able to explain itself and all<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r religions in <strong>the</strong> most comprehensive and satisfactory way. In<br />
Heimís view, this is Christianity. He holds that <strong>the</strong> best explanation of<br />
<strong>the</strong> diversity of religions with <strong>the</strong>ir differing religious ends, which<br />
respects <strong>the</strong>ir particularities, but still offers a unified interpretive<br />
framework is <strong>the</strong> Christian doctrine of <strong>the</strong> Trinity. This suggestion is<br />
open to public debate and <strong>the</strong>refore not relativistic.<br />
In Heimís view, any <strong>the</strong>ory that wants to be a candidate for <strong>the</strong><br />
most comprehensive and satisfactory <strong>the</strong>ory of religion and of interreligious<br />
relations must fit <strong>the</strong> following criteria: besides providing<br />
a unified interpretive framework for all religions, it must 1) see <strong>the</strong><br />
value of religious particularity, 2) acknowledge <strong>the</strong> distinctive truth<br />
of o<strong>the</strong>r religions, 3) at <strong>the</strong> same time see <strong>the</strong> legitimacy of each<br />
religionís witness to its own ìone and onlyî aspect. Heim believes<br />
<strong>the</strong> best candidate is <strong>the</strong> Christian trinitarian conceptual structure. He<br />
agrees with R. Panikkar that Trinity is <strong>the</strong> key to understand <strong>the</strong> plurality<br />
of world religions. The distinct religious ends of different religions<br />
are related to <strong>the</strong> distinct dimensions of <strong>the</strong> trinitarian divine<br />
life.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> second part of <strong>the</strong> book <strong>the</strong> author reviews <strong>the</strong> biblical and<br />
<strong>the</strong>ological tradition of <strong>the</strong> Christian church to show parallels and<br />
anticipations of his view of religious plurality. He points to <strong>the</strong> universalistic<br />
elements of <strong>the</strong> Scripture (<strong>the</strong> covenant with Noah, ìpagan<br />
saintsî such as Jethro, Ruth, Job etc., <strong>the</strong> Johannine notion of Logos,<br />
<strong>the</strong> Pauline notion of <strong>the</strong> law written on peopleís hearts etc.) He<br />
reviews <strong>the</strong> universalistic elements in Justin Martyr, Origen and o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
Fa<strong>the</strong>rs. He documents how very soon in <strong>the</strong> history of <strong>the</strong> church <strong>the</strong><br />
eternal destiny of human beings was seen in a more and more differentiated<br />
way: <strong>the</strong> Fa<strong>the</strong>rs speak (alongside heaven and hell) of purgatory,<br />
which for some of <strong>the</strong>m is a permanent destiny. Augustine speaks<br />
128
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
about limbo for children and ano<strong>the</strong>r limbo for Old Testament saints<br />
(<strong>the</strong> bosom of Abraham) ñ <strong>the</strong>se are already four distinct destinations,<br />
some of <strong>the</strong>m temporary, some eternal. Thomas Aquinas speaks<br />
of five destinations: heaven, hell, purgatory, limbo for Old Testament<br />
saints and limbo for children. He also distinguishes different dimensions<br />
of hell and different levels of heaven.<br />
Heim offers one whole chapter of analysis of Danteís Divine Comedy.<br />
For Dante, everything in <strong>the</strong> afterlife moves <strong>by</strong> attraction, affinity<br />
and desire, nothing <strong>by</strong> force. Everybody ìends upî where he or<br />
she wants. Punishment is <strong>the</strong> sin itself, hell is ra<strong>the</strong>r privative than<br />
punitive. The eschatological destiny of every human being is actually<br />
<strong>the</strong> expression of his or her deepest desire, which God respects, honours<br />
and rewards. Therefore, for many, limbo is an eternal destiny,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y want to stay <strong>the</strong>re forever. There is some relation to God at every<br />
level. Later in <strong>the</strong> book Heim says that his view of religious ends is<br />
a modified version of Danteís eschatological vision in Divine Comedy.<br />
At <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> third part of <strong>the</strong> book Heim summarizes<br />
what he has said so far: different religions produce and shape different<br />
expectations and mindsets. By a series of religious choices people<br />
in each tradition become who <strong>the</strong>y are. They shape <strong>the</strong>ir lives in<br />
accordance and conformity with <strong>the</strong> religious end <strong>the</strong>y strive to<br />
achieve. Heim holds that <strong>the</strong>se different ends are not just human projections,<br />
but existing options of eternal destinations. These religious<br />
ends will <strong>the</strong>refore eventually become reality. God will honour each<br />
religionís expectations, just as in Danteís vision. How can that happen?<br />
As suggested above, Heim sees <strong>the</strong> answer in <strong>the</strong> Christian doctrine<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Trinity. The Trinity in Heimís view provides a unified<br />
map for diverse religious experiences. Different religions emphasize<br />
different aspects of <strong>the</strong> human relation to Ultimate Reality: some<br />
emphasise <strong>the</strong> deity above us, some <strong>the</strong> deity among us, some <strong>the</strong><br />
deity within us, in o<strong>the</strong>r words, each relates to a different aspect of<br />
<strong>the</strong> trinitarian life. Using <strong>the</strong> conceptual categories of R. Panikkar,<br />
N. Smart and S. Konstantine, Heim shows how <strong>the</strong> ìtrinitarian grammarî<br />
provides <strong>the</strong> best paradigm for interreligious relations: <strong>the</strong> doctrine<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Trinity with its transcendent as well as immanent dimen-<br />
129
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
sions, with is personalistic as well as impersonal elements serves as<br />
an all-inclusive map for religious diversity. There are religions of<br />
apophatism, o<strong>the</strong>r religions of personalism and still o<strong>the</strong>rs of divine<br />
immanence. All <strong>the</strong>se differences can be viewed, Heim says, as differing<br />
types of relating to <strong>the</strong> complex trinitarian divine being, to <strong>the</strong><br />
inner relational dynamics of Fa<strong>the</strong>r, Son and Holy Spirit. For Heim<br />
<strong>the</strong> trinitarian grammar is <strong>the</strong> best conceptual framework which Christian<br />
<strong>the</strong>ology can offer as a basis for <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ory and practice of<br />
interreligious dialogue.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> last part of his book, Heim offers an eschatological vision<br />
derived from his trinitarian <strong>the</strong>ology of diverse religious ends. He<br />
argues for <strong>the</strong> view, presented in <strong>the</strong> main body of his book, that<br />
human beings are essentially free to choose and codetermine <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
eternal destiny or, from <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological perspective, that <strong>the</strong> existence<br />
of diverse world religions with <strong>the</strong>ir diverse religious ends is due to<br />
Godís providential activity towards humankind. Heimís main emphasis<br />
in <strong>the</strong> last part of <strong>the</strong> book is what he calls <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological<br />
principle of plenitude. According to this principle, God aims at <strong>the</strong><br />
multiplication of all possible kinds of good. His goal is <strong>the</strong> largest<br />
possible diversity and communion in difference ñ it actually reflects<br />
Godís own trinitarian life. Heim refers in this context to A. Lovejoyís<br />
famous book The Great Chain of Being, which focuses on <strong>the</strong> history<br />
of <strong>the</strong> idea that God leaves no genuine possibility of being unrealised.<br />
This idea is ano<strong>the</strong>r expression of <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>ological principle of plenitude.<br />
In Heimís understanding, this principle 1) is a qualitative description<br />
of <strong>the</strong> divine life as triune, 2) is expressed economically in<br />
what God has made, 3) is reflected in <strong>the</strong> nature of salvation too, and<br />
most importantly 4) demands a variety of religious ends (besides<br />
Christian salvation). Heim believes that God allows <strong>the</strong> creature to<br />
determine its eternal destiny; in <strong>the</strong> richness of <strong>the</strong> trinitarian life,<br />
<strong>the</strong>re is space for pan<strong>the</strong>istic, as well as poly- and mono<strong>the</strong>istic relations<br />
to <strong>the</strong> deity, just as for both personal and impersonal views of<br />
Ultimate Reality (Heim refers in this context to P. Tillichís view of<br />
God as <strong>the</strong> Ground and A<strong>by</strong>ss of being).<br />
What I appreciate about Heimís book is his courage in breaking<br />
new ground in <strong>the</strong>ological speculation, in response to <strong>the</strong> contemporary<br />
cultural situation. His research is well supported <strong>by</strong> references to<br />
130
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
both classical and contemporary scholarship. He shows wide knowledge<br />
in <strong>the</strong> fields of systematic <strong>the</strong>ology and religious science and<br />
a developed skill of integrating <strong>the</strong> data of <strong>the</strong>se two fields of knowledge.<br />
He also fruitfully employs his rich experience of working for<br />
<strong>the</strong> Interfaith Working Group of <strong>the</strong> Faith and Order Commission of<br />
<strong>the</strong> National Council of Churches in <strong>the</strong> U. S. A as well as more than<br />
two decades of lecturing and publishing about world religions from<br />
a <strong>the</strong>ological perspective.<br />
My main objection to his <strong>the</strong>ological proposal (besides <strong>the</strong> highly<br />
speculative character of his eschatological vision, which he himself<br />
acknowledges) is that it ends up being very close to <strong>the</strong> classical<br />
inclusivist Christian <strong>the</strong>ory, which he strongly criticizes. Heimís view<br />
can certainly be attacked for <strong>the</strong> same reasons: a paternalistic attitude<br />
towards non-Christian religions as being only ìsecond bestî and as<br />
being implicitly (and unwillingly) related to <strong>the</strong> Christian religious<br />
Absolute. Heimís vision is not too far from Rahnerís concept of<br />
anonymous Christianity (or, let us say, Justin Martyrís view of logos<br />
spermatikos, in which pagans can participate, or Origenís universalistic<br />
vision of apokatastasis panthon). Heimís claim that his <strong>the</strong>ory<br />
can easily be appropriated <strong>by</strong> proponents of o<strong>the</strong>r religions simply <strong>by</strong><br />
exchanging trinitarian terminology for <strong>the</strong>ir own all-inclusive framework<br />
may prove true in <strong>the</strong> actual interreligious dialogue, but it<br />
doesnít seem to move beyond <strong>the</strong> classical inclusivist <strong>the</strong>ories. The<br />
innovative element is that Heimís version of inclusivism doesnít force<br />
<strong>the</strong> Christian view of eternal bliss on those who are not interested in<br />
it ñ Buddhists striving for Nirvana for example. They, just as everybody<br />
else, will be ìsavedî <strong>the</strong>ir own way. The traditional Christian<br />
view, which is perceived as arrogant <strong>by</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r faiths, namely that<br />
non-Christian religions may have some elements of truth in <strong>the</strong>m, but<br />
<strong>the</strong> clearest and fullest revelation of truth is found only in Christianity,<br />
is obviously present in Heimís <strong>the</strong>ory as well, perhaps because it<br />
cannot be removed as long as <strong>the</strong> thinker wants to remain a faithful<br />
Christian. Unfortunately, it has far-reaching and devastating effects<br />
on interreligious dialogue. This is an obstacle which Heimís proposal<br />
doesnít manage to overcome.<br />
To summarise, Heimís new book is an inspiring contribution to <strong>the</strong><br />
rapidly developing tradition of Christian <strong>the</strong>ological reflection on<br />
131
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r religions and Christianityís relation to <strong>the</strong>m. All <strong>the</strong>ologians<br />
involved in interreligious dialogue will benefit from this book.<br />
Filip »apek<br />
The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture, International Academic<br />
Symposium, Prague, September 1995, Heller, J., Talmon,<br />
S., Hlav·Ëkov·, H., (eds.), Prudk˝, M. (executive ed.),<br />
Ml˝n: T¯ebenice 2001, 205 pp. + 16pp. supplement, ISBN 80-902296-8-9.<br />
This volume of essays of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament (i.e. of <strong>the</strong> Hebrew Bible<br />
or Tanakh) and its reception in art consists of six chapters. The introduction<br />
(pp. 9ñ22) follows <strong>the</strong> impact of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament on culture<br />
in general. Central to this introduction is <strong>the</strong> work of Israeli<br />
scholar Shemaryahu Talmon, The Hebrew Bible as Inspiration in Culture,<br />
which is preceded <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> editor's preface and a short address<br />
delivered <strong>by</strong> Moshe Yegar, <strong>the</strong> Israeli ambassador in Prague.<br />
The second part of <strong>the</strong> volume, entitled Studies in Theology and<br />
Philosophy (pp. 23ñ62) presents <strong>the</strong> exegetical study Inspiration and<br />
Communication According to Gen. 2,7 (in German) <strong>by</strong> Czech biblical<br />
scholar Jan Heller. Following this is an analysis of a painting <strong>by</strong><br />
Willemd Drost depicting <strong>the</strong> dialogue of Naomi and Ruth just after<br />
<strong>the</strong> departing of Oprah. This painting, as <strong>the</strong> author Dutch professor<br />
of biblical studies Karel Deurloo argues in his analysis, does not<br />
only aspire to be an illustration of <strong>the</strong> scriptural narrative, but as<br />
well, an artistic rendering of <strong>the</strong> message of <strong>the</strong> Book of Ruth. The<br />
third contribution to this section, <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Czech scholar Martin Prudk˝,<br />
examines <strong>the</strong> Second Commandment of <strong>the</strong> Decalogue lingustically<br />
and <strong>the</strong>ologically. An interesting study on <strong>the</strong> function of art in <strong>the</strong><br />
Old Testament <strong>by</strong> Czech professor of religion Milan Balab·n bears a<br />
title Achetypology of <strong>the</strong> Israeli Art of Painting (and Building) in<br />
Tanakh (in German) and concludes this section of <strong>the</strong> volume.<br />
A brief third chapter titled Studies in Czech and Slovak Bible<br />
Translation (pp. 63ñ71) consists of a study <strong>by</strong> Czech scholar Stanislav<br />
132
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
Segert, a long time resident of <strong>the</strong> USA. Entitled Old Testament Poetry:<br />
Czech and Slovak Translations and Transformations, it discusses<br />
<strong>the</strong> motives of <strong>the</strong> Songs of Songs and of <strong>the</strong> Psalms which have been<br />
creatively transformed and translated into Czech and Slovak poetry<br />
and music.<br />
The most extensive chapter, called Studies in Bible and Visual Arts<br />
(pp. 72ñ139), includes S. Talmonís amply illustrated study A Unique<br />
Depiction of a Scene From <strong>the</strong> Book of Jonah in a 13th Century<br />
Illuminated Hebrew Manuscript, showing <strong>the</strong> openness of Medieval<br />
Jewish illuminative art to <strong>the</strong> motives of classic Greek mythology and<br />
<strong>the</strong> Christian milieu. Next is <strong>the</strong> essay The Gothic Mural Painting of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Stations of <strong>the</strong> Cross in <strong>the</strong> Monastery of Emauzy (in German)<br />
which traces <strong>the</strong> influence of <strong>the</strong> central images of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament<br />
on <strong>the</strong> Christian art found at Emauzy. The author, Zuzana VöeteËkov·,<br />
is a member of <strong>the</strong> Czech Academy of Sciences. A similarly oriented<br />
contribution that might be considered is <strong>the</strong> study The Tower of Babel<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Bedford Books of Hours <strong>by</strong> Israeli scholar Mira Friedman,<br />
which investigates <strong>the</strong> influence of Jewish Midrashic legends on<br />
Gen. 11 in Christian art. Katrin Kogman-Appel takes ano<strong>the</strong>r direction<br />
in her stimulating exposition titled The Iconography of <strong>the</strong> Biblical<br />
Cycle of <strong>the</strong> Second Nuremberg and <strong>the</strong> Yahudah Haggadot: Tradition<br />
and Innovation. This detailed study analyses two Haggadots,<br />
challenging <strong>the</strong> prevailing method of interpretation of <strong>the</strong> iconography<br />
of biblical manuscripts. This method, orignating with Kurt<br />
Weitzman, emphasizes <strong>the</strong> necessity of certain model of an artistic<br />
prototype as a starting point and key for <strong>the</strong> study of o<strong>the</strong>r traditions<br />
which use this model as <strong>the</strong> given and essential pattern. Kogman-<br />
Appel opposes this interpretation, arguing that of <strong>the</strong> two Haggadots<br />
studied, nei<strong>the</strong>r belonged to any of <strong>the</strong> iconographical traditions, nor<br />
were directly connected with <strong>the</strong>m. On <strong>the</strong> contrary, <strong>the</strong>se Haggadot<br />
provide us with an excellent example of <strong>the</strong> peculiar and innovative<br />
way of <strong>the</strong> illustration of <strong>the</strong> Jewish manuscripts. The author concludes<br />
her argument with this statement:<br />
The Jewish artist of <strong>the</strong> Second Nuremberg and Yahudah<br />
Haggadot, far from being merely a talented copyist, was a highly<br />
original, creative and innovative illustrator, well aquainted with recent<br />
artistic trends of <strong>the</strong> developing graphic arts, thoroughly familiar<br />
133
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
with <strong>the</strong> Rabbinic tradition and deeply concerned to emphasize to<br />
Jewish character of his work. He did not depend upon a single source,<br />
but was inspired <strong>by</strong> a variety of models, elements of which he combined<br />
freely with his own unique creations (pp. 130 ñ131).<br />
The last contribution to <strong>the</strong> chapter is entitled Old Testament<br />
Scenes in <strong>the</strong> Bible of King Wenceslas IV, written <strong>by</strong> Hana Hlav·Ëkov·,<br />
member of The Academy of Science.<br />
The fifth chapter of <strong>the</strong> volume, titled Studies in Bible and Music,<br />
(pp. 140ñ182) begins with a remarkable study <strong>by</strong> Frantiöek J. Hole-<br />
Ëek O. M. titled The Books of Maccabees as an Inspiration of <strong>the</strong><br />
Hussite Choral Who Are <strong>the</strong> Gods Fighters.The author of <strong>the</strong> study<br />
discusses <strong>the</strong> choral line <strong>by</strong> line, referencing <strong>the</strong> stance of <strong>the</strong> Czech<br />
reformer Jan Hus toward The Book of Maccabees. HoleËeks frequent<br />
quotations from various historical documents aid readers in grasping<br />
<strong>the</strong> intensive dependence of Hus and <strong>the</strong> Hussites on d<strong>the</strong>se apocryphal<br />
booksd. The second contribution to this chapter is titled Violent<br />
Embraces: Monastic Representations of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament, written<br />
<strong>by</strong> M. Burcht Pranger from <strong>the</strong> University of Amsterdam, who points<br />
to a non-referentiality which ìunderlies whatever meaning of whatever<br />
imageî (p. 172). Pranger, interpreting especially <strong>the</strong> paintings<br />
The Stations of <strong>the</strong> Cross created <strong>by</strong> Barnett Newman, argues that<br />
each image provides <strong>the</strong> observer with new, unexpected and dramatic<br />
encounters.<br />
The sixth chapter, titled Studies in Bible and Literature,<br />
(pp. 183ñ200) is a contribution provided <strong>by</strong> Stefan Schreiner from<br />
<strong>the</strong> Institutum Judaicum, T¸bingen. Entitled The Bible In Narratives<br />
of Bruno Schulz, (in German) it examines <strong>the</strong> enigmatic work of <strong>the</strong><br />
writer, painter and visionary Bruno Schulz, exploring why and to<br />
what degree this assimilated Polish Jew was inspired <strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> Old<br />
Testament.<br />
Surely it is intentional that <strong>the</strong> pivotal <strong>the</strong>me of <strong>the</strong> work appears<br />
to be <strong>the</strong> Second Commandment of <strong>the</strong> Decalogue. This is manifested<br />
<strong>by</strong> <strong>the</strong> different perspectives presented according to <strong>the</strong> specialization<br />
of <strong>the</strong> individual scholars who contributed to <strong>the</strong> volume.<br />
The prohibition of making images has profound <strong>the</strong>ological implications.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> one hand, it constitutes <strong>the</strong> ideological peculiarity of <strong>the</strong><br />
Old Testament, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r it distinctly influenced <strong>the</strong> later Jews and<br />
134
BOOK REVIEWS<br />
Christians of <strong>the</strong> Old Testament on art. Therefore <strong>the</strong> prohibition, as<br />
quoted <strong>by</strong> S. Talmon, who states that ì<strong>the</strong> biblical authors paint in<br />
wordsî, thus making up for <strong>the</strong> absence of <strong>the</strong> medium of painting,<br />
which in ancient Israel was proscribed <strong>by</strong> law, with narration. (p. 21).<br />
The emphasis on an aniconic approach to God is also, according to<br />
M. Prudk˝ís contextual linguistic and <strong>the</strong>ological analysis, <strong>the</strong> main<br />
message of <strong>the</strong> Second commandment; he opposes <strong>the</strong> idea <strong>the</strong> prohibition<br />
on picturing would refer to o<strong>the</strong>r gods only. Moreover, <strong>the</strong><br />
prohibition of making images is not a result of a sceptical attitude<br />
toward art. Substantiation of this prohibition is, according to Prudk˝,<br />
not ìderived from <strong>the</strong> philosophic recognition of <strong>the</strong> inappropriateness<br />
of <strong>the</strong> analogy of <strong>the</strong> image, nor from any sceptical or negative<br />
attitude to art in general, but from <strong>the</strong> basic <strong>the</strong>ological postulates of<br />
<strong>the</strong> faith of Israel: any kind of image would be a threat to <strong>the</strong> freedom<br />
of YHWH, which he preserves in sovereign fashion even with regard<br />
to <strong>the</strong> worship of his own peopleî (p. 47). Consequently, he believes<br />
<strong>the</strong> Second Command applies not only to <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r gods, but also to<br />
<strong>the</strong> God of Israel. A similar point of view is expressed <strong>by</strong> M. Balab·n,<br />
ergo: <strong>the</strong> ability to make images contains a threat that <strong>the</strong> image<br />
might gain dominance over <strong>the</strong> subject it delineates (see p. 54). Analogously,<br />
M. Friedman documents that <strong>the</strong> capability of <strong>the</strong> Jewish artists<br />
not to portray God anthropomorphically also finds acceptance<br />
here and <strong>the</strong>re in Christian art (cf. p. 115f).<br />
The Old Testament as Inspiration in Culture a is well-balanced<br />
publication, recommended to all who are interested in <strong>the</strong> Old Testament<br />
and its impact on past and present culture. All unpublished<br />
essays presented during <strong>the</strong> symposium are briefly mentioned in <strong>the</strong><br />
summary at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> volume, which has been composed <strong>by</strong><br />
professor Jan Heller (pp. 201ñ203).<br />
135
ADDRESSES OF THE CONTRIBUTORS TO THIS ISSUE<br />
Jind¯ich Halama, e-mail: halama@etf.cuni.cz;<br />
Karlova Universita v†Praze,<br />
Evangelick· teologick· fakulta,<br />
»ern· 9, CZ 115 55 Praha 1<br />
Jacob Nesuner,<br />
e-mail: neusner@webjogger.net<br />
Bard College, Annandale-on-Hudson, New York<br />
12504, USA<br />
Martin Rothkegel, e-mail: rothkegel@centrum.cz<br />
Jugosl·vsk˝ch partyz·n˘ 31, CZ 160 00 Praha 6<br />
Gerhard Sauter,<br />
Stanislav Segert,<br />
Filip »apek,<br />
Pavel Hoöek,<br />
e-mail: ute600@snphilos1.philos.uni-bonn.de<br />
Rheinische Friedrich- Wilhelms-Universit‰t<br />
Bonn<br />
Evangelisch-Theologische Fakult‰t,<br />
÷kumenisches Institut<br />
Am Hof 1, D53113 Bonn<br />
e-mail: segert@beachnet.com<br />
University of California, Los Angeles<br />
Near Eastern Languages and Cultures<br />
376 Kinsey Hall, Box 951511, LA, California<br />
90095-1511, USA<br />
e-mail: filipcapek@yahoo.com<br />
Masarykovo n·m.19,<br />
CZ 503 46 T¯ebechovice pod Orebem<br />
e-mail: hosek@etspraha.cz<br />
ETS, StoliÚsk· 2417/41a, CZ 193 00 Praha 9<br />
The authors of <strong>the</strong> articles herein published are responsible for <strong>the</strong>ir contents,<br />
and while <strong>the</strong> editors have presented <strong>the</strong>ir ideas for discussion, <strong>the</strong>y need not<br />
agree with <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Communio viatorum is indexed in <strong>the</strong> ATLA Religion Database , published <strong>by</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> American Theological Library Association, 250 S. Wacker Dr., 16 th Flr.,<br />
Chicago, IL 60606, E-mail: atla@atla.com, WWW: http://www.atla.com.<br />
140